S Course Syllabus BTECH CBCS 24082020

BIRLA INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
CHOICE BASED CREDIT SYSTEM (CBCS) CURRICULUM

(Effective from Academic Session: Monsoon 2018)
NAME OF THE PROGRAMME
B.TECH. Electronics and Communication Engineering
NAME OF THE DEPARTMENT
Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering

Institute Vision
To become a Globally Recognised Academic Institution in consonance with the social, economic
and ecological environment, striving continuously for excellence in education, research, and
technological service to the National needs.
Institute Mission
• To educate students at Under Graduate, Post Graduate, Doctoral, and Post-Doctoral levels to
perform challenging engineering and managerial jobs in industry.
• To provide excellent research and development facilities to take up Ph.D. programmes and
research projects.
• To develop effective teaching learning skills and state of art research potential of the faculty.
• To build national capabilities in technology, education, and research in emerging areas.
• To provide excellent technological services to satisfy the requirements of the industry and overall
academic needs of society.
Department Vision:
To become a centre of excellence in teaching and research for creating technical manpower to
meet the technological, societal and environmental needs of the country in the field of Electronics
and Communication Engineering.
Department Mission
• To offer state of the art education of global standards through innovative methods of
teaching and learning with practical orientation aiming to prepare the students for
successful career and to provide required technological services.
• To prepare the students to think independently, take initiative, lead a team in an

organization, take responsibility and solve the problems related to industry, society,
environmental, health, safety, legal and cultural issues maintaining the professional
ethics.
• To pursue high quality contemporary research through continued interaction with

research organizations and industries.
Graduate Attributes
1. Engineering Knowledge: Apply knowledge of mathematics, science, engineering

fundamentals and an engineering specialization to the solution of complex engineering
problems.
2. Problem Analysis: Identify, formulate, research literature and analyze complex

engineering problems
reaching substantiated conclusions using first principles of mathematics, natural sciences
and engineering sciences.
3. Design/ Development of Solutions: Design solutions for complex engineering problems

and design system components or processes that meet specified needs with appropriate
consideration for public health and safety, cultural, societal and environmental
considerations.
4. Conduct investigations of complex problems using research-based knowledge and

research methods including design of experiments, analysis and interpretation of data and
synthesis of information to provide valid conclusions.
5. Modern Tool Usage: Create, select and apply appropriate techniques, resources and
modern engineering and IT tools including prediction and modelling to complex
engineering activities with an understanding of the limitations.
6. The Engineer and Society: Apply reasoning informed by contextual knowledge to

assess societal, health, safety, legal and cultural issues and the consequent responsibilities
relevant to professional engineering practice.
7. Environment and Sustainability: Understand the impact of professional engineering

solutions in societal and environmental contexts and demonstrate knowledge of and need
for sustainable development.
8. Ethics: Apply ethical principles and commit to professional ethics and responsibilities
and norms of engineering practice.
9. Individual and Team Work: Function effectively as an individual, and as a member or

leader in diverse teams and in multi-disciplinary settings.
10. Communication: Communicate effectively on complex engineering activities with the

engineering community and with society at large, such as being able to comprehend and
write effective reports and design documentation, make effective presentations and give
and receive clear instructions.
11. Project Management and Finance: Demonstrate knowledge and understanding of

engineering and management principles and apply these to one’s own work, as a member
and leader in a team, to manage projects and in multidisciplinary environments.
12. Life-long Learning: Recognize the need for and have the preparation and ability to
engage in independent and life- long learning in the broadest context of technological
change.
Programme Educational Objectives (PEOs)
1. To develop an ability to apply the knowledge acquired in basic sciences and engineering
for solving Electronics and Communication Engineering problems with regards to
technical, economic, environmental and social contexts.
2. To build confident and competent graduates capable of designing and testing electronic
devices and communication systems for the given specifications.
3. To inculcate an attitude to work in a team using technical knowhow, software tools and
interdisciplinary working environments to achieve project goals.
4. To nurture effective communication and interpersonal skills to demonstrate leadership
qualities, and exhibit professional ethics.
5. To develop an ability, enthusiasm and understanding for life-long learning development
and motivation towards higher studies and research.
(A) Programme Outcomes (POs)
Engineering Graduates will be able to:

1. Engineering knowledge: Apply the knowledge of mathematics, science, engineering
fundamentals, and an engineering specialization to the solution of complex engineering
problems.
2. Problem analysis: Identify, formulate, review research literature, and analyze complex
engineering problems reaching substantiated conclusions using first principles of
mathematics, natural sciences, and engineering sciences.
3. Design/development of solutions: Design solutions for complex engineering problems

and design system components or processes that meet the specified needs with
appropriate consideration for the public health and safety, and the cultural, societal, and
environmental considerations.
4. Conduct investigations of complex problems: Use research-based knowledge and

research methods including design of experiments, analysis and interpretation of data,
and synthesis of the information to provide valid conclusions.
5. Modern tool usage: Create, select, and apply appropriate techniques, resources, and
modern engineering and IT tools including prediction and modeling to complex
engineering activities with an understanding of the limitations.
6. The engineer and society: Apply reasoning informed by the contextual knowledge to
assess societal, health, safety, legal and cultural issues and the consequent responsibilities
relevant to the professional engineering practice.
7. Environment and sustainability: Understand the impact of the professional engineering

solutions in societal and environmental contexts, and demonstrate the knowledge of, and
need for sustainable development.
8. Ethics: Apply ethical principles and commit to professional ethics and responsibilities
and norms of the engineering practice.
9. Individual and team work: Function effectively as an individual, and as a member or

leader in diverse teams, and in multidisciplinary settings.
10. Communication: Communicate effectively on complex engineering activities with the

engineering community and with society at large, such as, being able to comprehend and
write effective reports and design documentation, make effective presentations, and give
and receive clear instructions.
11. Project management and finance: Demonstrate knowledge and understanding of the
engineering and management principles and apply these to one’s own work, as a member
and leader in a team, to manage projects and in multidisciplinary environments.
12. Life-long learning: Recognize the need for, and have the preparation and ability to
engage in independent and life-long learning in the broadest context of technological
change.
(B) Programme Specific Outcomes (PSOs)
1. Apply the knowledge acquired in basic sciences and engineering for solving electronics
and communication engineering problems.
2. Build competence in design and analysis of electronics and communication systems.
3. Develop skills to carry out research in electronic instrumentation, signal processing,
VLSI systems, microwave engineering, wireless communication and networking.
PROGRAMME COURSE STRUCTURE (ALL SEMESTERS)
BIRLA INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY- MESRA, RANCHI

NEWCOURSE STRUCTURE - To be effective from academic session 2018- 19
Based on CBCS & OBE model
Recommended scheme of study
(B.Tech. in Electronics & Communications Engineering, Computer Science & Engineering, Electrical &
Electronics Engineering, Information Technology)
Mode of delivery & credits Total

L-Lecture; T-Tutorial; Credits
Course P-Practicals C- Credits
Category
Semester/ Session Course Level Code Course
of course
of Study L T P
(Recommended) (Periods/ (Periods/ (Periods/ C
week ) week) week)
THEORY
FS MA 103 Mathematics - I 3 1 0 4
Foundation
Sciences CH101 Chemistry 3 1 0 4
FIRST Basics of Electronics &
GE EC101
Communication Engineering 3 1 0 4
General
Engineering ME101 Basics of Mechanical Engineering
3 1 0 4
FIRST
LABORATORIES
Monsoon
FS CH102 Chemistry Lab 0 0 3 1.5
Electronics & Communication
GE EC102
Lab 0 0 3 1.5
FIRST
GE ME102 Engineering Graphics 0 0 4 2
MC MC101/10 Choice of : NCC/NSS/

0 0 2 1
Mandatory Course 2/103/104 PT & Games/ Creative Arts (CA)
TOTAL 22
THEORY
MA107 Mathematics - II 3 1 0 4
FS
PH113 Physics 3 1 0 4
FIRST
CS101 Programming for problem Solving 3 1 0 4
GE
EE101 Basics of Electrical Engineering 3 1 0 4
SECOND
Spring LABORATORIES
FS PH114 Physics Lab 0 0 3 1.5

Programming for problem Solving
CS102
lab 0 0 3 1.5
GE
FIRST
PE101 Workshop Practice 0 0 3 1.5
MC MC105/10 Choice of : NCC/NSS/

0 0 2 1
6/107/108 PT & Games/ Creative Arts (CA)
TOTAL 21.5
GRAND TOTAL FOR FIRST YEAR 43.5

Recommended scheme of study
B.Tech. in Electronics & Communications Engineering
L-Lecture; T-Tutorial; Credits
Semester/ Session P-Practicals C- Credits
Category Course Code
of Study Course Level Courses
of course
(Recommended) L T P
(Periods/ (Periods/ (Periods/ C
week ) week) week)
THEORY
FIRST FS BE101 Biological Science for Engineers 2 0 0 2
GE IT 201 Basics of Intelligent Computing 3 0 0 3
EE205 Circuit Theory 3 1 0 4

SECOND
EC201 Electronic Devices 3 0 0 3
PC
EC203 Digital System Design 3 0 0 3
THIRD EC205 Signals and Systems 3 0 0 3
Monsoon
LABORATORIES
FIRST GE EE102 Electrical Engineering lab 0 0 3 1.5
MC MC201/202/2 Choice of : NCC/NSS/

0 0 2 1
03/204 PT & Games/ Creative Arts (CA)
SECOND EC202 Electronic Devices Lab 0 0 3 1.5

PC EC204 Digital System Design Lab 0 0 3 1.5
EC208 Electronic Measurements Lab 0 0 4 2
TOTAL 25.5
THEORY
SECOND FS MA203 Numerical Methods 2 0 0 2
FIRST FS CE101 Environmental Science 2 0 0 2
EC251 Probability and Random Processes 3 0 0 3
EC253 Analog Circuits 3 0 0 3

SECOND PC
EC255 Analog Communication 3 0 0 3
EC257 Electromagnetic Fields and Waves 3 0 0 3

FOURTH
Spring LABORATORIES
FS MA204 Numerical Methods Lab 0 0 2 1
Basic IT Workshop
GE IT202 0 0 2 1
(Common Subject)
SECOND MC205/206/2 Choice of : NCC/NSS/

MC 0 0 2 1
07/208 PT & Games/ Creative Arts (CA)
EC254 Analog Circuits Lab 0 0 3 1.5

PC
EC258 Electromagnetic Waves Lab 0 0 3 1.5
TOTAL 22
EC301 Digital Communication 3 0 0 3
Microprocessors and
EC303 3 0 0 3
Microcontrollers
PC
EC305 Signal Processing Techniques 3 0 0 3
THIRD
Fundamentals of Data
EC307 3 0 0 3
Communication
FIFTH Monsoon PE Program Elective-I 3 0 0 3
OE Open Elective-I 3 0 0 3
LABORATORIES
EC302 Communication System Lab 0 0 4 2
Microprocessors and
THIRD PC
EC304 Microcontrollers Lab 0 0 3 1.5
EC306 Signal Processing Lab 0 0 3 1.5
TOTAL 23
Student may choose subjects of minor/specialization from 5th semester and onwards.
EC351 Fiber Optic Communication 3 0 0 3

Pulse, Digital and Switching
PC EC353 3 0 0 3
System
THIRD
EC379 Control Systems 3 0 0 3
PE Program Elective-II 3 0 0 3
OE Open Elective-II 3 0 0 3
FIRST HSS MT123 Business Communications 3 0 0 3

SIXTH
Spring
THIRD MC MC300 Summer training - Mandatory 3
HSS 0
SECOND MT204 Constitution of India 2 0 0
Non-credit
LABORATORIES
PC EC352 Fiber Optic Communication Lab 0 0 3 1.5

THIRD
Pulse, Digital and Switching
PC EC354 0 0 3 1.5
System Lab
TOTAL 24
EC401 Industrial Electronics 3 0 0 3
PC Professional Practice
EC403 2 0 0 2
Law & Ethics
SEVENTH Program Elective-III 3 0 0 3
FOURTH PE
Monsoon
Program Elective-IV 3 0 0 3
Open Elective-III 3 0 0 3
OE
Open Elective-IV 3 0 0 3
TOTAL 17
EIGTH Research project / Industry
PC EC400 NOT APPLICABLE 12
Spring FOURTH Internship
GRAND TOTAL
167
Minimum requirement for Degree award
DEPARTMENT OF ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING
PROGRAMME ELECTIVES (PE)*
OFFERED FOR LEVEL 1-4
Prerequisite/Corequisite courses
PE / LEVEL Code no. Name of the PE courses L T P C
with code
PE-I
EC309 Adaptive Signal Processing EC305 Signal Processing Techniques
3 0 0 3
EC311 Digital Signal Processor EC305 Signal Processing Techniques
3 0 0 3
EC313 Electronic Measurements EC208 Electronic Measurement Lab 3 0 0 3
EC315 Introduction to Industrial Instrumentation EC208 Electronic Measurement Lab
3 0 0 3
EC319 VLSI Systems EC101Basics of Electronics and
Communication Engineering, 3 0 0 3
EC201 Electronic Devices
EC321 Microelectronic Devices and Circuits EC101Basics of Electronics and
Communication Engineering,
PE/Level-3
(MO) SEM-V EC323 Microwave Theory and Techniques EC257 Electromagnetic Fields and Waves
3 0 0 3
EC325 Antenna and Wave Propagation EC257 Electromagnetic Fields and Waves
3 0 0 3
EC327 Mobile & Cellular Communication EC255 Analog Communication,

EC301 Digital Communication 3 0 0 3
EC329 Information Theory and Coding EC251 Probability and Random Process,
EC255 Analog Communication 3 0 0 3
EC331 Issues in Nanoscale CMOS Design EC101 Basics of Electronics and

* PROGRAMME ELECTIVES TO BE OPTED ONLY BY THE DEPARTMENT STUDENTS

with code
PE-II
EC355 Time Frequency and Wavelet Transform
EC205 Signals and Systems,
EC251Probability and Random Processes
EC357 Speech and Audio Processing

EC251Probability and Random Processes
EC359 Microcontrollers and Interfacing

EC303 Microprocessors and Microcontrollers 3 0 0 3
PE/Level-3 EC361 Digital Systems Design with FPGAs EC101 Basics of Electronics and
(SP) SEM-VI Communication Engineering,
3 0 0 3
EC203 digital System Design
EC363 Nanoelectronics EC101Basics of Electronics and
EC365 Radar and Navigation System
EC257 Electromagnetic Fields and Waves 3 0 0 3
EC367 Computer Networking

EC307 Fundamentals of Data Communication 3 0 0 3
EC369 Wireless Networks
EC307 Fundamentals of Data Communication 3 0 0 3
EC371 Introduction to Electromagnetic
Compatibility EC257 Electromagnetic Fields and Waves 3 0 0 3
EC373 Introduction to Sensors and Transducers EC208 Electronic Measurement Lab

3 0 0 3
EC375 High Speed Electronics EC101 Basics of Electronics and

EC381 Error correcting Codes EC329 Information Theory and Coding 3 0 0 3
EC383 DSP Architecture for VLSI EC331 VLSI Systems 3 0 0 3

EC305 Signal Processing Techniques
EC385 Physical Design Automation EC331 VLSI Systems 3 0 0 3
EC387 Wireless Communication EC255 Analog Communication, 3 0 0 3

EC301 Digital Communication
EC389 Radar Signal Analysis EC323 Microwave Theory and Techniques 3 0 0 3

with code
PE-III
EC405 Digital Image & Video Processing 3 0 0 3
EC407 Multichannel Signal Processing 3 0 0 3
EC351 Fiber Optic Communication

EC409 Fiber Optic Sensors 3 0 0 3
EC101 Basics of Electronics and

EC411 Mixed Signal Design Communication Engineering, 3 0 0 3
PE/Level- EC203 Digital System Design
4(MO) SEM- EC413 Real Time Embedded System EC303 Microprocessors and Microcontrollers 3 0 0 3
VII
EC415 Semicustom IC Design Communication Engineering, 3 0 0 3
EC255 Analog Communication,
EC419 Satellite Communication EC301 Digital Communication 3 0 0 3

Bio-Medical Electronics & Signal
EC421 EC305 Signal Processing Techniques 3 0 0 3
Processing
EC207 Probability and Random Processes
with code
PE-IV
EC423 Radar Engineering EC257 Electromagnetic Fields and Waves

EC425 Optoelectronic devices
EC351 Fiber Optic Communication 3 0 0 3
EC427 Neural Networks and Fuzzy System
3 0 0 3
EC429 Device Modeling & Simulation EC101 Basics of Electronics and

EC431 Multimedia Communication EC255 Analog Communication,
3 0 0 3
EC301 Digital Communication
EC433 Low Power VLSI Circuits EC101 Basics of Electronics and
EC435 ASIC Design
PE/Level- Communication Engineering,
4(MO) VII 3 0 0 3
SEM EC331 VLSI Systems
EC437 VLSI System Testing EC101 Basics of Electronics and

EC439 Integrated Circuit Technology EC101 Basics of Electronics and 3 0 0 3

EC447 Electronic Packaging EC101 Basics of Electronics and 3 0 0 3
EC331 VLSI Systems
EC449 Wireless Sensors networks EC307 Fundamentals of Data Communication 3 0 0 3

DEPARTMENT OF ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING OPEN
ELECTIVES (OE)*
OFFERED FOR LEVEL 1-4
Prerequisites
OE / Code
Name of the OE courses courses L T P C
LEVEL No.
with code
OE-I
EC333 Sensors and Transducers
OE/Level-3 N/A 3 0 0 3
(MO) EC335 Consumer Electronics N/A 3 0 0 3
OE-II
EC377 Introduction to Communication System
OE/Level-3
N/A 3 0 0 3
(SP)
OE-III
EC441 Introduction to MEMS N/A 3 0 0 3
OE/Level-4 EC443 Introduction to Human- Machine Interface N/A 3 0 0 3
(MO) OE-IV
EC445 Introduction to Signal Processing N/A 3 0 0 3
* OPEN ELECTIVES TO BE OPTED ONLY BY OTHER DEPARTMENT STUDENTS

Recommended scheme of study for
In-depth Specialisation in Signal Processing
Total
Course Mode of delivery & credits
Semester/ Session Course Category Credits
Code Courses L-Lecture; T-Tutorial;P-Practicals
of Study Level of course C- Credits
(Recommended) L T P C
THEORY
EC309 Adaptive Signal Processing 3 0 0 3
THIRD PE
FIFTH EC311 Digital Signal Processor 3 0 0 3
Monsoon LABORATORIES
THIRD PC EC312 Digital Signal Processor Lab 0 0 3 1.5
TOTAL 7.5
Time Frequency and Wavelet
EC355 3 0 0 3
THIRD PE Transform
SIXTH EC357 Speech and Audio Processing 3 0 0 3
Spring LABORATORIES
Time Frequency and Wavelet
THIRD PC EC356
Transform Lab 0 0 3 1.5
TOTAL 7.5
FOURTH PE EC405 Digital & Video Image Processing 3 0 0 3

SEVENTH
LABORATORIES
Monsoon
FOURTH PC EC406 Image Processing Lab 0 0 4 2
TOTAL 5
GRAND TOTAL
20
Minimum requirement for In-depth Specialisation award
In-depth Specialisation in Electronic Instrumentation
Total
Course Category Credits
Semester/ Session Code Courses L-Lecture; T-Tutorial;P-Practicals
Level of course C- Credits
of Study
THEORY
EC313 Electronic Measurements 3 0 0 3
THIRD PE
EC315 Introduction to Industrial 3 0 0 3
FIFTH Instrumentation
Monsoon
LABORATORIES
THIRD PC EC316 Industrial Instrumentation Lab 0 0 4 2
TOTAL 8
Microcontrollers and
EC359 3 0 0 3
Interfacing
THIRD PE
Introduction to Sensors and
SIXTH EC373 3 0 0 3
Transducers
Spring
LABORATORIES
THIRD PC EC360 Microcontroller Lab 0 0 3 1.5
TOTAL 7.5
Bio-Medical Electronics &
FOURTH PE EC421 3 0 0 3
Signal Processing
SEVENTH
LABORATORIES
Monsoon
Bio-Medical Signal
FOURTH PC EC422 0 0 3 1.5
Processing Lab
TOTAL 4.5
GRAND TOTAL
20
In-depth Specialisation in Microwave Engineering
Total
of Study
THEORY
EC323 Microwave Theory and Techniques 3 0 0 3

THIRD PE
FIFTH EC325 Antenna and Wave Propagation 3 0 0 3
Monsoon
LABORATORIES
THIRD PC EC324 Microwave Engineering Lab 0 0 3 1.5
TOTAL 7.5
EC365 Radar and Navigation System 3 0 0 3
THIRD PE Introduction to Electromagnetic
SIXTH EC371 3 0 0 3
Compatibility
Spring
LABORATORIES
THIRD PC EC366 Advanced Microwave Lab 0 0 3 1.5
TOTAL 7.5
FOURTH PE EC419 Satellite Communication 3 0 0 3

SEVENTH
LABORATORIES
Monsoon
FOURTH PC EC420 Advanced Communication Lab 0 0 4 2
TOTAL 5
GRAND TOTAL
20
In-depth Specialisation in Wireless Communication and Networking
Total
of Study
THEORY
Mobile and Cellular
EC327 3 0 0 3
Communication
THIRD PE
Information Theory and
FIFTH EC329 3 0 0 3
Coding
Monsoon
LABORATORIES
Mobile and Cellular
THIRD PC EC328 0 0 3 1.5
Communication Lab
TOTAL 7.5
EC367 Computer Networking 3 0 0 3
THIRD PE
SIXTH EC369 Wireless Networks 3 0 0 3
Spring LABORATORIES
THIRD PC EC370 Wireless Networks Lab 0 0 3 1.5
TOTAL 7.5
FOURTH PE EC419 Satellite Communication 3 0 0 3

SEVENTH
LABORATORIES
Monsoon
Advanced Communication
FOURTH PC EC420 0 0 4 2
Lab
TOTAL 5
GRAND TOTAL
20
In-depth Specialisation in VLSI Systems
Course L-Lecture; T-Tutorial; Credits
Semester/ Session Category
Course Level Code Courses P-Practicals C- Credits
of Study of course
THEORY
EC319 VLSI Systems 3 0 0 3
THIRD PE
FIFTH EC321 Microelectronic Devices and Circuits 3 0 0 3
Monsoon
LABORATORIES
THIRD PC EC320 VLSI Systems Lab 0 0 3 1.5
TOTAL 7.5
EC361 Digital Systems Design with FPGAs 3 0 0 3

THIRD PE
SIXTH EC363 Nanoelectronics 3 0 0 3
Spring LABORATORIES
THIRD PC EC362 Digital Systems Design with FPGAs Lab 0 0 4 2
TOTAL 8
FOURTH PE EC413 Real Time Embedded System 3 0 0 3
SEVENTH
LABORATORIES
Monsoon
FOURTH PC EC414 Real Time Embedded System Lab 0 0 3 1.5
TOTAL 4.5
GRAND TOTAL
20
Page 19 of 465
Minor in Electronics & Communications Engineering
Total
Semester/ Session Category Credits
Course Level Code Course L-Lecture; T-Tutorial;P-Practicals
of Study of course C- Credits
THEORY
EC201/ Electronic Devices/
3 0 0 3
SECOND PC EC203 Digital System Design
FIFTH EC205 Signals and Systems 3 0 0 3

EC202/ Electronic Devices Lab/

SECOND PC 0 0 3 1.5
EC204 Digital System Design Lab
TOTAL 7.5
EC253 Analog Circuits 3 0 0 3
SECOND PC
SIXTH EC255 Analog Communication 3 0 0 3
Spring LABORATORIES
SECOND PC EC254 Analog Circuits Lab 0 0 3 1.5
TOTAL 7.5
THIRD PC EC301 Digital Communication 3 0 0 3

SEVENTH
FOURTH PC EC402 Communication Lab 0 0 3 2
TOTAL 5
GRAND TOTAL
20
Minimum requirement for Minor degree award
Page 20 of 465
BLOOM’S TAXONOMY FOR CURRICULUM DESIGN AND ASSESSMENT:
Preamble
The design of curriculum and assessment is based on Bloom’s Taxonomy. A comprehensive

guideline for using Bloom’s Taxonomy is given below for reference.
Page 21 of 465
Page 22 of 465
COURSE INFORMATION SHEET
Course code: EC101

Course title: Basics of Electronics & Communication Engineering
Pre-requisite(s): N/A
Co- requisite(s): N/A
Credits: L: 3 T: 1 P: 0 C: 4
Class schedule per week: 04
Class: B. Tech.
Semester / Level: 01/01
Branch: ALL B. Tech.
Name of Teacher: All
Course Objectives:
This course enables the students:
1. To understand PN Junction, diodes and their applications.

2. To comprehend BJT, FET and their bias configurations.
3. To grasp importance of feedback in amplifier circuits, op amp and its applications.
4. To understand number system, Logic Gates and Boolean algebra.
5. To apprehend fundamentals of communication technology.
Course Outcomes:
After the completion of this course, students will be able to:
CO1 Explain PN Junction, diodes and their applications.

CO2 Appraise the BJT, FET and their biasing techniques.
CO3 Comprehend feedback in amplifier circuits, op amp and its applications.
CO4 Translate one number system into another, build circuits with Logic Gates, electronic
components and OPAMP IC 741 and analyze the measurement results using CRO.
CO5 Appraise the fundamentals of communication technology.
Page 23 of 344
SYLLABUS
(NO. OF
MODULE LECTURE
HOURS)
Module-1
Diodes and Applications: Introduction to PN junction diodes; Characteristics of 12
semiconductor diodes: V-I characteristics, diode-resistance, temperature-
dependence, diode-capacitance; DC & AC load lines; Breakdown Mechanisms;
Zener Diode – Operation and Applications; Diode as a Rectifier: Half Wave and
Full Wave Rectifiers with and without C-Filters.
Module-2
Bipolar Junction Transistors (BJT): PNP and NPN Transistors, Basic 12
Transistor Action, Input and Output Characteristics of CB, CE and CC
Configurations, dc and ac load line analysis, operating point, Transistor biasing:
Fixed bias, emitter bias/self-bias, Low-frequency response of CE amplifier.
Field Effect Transistors: JFET, Idea of Channel Formation, Pinch-Off and
saturation Voltage, Current-Voltage Output Characteristics; MOSFET: Basic
structure, operation and characteristics.
Module-3
Sinusoidal Oscillators: Concept of positive and negative feedback, Barkhausen 8
criterion for sustained oscillations, Determination of Frequency and Condition of
oscillation, Hartley and Colpitt’s oscillator.
Operational Amplifiers: Characteristics of an Ideal and Practical Operational
Amplifier (IC 741), Inverting and non-inverting amplifiers, Offset error voltages
and currents; Power supply rejection ratio, Slew Rate and concept of Virtual
Ground, Summing and Difference Amplifiers, Differentiator and Integrator, RC
phase shift oscillator.
Module-4
Logic Gates and Boolean algebra: Introduction to Boolean Algebra and 8
Boolean operators, Symbolic representation, Boolean algebraic function and
Truth table of different Digital logic Gates (AND, OR, NOT, NAND, NOR, EX-
OR, EX-NOR); Realization of Basic logic gates using universal gates, Adder,
Subtractor, adder/subtractor.
Module-5
Electronic communication: Introduction to electronic communication system, 10
Electromagnetic Communication spectrum band and applications, Elements of
Electronic Communication System; Merits and demerits of analog and digital
communication, Modes of communication; Signal radiation and propagation;
Need for modulation; Introduction to Amplitude modulation and Angle
modulation.
Page 24 of 344
Text Books:
1. Millman J., Halkias C.C., Parikh Chetan, “Integrated Electronics: Analog and Digital
Circuits and Systems”, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2/e.
2. Mano M.M., “Digital Logic and Computer Design”, Pearson Education, Inc, Thirteenth
Impression, 2011.
3. Singal T. L., “Analog and Digital Communications”, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2/e.
4. Haykin S., Moher M., “Introduction to Analog & Digital Communications”, Wiley India
Pvt. Ltd., 2/e.
Reference Book:
1. Boylstead R.L., Nashelsky L., “Electronic Devices and Circuit Theory”, Pearson
Education, Inc, 10/e.
Gaps in the syllabus (to meet Industry/Profession requirements): NA
POs met through Gaps in the Syllabus: 3, 11, 12
Topics beyond syllabus/Advanced topics/Design: NA
POs met through Topics beyond syllabus/Advanced topics/Design: 2, 3, 11, 12
Course Outcome (CO) Attainment Assessment Tools & Evaluation Procedure:

Direct Assessment
Assessment Tool % Contribution during CO Assessment
First Quiz 10
Mid Semester Examination 25
Second Quiz 10
Teacher’s Assessment 5
End Semester Examination 50
Indirect Assessment
1. Student Feedback on Faculty

2. Student Feedback on Course Outcome
Page 25 of 344
Mapping of Course Outcomes onto Program Outcomes:
Program
Specific
Course Program Outcomes (POs)
Outcomes
Outcome
(PSOs)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
CO1 3 3 1 2 3 1 1 2 2 3 2 2 3 3 1
CO2 3 3 1 2 3 1 1 2 2 3 2 2 3 3 1
CO3 3 3 1 2 3 1 1 2 2 3 2 2 3 3 1
CO4 3 3 1 2 3 1 1 2 2 3 2 2 3 3 1
CO5 3 3 1 2 3 1 1 2 2 3 2 2 3 3 1
Correlation Levels 1, 2 or 3 as defined below:
1: Slight (Low) 2: Moderate (Medium) 3: Substantial (High)
Mapping Between COs and Course Delivery (CD) methods
CD Course Delivery Methods Course Course Delivery

Code Outcome Method Used
CD1 Lecture by use of Boards/LCD Projectors CO1 CD1, CD2, CD3, CD8
CD2 Quizzes CO2 CD1, CD2, CD3, CD8
CD3 Assignments/Seminars CO3 CD1, CD2, CD3, CD8
CD4 Mini Projects/Projects CO4 CD1, CD2, CD3, CD8
CD5 Laboratory Experiments/Teaching Aids CO5 CD1, CD2, CD3, CD8
CD6 Industrial/Guest Lectures
CD7 Industrial Visits/In-plant Training
CD8 Self- learning such as use of NPTEL Materials and
Internets
CD9 Simulation
Page 26 of 344
Course code: EC102

Course title: Electronics & Communication Lab
Pre-requisite(s):
Co- requisite(s):
Credits: L: 0 T: 0 P: 3 C: 1.5
Class: B. Tech.
Name of Teacher: ALL
Course Objectives:
1. To demonstrate the measurement of voltage, frequency using CRO
2. To explain PN junction characteristics and its applications.
3. To understand the frequency response of BJT amplifier and OPAMP.
4. To Realize logic gates and implement simple Boolean expression.
5. To explain the Amplitude Modulation and Frequency Modulation
Course Outcomes:
CO1 Make use of CRO for measuring different parameters
CO2 Appraise PN junction characteristics and its applications.
CO3 Experiment with Diodes, BJT and OPAMP
CO4 Design specified circuit using given electronic components/ICs/logic gates.
CO5 Demonstrate the working of Amplitude Modulation and Frequency Modulation
Syllabus
List of Compulsory experiments:

1. Name of the Experiment: MEASURMENTS USING CRO
AIM-1: To understand the Measurement of voltage, time period and frequency of different
signals on CRO.
AIM-2: To measure the frequency and phase of two different signals using Lissajous pattern.
2. Name of the Experiment: PN JUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS

AIM-1: To determine the forward bias V-I characteristics of PN junction diode and finding its
forward cut-in voltage.
AIM-2: To determine the reverse bias V-I characteristics of PN junction diode and finding its
reverse breakdown voltage.
Page 27 of 344
3. Name of the Experiment: ZENER DIODE
AIM-1: To design a basic voltage regulator circuit using Zener diode.
AIM-2: To determine the reverse bias V-I characteristics of Zener diode and finding its
reverse breakdown voltage.
4. Name of the Experiment: RECTIFIERS WITH FILTERS.

AIM-1: To understand the basic operation principle of Half-wave rectifier circuit and
measurement of rectification efficiency and ripple factor with and without C-Filter.
AIM-2: To understand the basic operation principle of Full-wave rectifier circuit and
measurement of rectification efficiency and ripple factor with and without C-Filter.
AIM-3: Simulate Half wave, Full wave and Bridge rectifier circuits and determine the
following in each case
i) ripple factor
ii) ratio of rectification
iii) TUF.
AIM-4: Simulate Half wave rectifier circuit and observe the effect on rectification at high
frequency.
5. Name of the Experiment: CE TRANSISTOR AMPLIFIER

AIM-1: To understand the basic operation principle of CE transistor amplifier circuit and
finding its frequency response.
AIM-2: To determine the gain bandwidth product of CE transistor amplifier from its
frequency response.
AIM-3: To determine the minimum input voltage for which the CE transistor amplifier
saturates for given gain.
6. Name of the Experiment: FIELD EFFECT TRANSISTOR

AIM-1: To determine the output and transfer characteristics of JFET.
AIM-2: To measure the voltage gain of JFET.
7. Name of the Experiment: RC OSCILLATOR.

AIM-1: To design a RC phase shift oscillator using IC-741 Op-Amp.
AIM-2: To measure its frequency of oscillation and finding the percentage of error in
Comparison with the ideal one.
Page 28 of 344
8. Name of the Experiment: OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIERS
AIM-1: To design the Inverting and Non-inverting amplifier using IC 741 OP-AMP.
AIM-2: To find its frequency response and calculate the gain bandwidth product.
AIM-3: To determine the minimum input voltage for which the inverting and non-inverting
amplifier saturates for the gains 100 and 101 respectively.
9. Name of the Experiment: LOGIC GATES

AIM-1: To understand basic Boolean logic functions (NOT, AND, OR).
AIM-2: To realize the basic logic gates (AND, OR, NOT) using NAND Gate (IC-7400).
10. Name of the Experiment: BOOLEAN FUNCTION

AIM-1: To understand AND Gate IC (IC 7408) and OR Gate IC (IC 7432)
AIM-2: To implement of the Boolean expression F = (A.B.C + D.E) using AND Gate (IC
7408) and OR Gate (IC 7432).
11. Name of the Experiment: AMPLITUDE MODULATION

AIM-1: To analyze the Amplitude modulation for three different cases (under modulation,
critical modulation and over modulation) using standard setup.
. AIM-2: To determine the percentage of error between the ideal and actual observations.
12. Name of the Experiment: FREQUENCY MODULATION

AIM-1: To analyze the Frequency modulation using standard setup.
AIM-2: To determine the value of frequency deviation from the observation.
Text Books:
1. Millman J., Halkias C.C., Parikh Chetan, “Integrated Electronics: Analog and Digital
Circuits and Systems”, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2/e.
2. Mano M.M., “Digital Logic and Computer Design”, Pearson Education, Inc, Thirteenth
Impression, 2011.
3. Singal T. L., “Analog and Digital Communications”, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2/e.
4. Haykin S., Moher M., “Introduction to Analog & Digital Communications”, Wiley India
Pvt. Ltd., 2/e.
Reference Book:
1. Boylstead R.L., Nashelsky L., “Electronic Devices and Circuit Theory”, Pearson
Education, Inc, 10/e.
Page 29 of 344
POs met through Gaps in the Syllabus: N/A.
Topics beyond syllabus/Advanced topics/Design: N/A
POs met through Topics beyond syllabus/Advanced topics/Design: N/A
Course Outcome (CO) Attainment Assessment tools & Evaluation procedure
Direct Assessment

Progressive Evaluation (60)
Attendance Marks 12
Day-to-day performance Marks 06
Lab Viva marks 20
Lab file Marks 12
Lab Quiz-I Marks 10
End SEM Evaluation (40)
Lab Quiz-II Marks 10
Lab performance Marks 30
Indirect Assessment –
Mapping of Course Outcomes onto Program Outcomes
Program
Specific
Outcomes
Outcome
(PSOs)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
CO1 3 3 1 2 3 1 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 1
CO2 3 3 1 2 3 1 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 1
CO3 3 2 1 2 3 1 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 1
CO4 3 3 1 2 3 1 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 1
CO5 3 2 1 2 3 1 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 1

Page 30 of 344
Mapping Between COs and Course Delivery (CD) methods:
CD Course
Course Delivery Methods Course Outcome
Code Delivery
Method Used
CD1 Lecture by use of Boards/LCD Projectors CO1 CD1, CD5, CD9
CD2 Tutorials/Assignments CO2 CD1, CD5, CD9

CD3 Seminars/ Quiz (s) CO3 CD1, CD5, CD9
CD4 Mini Projects/Projects CO4 CD1, CD5, CD9
CD5 Laboratory Experiments/Teaching Aids CO5 CD1, CD5, CD9
CD8 Self- learning such as use of NPTEL

Materials and Internets
CD9 Simulation
Page 31 of 344
Course code: EC201

Course title: Electronic Devices
Pre-requisite(s): EC101 Basics of Electronics & Communication Engineering
Co- requisite(s):
Credits: L: 3 T: 0 P: 0 C: 3
Class: B. Tech.
Semester / Level: III/02
Branch: ECE
Name of Teacher:
Course Objectives
This course envisions to impact to students to:
1. Understand Atoms, Electrons, Energy Bands and Charge Carriers in Semiconductors.

2. Grasp the impact of Excess Carriers in Semiconductors, Optical Absorption, Carrier
Lifetime, Photoconductivity and Diffusion of Carriers and apply the obtained
knowledge.
3. Appraise and analyse the characteristics of PN Junction and Junction Diodes.
4. Evaluate the characteristics of Bipolar Junction Transistor (BJT).
5. Comprehend the characteristics of Field-Effect Transistors and create their structures.
Course Outcomes
After the completion of this course, a student will be able to:
CO1 Describe and illustrate the Atoms, Electrons, Energy Bands and Charge Carriers in
Semiconductors.
CO2 Sketch and explain the Carrier Transport Phenomena in semiconductor.
CO3 Illustrate with the sketch of the structure of PN Junction and Junction Diodes
diagram their characteristics and analyse them.
CO4 Appraise the principle of operation BJTs, schematize their characteristics, assess
and summarize their features.
CO5 Schematize the structure and design Field Effect Transistors. Schematize their
characteristics and prepare an inference.
Page 32 of 344
SYLLABUS
(NO. OF
MODULE LECTURE
HOURS)
Module – I
Atoms, Electrons, Energy Bands and Charge Carriers in Semiconductors:
Quantum Mechanics, Bonding Forces and Energy Bands in Solids, Direct and
Indirect Semiconductors, LED, Variation of Energy Bands with Alloy 8
Composition, Effective Mass, Electrons and Holes in Quantum Wells, Gunn
Diode, Temperature Dependence of Carrier Concentrations, Conductivity and
Mobility, High-Field Effects, The Hall Effect.
Module – II
Excess Carriers in Semiconductors:
Optical Absorption, Luminescence, Carrier Lifetime and Photoconductivity, Solar
Cells; Diffusion of Carriers: Diffusion Processes, Diffusion and Drift of Carriers; 8
Built-in Fields, Diffusion and Recombination; The Continuity Equation, Steady
State Carrier Injection; Diffusion Length, The Haynes–Shockley Experiment.
Module – III
PN Junction and Junction Diodes:
Charge at Junction, Contact Potential, Capacitance of p-n Junctions, Reverse-Bias
Breakdown, Zener diode, Varactor Diode, Effects of Contact Potential on Carrier 8
Injection, Recombination and Generation in Transition Region, Metal–
Semiconductor Junctions, PIN diodes, Step Recovery Diodes, IMPATT diodes,
Tunnel Diode.
Module – IV
Bipolar Junction Transistor (BJT):
Fundamentals of BJT Operation, Amplification with BJTs, Minority Carrier
Distributions and Terminal Currents, Drift in the Base Region, Base Narrowing, 8
Avalanche Breakdown, Gummel–Poon Model, Kirk Effect; Frequency
Limitations of Transistors, High-Frequency Transistors, Heterojunction Bipolar
Transistors.
Module – V
Field-Effect Transistors:
Junction FET, GaAs MESFET, High Electron Mobility Transistor (HEMT);
Metal–Insulator–Semiconductor FET, MOSFET: Output Characteristics, Transfer
Characteristics, Mobility Models, Short Channel MOSFET I–V Characteristics,
8
Threshold Voltage Expression, Substrate Bias Effects, Subthreshold
Characteristics, Equivalent Circuit for the MOSFET, CMOS processes.
Page 33 of 344
Textbooks:
1. G. Streetman, and S. K. Banerjee, “Solid State Electronic Devices,” 7th edition, Pearson,
2014.
2. J. P. Colinge, C. A. Colinge, “Physics of Semiconductor Devices”, Springer Science &
Business Media, 2007.
Reference books:
1. SM Sze, Kwok K. Ng, “Physics of Semiconductor Devices”, 3/e, Wiley-Interscience, 2006.
2. Donald A. Neamen, Dhrubes Biswas "Semiconductor Physics and Devices", 4/e, McGraw-
Hill Education, 2012.
Gaps in the syllabus (to meet Industry/Profession requirements):

1. Hands-on-practical for Device fabrication.
POs met through Gaps in the Syllabus:

10
Topics beyond syllabus/Advanced topics/Design:

1. N/A
POs met through Topics beyond syllabus/Advanced topics/Design:

10
Course Outcome (CO) Attainment Assessment Tools and Evaluation Procedure
Direct Assessment

First Quiz 10
Second Quiz 10
Indirect Assessment
1. Students’ Feedback on Course Outcome.
Mapping between Course Outcomes and Program Outcomes

Program
Specific
Outcomes
Outcome
(PSOs)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
CO1 3 3 2 3 3 1 1 3 3 3 2 1
CO2 3 3 2 3 3 2 1 3 3 3 2 1
CO3 3 3 2 3 3 2 1 3 3 3 2 1
CO4 3 3 2 3 3 3 1 3 3 3 2 1
CO5 3 3 2 3 3 3 1 3 3 3 2 1

Page 34 of 344
CD Course Course Delivery

Course Delivery Methods
CD1 Lecture by use of Boards/LCD Projectors CO1 CD1, CD7, CD 8
CD2 Tutorials/Assignments CO2 CD1 and CD9
CD3 Seminars CO3 CD1, CD2 and CD3
CD4 Mini Projects/Projects CO4 CD1 and CD2
CD5 Laboratory Experiments/Teaching Aids CO5 CD1 and CD2
Self- learning such as use of NPTEL Materials and
CD8
Internets
CD9 Simulation
Page 35 of 344
Course code: EC202
Course title: Electronics Device Lab
Pre-requisite(s): EC101 Basics of Electronics & Communication Engineering,
Co- requisite(s): EC201 Electronic Devices
Credits: L: 0 T: 0 P: 3 C: 1.5
Class periods per week: 03
Class: B. Tech.
Branch: ECE
Name of Teacher:
Course Objectives
This course enables the students to:
1. understand the material and electrical parameters of intrinsic and extrinsic

semiconductor materials.
2. understand the basic characteristics of MOS transistor, Tunnel diode and solar cell
3. apply their understanding to use advance design TCAD tool to obtain the material
and electrical parameters of intrinsic and extrinsic semiconductor materials.
4. apply their understanding to use advance design TCAD tool to describe basic
characteristics of BJT and MOS transistors and inverter.
5. apply their understanding to use advance design TCAD tool to analyze

characteristics of inverter.
Course Outcomes
CO1 analyse the material and electrical parameters of intrinsic and extrinsic semiconductor
materials.
CO2 measure the basic characteristics of Tunnel diode and solar cell
CO3 measure the basic characteristics of MOS transistors
CO4 use the advance design tool TCAD to evaluate the material and electrical parameters
of intrinsic and extrinsic semiconductor materials.
CO5 use the advance design tool TCAD to construct BJT, MOS transistors and inverter
and evaluate their characteristics.
Page 36 of 344
SYLLABUS
Lab is the application of the theory (i.e., hands-on experiments related to the course contents).
Therefore, EC201 Electronic Devices is the syllabus for the EC202 Electronic Devices Lab.
Following experiments are the guidelines for the students. However, the questions for exams are
not limited to this experiment list.

1. Identify the type of semiconductor material and calculate the mobility, conductivity and
carrier concentration of majority carriers using Hall Effect experiment.
2. Calculate the bandgap of semiconductor materials.
3. Measure the I-V characteristics of an NPN transistor in Common Emitter (CE) mode.
4. Measure the Id-Vd and Id-Vg characteristics of an enhancement mode nMOSFET and a
depletion mode nMOSFET.
5. Measure the I-V characteristics of a tunnel diode.
6. Evaluate the I-V characteristics of an illuminated pn junction (solar cell).
7. Evaluate the parameters (sheet resistance, mobility, saturation velocity, etc.) of the intrinsic
and the extrinsic semiconductor materials using TCAD tool.
8. Construct a silicon pn junction diode and evaluate I-V characteristics curve using TCAD
tool.
9. Develop an NPN Transistor and measure the I-V characteristics curves in Common Emitter
(CE) mode using TCAD tool.
10. Develop an enhancement mode nMOSFET and measure Id-Vd and Id-Vg characteristics
using TCAD tool.
11. Construct an enhancement mode pMOSFET and measure Id-Vd and Id-Vg characteristics
using TCAD tool.
12. Design a CMOS inverter and asses the DC/transient characteristcs using TCAD tool.
List of Optional experiments:
1. Calculate the mobility and the diffusion coefficient of minority carriers using Haynes
Shockley experiment.
2. Evaluate the I-V characteristics of an NPN transistor in Common Collector (CC) mode.
3. Measure the I-V characteristics of an NPN transistor in Common Base (CB) mode.
4. Evaluate the I-V characteristics of a PNP transistor in Common Emitter (CE) mode.
5. Measure the I-V characteristics of a PNP transistor in Common Collector (CC) mode.
Page 37 of 344
6. Evaluate the I-V characteristics of a PNP transistor in Common Base (CB) mode.
7. Demonstrate the I-V characteristics of forward and reverse biased Silicon and Germanium
pn-junction diode.
8. Demonstrate the I-V characteristics of forward and reverse biased Zener diode. Study the
breakdown characteristics of the Zener diode.
9. Construct a PNP Transistor and evaluate the I-V characteristics curves in Common Emitter
(CE) mode using TCAD tool.
10. Demonstrate diode application as a rectifier using TCAD tool
11. Construct a depletion mode nMOSFET and evaluate Id-Vd and Id-Vg characteristics using
TCAD tool.
12. Construct a depletion mode pMOSFET and evaluate Id-Vd and Id-Vg characteristics using
TCAD tool.
Books recommended:
Textbooks:
1. G. Streetman, and S. K. Banerjee, “Solid State Electronic Devices,” 7th edition, Pearson, 2014.
2. J. P. Colinge, C. A. Colinge, “Physics of Semiconductor Devices”, Springer Science & Business
Media, 2007.
3. J. Rabaey, A. Chandrakasan, B. Nikolic, “Digital Integrated Circuits: A Design Perspective”, 2nd
ed., Prentice Hall, 2003.
Reference books:
1. SM Sze, Kwok K. Ng, “Physics of Semiconductor Devices”, 3/e, Wiley-Interscience, 2006.
2. Donald A. Neamen, Dhrubes Biswas "Semiconductor Physics and Devices", 4/e, McGraw-Hill
Education, 2012.
3. Cogenda Visual TCAD tool user manual.

10

N/A

10
Page 38 of 344
Direct Assessment
Assessment Tools % Contribution during CO Assessment

Continuous Internal Assessment 60
Semester End Examination 40
Continuous Internal Assessment % Distribution

Day to day performance & Lab files 30
Quiz(zes) 10
Viva 20
Semester End Examination % Distribution

Examination Experiment 30
Performance
Quiz 10
Indirect Assessment
Program
Specific
Outcomes
Outcome
(PSOs)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
CO1 3 3 3 3 3 1 1 1 3 3 3 2 2
CO2 3 3 3 3 3 1 1 1 3 3 3 2 2
CO3 3 3 3 3 3 1 1 1 3 3 3 2 1
CO4 3 3 3 3 3 1 1 1 3 3 3 2 1
CO5 3 3 3 3 3 1 1 1 3 3 3 2 1
Page 39 of 344
CD1 Lecture by use of boards/LCD projectors/OHP projectors

CD2 Assignments
CD3 Laboratory experiments/Teaching aids/Seminars
CD4 Mini Projects
CD5 Industrial visits/in-plant training
CD6 Self- learning such as use of NPTEL materials and internets
CD7 Simulation
Mapping between Course Outcomes and Course Delivery Method

Course Outcomes Course Delivery Method
CO1 CD1, CD3, CD6, CD7
Page 40 of 344
Course code: EC203
Course title: Digital System Design
Co- requisite(s):
Credits: L: 3 T:0 P:0 C:3
Class schedule per week: 3x1
Class: B. Tech
Branch: ECE
Name of Teacher:
Course Objectives
1. Understand the basics of digital electronics.

2. Apply the knowledge of digital electronics to construct various digital circuits.
3. Analyze the characteristics and explain the outputs of digital circuits.
4. Evaluate and asses the application of the digital circuits.
5. Design digital machine for simple computing and control.
Course Outcomes
CO1 Explain the concept of digital electronics.

CO2 Apply the knowledge to produce digital electronics circuits.
CO3 Analyse and categorize digital circuits.
CO4 Justify the uses of different digital circuits.
CO5 Schematize and demonstrate simple computing machines.
Page 41 of 344
SYLLABUS
(NO. OF
MODULE LECTURE
HOURS)
Module – I
Basics of Digital Electronics: Number representation, Binary number system, 8

Number base conversion, Octal, Hexadecimal and BCD codes, Binary Arithmetic,
Logic gates, Introduction to VHDL and Verilog, VHDL Models, Logic Families:
TTL, ECL, and CMOS Logic Circuits, Logic levels, voltages and currents, fan-in,
fan-out, speed, power dissipation. Comparison of logic families.
Module – II
Simplification of Boolean functions: Boolean Algebra, Basic theorems and 8

Properties, De Morgan’s theorem, Canonical & Standard forms, Simplification of
a Boolean function using Karnaugh map, POS & SOP simplification, Prime
implicant, NAND and NOR implementation.
Module – III
Design of Combinational Circuits: Analysis and design procedure, Parity 8

Generators and Checkers, Adders, Subtractors, Look ahead carry, Adder, 4-bit
BCD adder/subtractor, Magnitude comparator, Decoders, Encoders, Multiplexers,
De-multiplexers, Design of 1 bit ALU for basic logic and arithmetic operations.
Module – IV
Design of Sequential Circuits and Memories: Basic Latch, Flip-Flops (SR, D,
JK, T and Master-Slave), Triggering of Flip Flops, Synchronous and 8
asynchronous counters, Registers, Shift Registers, Memories and Programmable
Logic design, Types of memories, Memory Expansion and its decoding,
Programmable Logic Arrays (PLA), Programmable Array Logic (PAL)
Module – V
Design of simple computing machines: SAP-I concepts with stress on timing 8

diagrams, Microinstructions, Fetch and Execution cycle variable machine cycle,
Hardware control Matrix, Macroinstructions, Microprogramming, Bus concepts,
Multiplexed Minimum system. Pipelining concepts.
Books recommended:
Textbooks:
1. “Digital Design”, Morris Mano and Michael D. Ciletti ,5th edition PHI
2. “Digital System Design using VHDL”, Charles H Roth, Thomson Learning
Page 42 of 344
Reference books:
1. Digital computer Electronics AP Malvino, 3rd Edition Mc Graw Hill
Gaps in the syllabus (to meet Industry/Profession requirements): N/A
POs met through Gaps in the Syllabus: N/A
Topics beyond syllabus/Advanced topics/Design: Computer System Architecture
Course Outcome (CO) Attainment Assessment Tools & Evaluation Procedure
Direct Assessment

First Quiz 10
Second Quiz 10
Indirect Assessment
Program
Specific
Outcomes
Outcome
(PSOs)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
CO1 3 3 2 3 3 1 1 3 3 3 3 2
CO2 3 3 2 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 3 2
CO3 3 3 2 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 3 2
CO4 3 3 2 3 3 2 2 3 3 3 3 2
CO5 3 3 2 3 3 2 2 3 3 3 3 2

Page 43 of 344

CD1 Lecture by use of Boards/LCD Projectors CO1 CD1, CD2, CD5, CD 8
CD2 Tutorials/Assignments CO2 CD1, CD2, CD5, CD 8
CD3 Seminars CO3 CD1, CD2, CD5, CD 8
CD4 Mini Projects/Projects CO4 CD1, CD2, CD5, CD 8
CD5 Laboratory Experiments/Teaching Aids CO5 CD1, CD2, CD5, CD 8
CD8
Internets
CD9 Simulation
Page 44 of 344
Course code: EC204

Course title: Digital System design Lab
Co- requisite(s):
Credits: L:0 T:0 P:3 C:1.5
Class: B. Tech
Semester / Level: III/ 02
Branch: ECE
Name of Teacher:
Course Objectives
1. Understand the basics of logic gates, input, output, power supply, and gates
IC’s.
2. Apply the knowledge of digital electronics to construct combinational and
sequential circuits.
3. Analyze controlled digital circuits with different Boolean function.
4. Evaluate combinational/sequential circuits and memories.
5. Translate real-world problems into digital logic formulations using VHDL.
Course Outcomes
CO1 Describe the knowledge of basic logic gates and their design using universal
gates.
CO2 Demonstrate the working of combinational and sequential circuits.
CO3 Integrate and experiment with controlled digital circuits.
CO4 Appraise combinational/sequential circuits and memories.
CO5 Schematize, simulate and implement combinational and sequential circuits to
solve real-world problems using VHDL systems.
Page 45 of 344
SYLLABUS
List of experiments:
1. Name of the Experiment: CMOS INVERTER
AIM1: Design and implement AND OR and NOT gate using CMOS Inverter.
2. Name of the Experiment: EX-OR GATE

AIM1:To study and verify the truth table of NAND and EX-OR gate using IC 7400.
3. Name of the Experiment: SEVEN SEGMENT DISPLAY

AIM1: Design and implement SEVEN segment display unit.
4. Name of the Experiment: ADDER CIRCUITS

AIM1: Design and verify half adder and full Adder circuits using gates and IC 7483.
5. Name of the Experiment: DECODER CIRCUITS

AIM1: Design and implement a 3:8 Decoder.
6. Name of the Experiment: ENCODER CIRCUITS

AIM1: Design and implement 8:3 priority encoder.
7. Name of the Experiment: MAGNITUDE COMPARATOR

AIM1: Design a 4 bit magnitude comparator using combinational circuits.
8. Name of the Experiment: MUX & DEMUX

AIM1:Design and implement 8:1 multiplexer and 1:4 demultiplexer.
9. Name of the Experiment: ARITHMETIC AND LOGICAL UNIT

AIM1: Design ALU with functions of ADD, SUB, INVERT, OR, AND. XOR, INC, DEC,
and CMP.
10. Name of the Experiment: DECADE COUNTER

AIM1: Design and verify the Decade Counter.
11. Name of the Experiment: DIODE ROM

AIM1: Design a ROM (8X4) using a decoder, gates, and diodes.
12. Name of the Experiment: UP/DOWN COUNTER

AIM1: Design of pre settable up/down counter.
## Implement all the above experiments using VHDL platform and verify.
Books recommended:
Textbooks:
1. “Digital Design”, Morris Mano and Michael D. Ciletti ,5th edition PHI
2. “Digital System Design using VHDL”, Charles H Roth, Thomson Learning
Reference books:
2. Digital computer Electronics AP Malvino, 3rd Edition Mc Graw Hill
Page 46 of 344
Direct Assessment

Attendance Marks 12
Lab Viva marks 20
Lab file Marks 12
Lab Quiz-I Marks 10
Program
Specific
Outcomes
Outcome
(PSOs)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
CO1 3 3 3 3 3 1 1 1 3 3 2 2 1
CO2 3 3 3 3 3 1 1 1 3 3 2 2 1
CO3 3 3 3 3 3 1 1 1 3 3 2 2 1
CO4 3 3 3 3 3 1 1 1 3 3 2 2 1
CO5 3 3 3 3 3 1 1 1 3 3 2 2 1
Page 47 of 344
CD Course Delivery
Code Method Used

Self- learning such as use of NPTEL
CD8
CD9 Simulation
Page 48 of 344
Course code: EC205

Course title: Signals and Systems
Co- requisite(s):
Credits: L: 3 T: 0 P: 0 C: 3
Class: B. Tech.
Branch: ECE
Name of Teacher:
Course Objectives:
1. To understand the fundamental characteristics of signals and systems.
2. To understand the concepts of different transforms for signal and system.
3. To understand signals and systems in terms of both the time and transform
domains.
4. To develop the mathematical skills to solve problems involving convolution,

filtering, modulation, and sampling.
5. To understand the response of LTI systems using Transform theory.
Course Outcomes:
After the completion of this course, a student will be able to
CO1 define signal, systems and its importance in life.
CO2 represent the signal in the time domain as well as in Frequency domain and find the
response of the system.
CO3 explain the transform theory and its importance to analyze signal and system.
CO4 identify system properties based on impulse response and Fourier analysis.
CO5 explain Sampling theorem and its importance in discrete time systems representation.
Page 49 of 344
SYLLABUS
(NO. OF
MODULE LECTURE
HOURS)
Module – I
INTRODUCTION TO SIGNALS AND SYSTEMS: 9

Signals and systems as seen in everyday life and in various branches of engineering
and science, Signal properties: periodicity, absolute integrability, determinism, and
stochastic character. Some special signals of importance: the unit step, the unit
impulse, the sinusoid, the complex exponential, some special time-limited signals;
continuous and discrete time signals, continuous and discrete amplitude signals.
System properties: linearity: additivity and homogeneity, shift-invariance,
causality, stability, realizability.
Module – II
BEHAVIOR OF CONTINUOUS AND DISCRETE-TIME LTI SYSTEMS: 9

Impulse response and step response, convolution, input-output behavior with
aperiodic convergent inputs, cascade interconnections. Characterization of
causality and stability of LTI systems. System representation through differential
equations and difference equations. State-space Representation of systems. State-
Space Analysis, Multi-input, multi-output representation. State Transition Matrix
and its Role. Periodic inputs to an LTI system, the notion of frequency response
and its relation to the impulse response.
Module – III
FOURIER AND LAPLACE TRANSFORMS: 8

Fourier series representation of periodic signals, Waveform Symmetries,
Calculation of Fourier Coefficients. Fourier Transform, convolution/multiplication
and their effect in the frequency domain, magnitude and phase response, Fourier
domain duality, Laplace Transform for continuous-time signals and systems,
Transfer/system functions, poles and zeros of system functions and signals,
Laplace domain analysis, the solution to differential equations and system
behavior.
Module – IV
Z-TRANSFORM, DTFT, AND DFT: 7

Z-transform, Region of convergence and its properties, Inverse Z transform,
properties of ZT, The Discrete-Time Fourier Transform (DTFT) and the Discrete
Fourier Transform (DFT), Parseval's Theorem., Properties of DTFT and DFT,
convolution property, multiplication property, Duality, Systems Characterized by
Linear Constant Coefficient Difference Equation, The z-Transform for discrete
Page 50 of 344
time signals and systems, system functions, poles and zeros of systems and
sequences, z-domain analysis.
Module – V
SAMPLING AND RECONSTRUCTION: 7

The Sampling Theorem and its implications. Spectra of sampled signals.
Reconstruction: ideal interpolator, zero-order hold, first-order hold. Aliasing and
its effects. The relation between continuous and discrete time systems.
Applications of signal and system theory: modulation for communication, filtering,
feedback control systems.
Books recommended:
Textbooks:
1. A. V. Oppenheim, A. S. Willsky and S. H. Nawab, “Signals and systems”, Prentice Hall

India, 1997.
2. S. Haykin and B. V. Veen, “Signals and Systems”, John Wiley and Sons, 2007.
Reference books:
1. John G. Proakis, Dimitris G. Manolakis, Digital Signal Processing, Principles, Algorithms,

and Applications.
2. Robert A. Gable, Richard A. Roberts, Signals & Linear Systems
3. R.F. Ziemer, W.H. Tranter and D.R. Fannin, "Signals and Systems - Continuous and
Discrete", 4th edition, Prentice Hall, 1998.
4. Papoulis, "Circuits and Systems: A Modern Approach", HRW, 1980.
5. Douglas K. Lindner, "Introduction to Signals and Systems", McGraw Hill International
Edition: c1999.
6. B.P. Lathi, "Signal Processing and Linear Systems", Oxford University Press, c1998.
Gaps in the Syllabus (to meet Industry/Profession requirements)
Signals and Systems is an advance course; hence it only lays down the foundation of pattern
recognition and classification problem.
POs met through Gaps in the Syllabus

May be met through laboratory simulations, experiments, and design problems.
Topics beyond syllabus/Advanced topics/Design
1. Application of Signals and Systems in the analysis of time varying signal.

2. Extraction of Pattern vector from time varying signal for the development of decision
support system for various applications.
POs met through Topics beyond syllabus/Advanced topics/Design

Assignments & Seminars
Page 51 of 344
Direct Assessment
First Quiz 10
Second Quiz 10
Indirect Assessment
Program
Specific
Outcomes
Outcome (PSOs)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
CO1 2 2 3 3 2 3 1 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 2
CO2 2 2 3 3 2 3 1 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 2
CO3 2 2 3 3 2 3 1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2
CO4 2 2 3 3 2 3 1 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 2
CO5 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 3 2
Page 52 of 344
Mapping between COs and Course Delivery (CD) methods
CD Course
Course Delivery Methods Course Delivery Method Used
Code Outcome
Lecture by use of Boards/LCD
CD1
Projectors CO1 CD1, CD2, CD5, CD8
CD2 Tutorials/Assignments CO2 CD1, CD2, CD5, CD8
CD1, CD2, CD3, CD4, CD5, CD8,
CD3
Seminars CO3 CD9.
CD1, CD2, CD3, CD4, CD5, CD8,
CD4
Mini Projects/Projects CO4 CD9.
Laboratory Experiments/Teaching
CD5
Aids CO5 CD4, CD5, CD7, CD9
CD8
CD9 Simulation
Page 53 of 344
Course code: EC208

Course title: Electronic Measurement Lab
Co- requisite(s):
Credits: L: T: 0 P: 4 C: 2
Class schedule per week: 04 Class: B. Tech.
Semester / Level: III/02 Branch: ECE
Name of Teacher:
Course Objectives
1. Understand the concepts of calibration and measurement.

2. Apply the concepts of AC bridges for the measurements of the different electrical
parameters.
3. Explain the basic principles of transducers and their uses for the measurements of
different physical parameters.
4. Demonstrate the signal analysis using digital storage oscilloscope.
5. Design the signal conditioners and converters for different applications.
Course Outcomes
CO1 To list the functions of various components of a measurement system.
CO2 Describe the balancing of different AC bridges and calculate unknown resistance,
inductance, quality of a coil, and capacitance at balance condition.
CO3 Calibrate and measure different physical parameters using measurement systems.
CO4 Find and investigate the errors in measuring a parameter.
CO5 Schematize electronic measurement systems for the measurement of different physical
parameters.
Page 54 of 344
SYLLABUS
1. Name of the Experiment
AC BRIDGES
Aim1. Balancing Maxwell’s Bridge and measurements of Inductance, DC Resistance, and quality
factor of a medium Q coil.
Aim2. Balancing Schering’s Bridge and measurements of Capacitance, leakage Resistance, and
quality factor of a capacitor.
WIEN’S Bridge Measurements
Aim1. Balancing Wien’s Bridge and measurements of frequency of unknown sinusoidal signal.
Aim2. Balancing Wien’s Bridge and measurements of total harmonic distortion of a 1Khz non-
sinusoidal signal.

STRAIN GAUGES
Aim1. Calibration and measurement of pressure (in Kg/cm2) using diaphragm and strain gauge.

Temperature Transducers
Aim1. Calibration and measurement of temperature (in oC) using RTD.
Aim2. Calibration and measurement of temperature (in oC) Thermocouple, and Thermistor.

SPEED MEASUREMENT
Aim1. Measurement of rotating speed in (RPM) using Photo-reflective and Magnetic pickup
sensor.
Name of the Experiment
6. LVDT
Aim1. Calibration and measurement of displacement (in mm) using LVDT.

LEVEL MEASUREMENT
Aim1. Calibration and measurement of the level (in cm) using Load Cell

TORQUE MEASUREMENT
Aim1. Torque Measurement (in kgm) using reaction torque sensor.

DAC
Aim1. Design of bipolar DAC using the R-2R Ladder network.

INSTRUMENTATION AMPLIFIER
Aim1. Design and implementation of an instrumentation amplifier for a variable gain of 50, 100
and 200.
Page 55 of 344
ADC
Aim1. Design Analog to Digital convertor using voltage to frequency converter technique.

RISE TIME MEASUREMENT
Aim1. Measurement of the rise time of the RC circuit using Digital Storage Oscilloscope.
Books recommended:
Textbooks:
1. “Electrical and Electronic Measurements and Instrumentation” by A. K. Sawhney.
2. “Modern Electronic Instrumentation & Measurement Techniques” by Helfrick& Cooper.
Reference books:
1. “Electronic Instrumentation”, by H. S. Kalsi.
Gaps in the syllabus (to meet Industry/Profession requirements): Visit CIF lab at BIT Mesra.
Topics beyond syllabus/Advanced topics/Design: Smart Sensors and Transmitters

Direct Assessment


Quiz 10
Viva 20

Performance
Quiz 10
Page 56 of 344
Indirect Assessment
1. Students’ Feedback on Course Outcome
Program
Specific
Outcomes
Outcome
(PSOs)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
CO1 3 3 3 3 3 1 1 1 3 3 2 2 1
CO2 3 3 3 3 3 1 1 1 3 3 2 2 1
CO3 3 3 3 3 3 1 1 1 3 3 2 2 1
CO4 3 3 3 3 3 1 1 1 3 3 2 2 1
CO5 3 3 3 3 3 1 1 1 3 3 2 2 1


CD1, CD5, CD8,
CD1
Lecture by use of Boards/LCD Projectors CO1 CD9
CD1, CD5, CD8,
CD2
Tutorials/Assignments CO2 CD9
CD1, CD5, CD8,
CD3
Seminars CO3 CD9
CD1, CD5, CD8,
CD4
Mini Projects/Projects CO4 CD9
CD1, CD5, CD8,
CD5
Laboratory Experiments/Teaching Aids CO5 CD9
CD8
Internets
CD9 Simulation
Page 57 of 465
Course code: EC251
Course title: Probability and Random Processes
Pre-requisite(s): EC205 Signals and Systems
Co- requisite(s):NA
Credits: L: 3 T: 0 P: 0 C: 3
Class: B. Tech.
Semester / Level: IV/02
Branch: ECE
Name of Teacher:
Course Objectives:
1. To explain the random phenomena and impart knowledge on the mathematical modelling of
the random experiment.
2. To develop an ability to describe random vectors and their characterization.
3. To develop an ability to understand the concept of random processes or stochastic processes.
4. To develop an ability to analyze the stochastic processes with the help of probability models
and its characterization
5. To develop an ability to evaluate different emerging techniques to improve real-time
estimation and detection of random parameters.
Course Outcomes:
CO1 Demonstrate an understanding of the mathematical modelling of the random

experiment or random phenomena.
CO2 Describe random vectors and their characterization.
CO3 Demonstrate an understanding of the concept of random processes or stochastic
processes.
CO4 Analyze the stochastic processes with the help of probability models and their
characterization.
CO5 Evaluate the different emerging techniques to improve real-time estimation and
detection of random parameters.
Page 58 of 465
SYLLABUS
(NO. OF
MODULE LECTURE
HOURS)
Module – I
Randomness, Uncertainty and its Description 8
Random experiments/phenomenon, outcomes of the random experiment, Sample
Space, Events, Probability of an event, Concepts of sets and probability theory to
explain Random experiments, Probability space; Conditional probability,
Independence and Bayes theorem; Combinatorial probability and sampling
models.
Module – II
Random Variable and its characterization: 9
Continuous random variables: distribution function, probability density function,
Conditional Densities and Distributions, an example of distributions, Gaussian,
Rayleigh, and Rician; exponential, chi-squared; gamma. Discrete random
variables: distribution function, probability mass function, Example of random
variables and distributions (Bernoulli, binomial, Poisson, geometric, negative
binomial, etc.), Expectations, Variance, MGF and Characteristics Function of
Random Variable, moments of Random Variable.
Module – III
Random vector and its characterization: 9
Joint Events, Joint CDF and PDF, Properties of Joint CDF and PDF, Bivariate
Gaussian Distributions, Joint Moments, Random Vectors, Vector Gaussian
Random Variables, Moments of Random Vectors, Independence of two random
vectors,
Module – IV
Inequalities, Convergences, and Limit Theorems: 8
Random sequences Markov, Chebyshev and Chernoff bounds; modes of
convergence (everywhere, almost everywhere, probability, distribution and mean
square); Stochastic convergence, the law of large numbers, central limit theorem,
Limit theorems; Strong and weak laws of large numbers.
Module – V
Random Processes and Linear Systems: 6
Random Data/Signals, stationarity; mean, correlation, and covariance functions,
WSS random process; autocorrelation and cross-correlation functions;
transmission of a random process through a linear System; power spectral density;
white random process; Gaussian process; Poisson process, Application of
Page 59 of 465
Probability and Random Processes to understand important domain like digital
communication, estimation and information theory.
Text Books:
1. Papoulis. A.,” Probability, Random variables, and Stochastic Processes”, McGraw Hill, 2002.
2. H.Stark & J.W.Woods, “Probability, Random Processes and Estimations Theory for
Engineers”, (2/e), Prentice Hall, 1994
Reference Book:
1. E.Wong, “Introduction to Random Processes”, Springer Verlag, 1983.
2. W.A.Gardner, “Introduction to Random Processes”, (2/e), McGraw Hill, 1990.
3. Davenport,” Probability and Random Processes for Scientist and Engineers”, McGraw-Hill,
1970.
Probability and Random Processes is an advance course; hence it only lays down the foundation
of pattern recognition and classification problem.

1. Application of Probability and Random Processes in the analysis of time varying

signal.

Page 60 of 465
Direct Assessment
First Quiz 10
Second Quiz 10
Indirect Assessment
Program
Specific
Outcomes
Outcome (PSOs)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
CO1 2 2 3 3 2 3 1 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 1
CO2 2 2 3 3 2 3 1 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 1
CO3 2 2 3 3 2 3 1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 1
CO4 2 2 3 3 2 3 1 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 1
CO5 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 3 1
Page 61 of 465
CD Course Course Delivery Method

Code Outcome Used
CD1, CD2, CD3, CD4, CD5,
CD3
Seminars CO3 CD8, CD9.
CD4
Mini Projects/Projects CO4 CD8, CD9.
CD8
CD9 Simulation
Page 62 of 465
Course code: EC253
Course title: Analog Circuits
Co-requisite(s): None
Credits: L: 3 T: 0 P: 0 C: 3.0
Class: B. Tech
Semester / Level: 04
Branch: ECE
Name of Teacher:
Course Objectives
1. To help them understand the operation of Transistors for low frequency
applications and power amplifiers
2. To know the operation of multistage amplifiers and transistors for high frequency
applications and tuned amplifiers
3. To help them understand the operation of feedback amplifiers and oscillators
4. To help them realize the non-linear applications of op-amp and filters
5. To help them design the analog-to-digital and digital-to-analog converters
Course Outcomes
CO1 Understand the concept of amplifiers, oscillators and active filter circuits.
CO2 Demonstrate the working of amplifiers, oscillators and active filter circuits.
CO3 Analyze amplifiers, filters at low and high frequency.
CO4 Evaluate amplifiers, filters and converter circuits.
CO5 Schematize amplifiers, oscillators and filter circuits for practical applications.
Page 63 of 465
SYLLABUS
(NO. OF
MODULE LECTURE
HOURS)
Module – I
Review of hybrid models of BJT, simplified hybrid models of CE, CB, CC 10
configurations, CE amplifier with emitter resistance, Emitter follower, High-
input-resistance transistor circuits: Darlington Circuit, Cascode Amplifier.
Transistor Power Amplifiers: Circuits and Operations of Class A, Class B,
Class C and Push-Pull Configurations.
Module – II
Multistage amplifiers: Frequency response of an amplifier, Bandpass of cascaded 10
stages, Low frequency response of RC coupled amplifier. Transistors at High
Frequencies: Hybrid  model and parameters; high frequency response of CE
transistor amplifier, Gain-Bandwidth product, Emitter follower at high
frequencies, FET (CS & CD) at high frequencies. Tuned amplifiers: single-tuned
amplifier, synchronously tuned amplifier, Gain-Bandwidth product.
Module – III
Feedback Amplifiers: Classification of amplifiers, feedback concept, transfer 7
gain with feedback, characteristics of negative-feedback amplifier, method of
analysis of feedback amplifiers, voltage-series feedback, current-series feedback,
current-shunt feedback, voltage-shunt feedback. Concept of stability, gain margin
and phase margin. Oscillators: RC phase shift oscillator, Wien bridge oscillator,
crystal oscillator. Current mirror circuits.
Module – IV
Emitter-coupled differential amplifier, transfer characteristics of differential 8
amplifier, IC of operational amplifier: gain stages and output stages, Electronic
analog computation using op-amp, Non-linear applications of OP-AMP: zero-
crossing detector, precision rectifier, peak detector, logarithmic amplifier,
Schmitt trigger. Active filters: Low pass, high pass, band pass and band stop,
design guidelines.
Module – V
Sample-and-hold circuit, D/A converters: Weighted-resistor D/A Converter, R- 5
2R Ladder type D/A converter, Specifications for D/A Converters. A/D
Converters: Parallel-comparator type A/D converter, Successive approximation
type A/D converter, Counter type A/D converter, Dual slope converter,
Comparison of converter types.
Page 64 of 465
Text books:
1. “Integrated Electronics”, Millman & Halkias, TMH
2. “Electronics Circuits: Discrete and Integrated”, D. Schilling and C. Belove, McGraw-Hill
3. “Operational Amplifiers and Linear Integrated Circuits” by R. A. Gayakwad, PHI
4. “Digital Integrated Electronics”. Taub & Schilling, TMH.
Reference books:
1. “Electronic Devices and Circuit”, Millman , Halkias, S Jit, TMH
2. “Micro Electronic Circuits”, A. S. Sedra and K. C. Smith, Oxford press

CD2 Assignments
CD3 Laboratory experiments/teaching aids/Seminars
CD4 Industrial/guest lectures
CD7 Simulation

Direct Assessment
Page 65 of 465
Mid semester examination 25
Two quizzes 20 (2×10)
Indirect Assessment
2. Student Feedback on Course

CD2 Assignments
CD4 Mini Projects
CD7 Simulation
Mapping between Course Outcomes and Program Outcomes and Program Specific
Outcomes
Program
Specific
Outcomes
Outcome
(PSOs)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
CO1 3 3 2 3 3 1 1 3 3 3 3 3
CO2 3 3 2 3 3 2 1 3 3 3 3 3
CO3 3 3 2 3 3 2 1 3 3 3 3 3
CO4 3 3 2 3 3 3 1 3 3 3 3 3
CO5 3 3 2 3 3 3 1 3 3 3 3 3
Page 66 of 465
CO1 CD1, CD2, CD3, CD6, CD7
Page 67 of 465
Course code: EC254

Course title: Analog Circuits Lab.
Co- requisite(s): Analog Circuits
Credits: L: 0 T: 0 P: 3 C: 1.5
Class: B. Tech.
Semester / Level: IV
Branch: ECE
Name of Teacher:
Course Objectives
1. Realize the two-stage amplifier and simple tuned amplifier circuits.
2. Implement the Feedback amplifier circuits.
3. Realize the differential amplifier and oscillator.

4. Realize the active band pass, band stop filter circuits.
5. Know the operation of analog-to-digital and digital-to-analog converter circuits.
Course Outcomes
CO1 Design two-stage amplifier and simple tuned amplifier circuits.

CO2 Analyze and analyze the feedback amplifier circuits.
CO3 Characterize and Characterize the differential amplifier and oscillator.
CO4 Characterize the active band pass, band stop filter circuits.
CO5 Design the analog-to-digital and digital-to-analog converter circuits.
Page 68 of 465
SYLLABUS
Experim Name of the Experiments

ent No.
1. Determine the h-parameters: hie and hfe of a transistor.
AIM1: Design a CE transistor circuit to evaluate the hie.
AIM2: Design a CE transistor circuit to evaluate the hfe.
2. Design and obtain the frequency response characteristics of Darlington pair amplifier.
AIM1: Design the circuit of a Darlington pair amplifier in emitter follower

configuration and find the current gain of Darlington pair.
AIM2: Find the frequency response of the Darlington pair amplifier.
3. Determine the frequency response of Cascode Amplifier and find the input resistance
and output resistance of the amplifier.
AIM1: Design the BJT based cascode amplifier and find the frequency response.
AIM2: Find the input and output resistance of the amplifier.
4. Find the frequency response of (a) single stage and (b) multistage amplifiers.
Determine the mid-band gain and bandwidth of the amplifiers.
AIM1: Find the frequency response of single stage CE amplifier and determine the
mid-band gain and bandwidth.
AIM2: Find the frequency response of multistage CE amplifiers and determine the
mid-band gain and bandwidth.
5. Design a BJT based tuned amplifier. Find its frequency response.
AIM1: Design a BJT based tuned amplifier and Find its frequency response.
AIM2: Compare the theoretical resonant frequency with the experimental result.
6. Design (a) current-series, and (b) voltage-shunt feedback amplifier. Find the
frequency response of both amplifiers with and without feedback.
AIM1: Design current-series feedback amplifier and Find the frequency response.
AIM2: Design voltage-shunt feedback amplifier and Find the frequency response.
7. Design a Wein bridge oscillator.
AIM1: Design the Wein bridge oscillator using BJT / op-amp and calculate the
theoretical gain of the main amplifier.
AIM2: Observe and plot the output waveform.
8. Design a differential amplifier using BJT and determine the CMRR.
AIM1: Design a differential amplifier using BJT and determine the differential mode
gain at different frequencies.
AIM2: Design a differential amplifier using BJT and determine the common mode
gain at different frequencies. Find the CMRR at those frequencies.
9. Design and determine the characteristics of logarithmic and antilogarithmic amplifiers

using op-amp.
Page 69 of 465
AIM1: Design a logarithmic amplifiers using op-amp and plot the output.
AIM2: Design an antilogarithmic amplifiers using op-amp and plot the output.
10. Design and determine the characteristics of Active filters: band pass, band stop.
AIM1: Design a band pass filter and find frequency response.
AIM2: Design a band stop filter and find frequency response.
11. Construction of R-2R Ladder type 4-bit D/A converter.
AIM1: Design an R-2R Ladder type 4-bit D/A converter using op-amp and find the
analog output voltage for all the digital inputs.
AIM2: Find the resolution of the converter.
12. Construction of counter type A/D Converter.
AIM1: Design a counter type A/D converter and find the digital output bits for
different analog inputs.
AIM2: Find the resolution of the converter.
Text books:
1. “Integrated Electronics”, Millman & Halkias, McGraw Hill.
Reference books:
1. “Electronic Devices and Circuit Theory”, Nashelesky & Boylestead, PHI/Low price edition.
Topics beyond syllabus/Advanced topics/Design: through experiments involving

design/modelling of device/circuits on advanced topics
POs met through Topics beyond syllabus/Advanced topics/Design: through experiments

involving design/modelling of device/circuits on advanced topics

CD2 Assignments
CD7 Simulation
Page 70 of 465

CD2 Assignments
CD7 Simulation

Direct Assessment


Quiz(zes) 10
Viva 20

Performance
Quiz 10
Indirect Assessment

CD2 Assignments
CD4 Mini Projects
CD7 Simulation
Page 71 of 465
Outcomes
Program
Specific
Outcomes
Outcome
(PSOs)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
CO1 3 3 2 3 3 1 1 3 3 3 3 3
CO2 3 3 2 3 3 2 1 3 3 3 3 3
CO3 3 3 2 3 3 2 1 3 3 3 3 3
CO4 3 3 2 3 3 3 1 3 3 3 3 3
CO5 3 3 2 3 3 3 1 3 3 3 3 3

CO1 CD3, CD7
CO2 CD3, CD7
CO3 CD3, CD7
CO4 CD3, CD7
CO5 CD3, CD7
Page 72 of 465
Course Code: EC255

Course Title: Analog Communication
Pre-requisite(s): ): Good understanding of mathematical tools like integration, differentiation etc.
Co- requisite(s):
Credits: L: 3 T: 0 P: 0 C:3
Class: B. Tech.
Semester / Level: Fourth/Second
Branch: Electronics & Communication Engineering
Name of Teacher:
Course Objectives
This course envisions to impart to students to:
1. Explain analog communication system and representation of signals.

2. Explain different methods of amplitude modulation and demodulation schemes,
their design, operation and applications.
3. Explain different methods of angle modulation and demodulation schemes, their
design, operation and applications.
4. Explain different methods of pulse modulation, their design, operation and
applications.
5. Evaluate the performance of analog communication system in the presence of
noise.
Course Outcomes
CO1 Demonstrate an understanding on analog communication system and representation

of signals.
CO2 Demonstrate an understanding on different methods of amplitude modulation and
demodulation schemes, their design, operation and applications.
CO3 Demonstrate an understanding on different methods of angle modulation and
demodulation schemes, their design, operation and applications.
CO4 Demonstrate an understanding on different methods of pulse modulation, their
design, operation and applications.
CO5 Evaluate the performance of analog communication system in the presence of noise.
Page 73 of 465
SYLLABUS
(NO. OF
MODULE LECTURE
HOURS)
Module – I 10
Signal analysis
Time domain and frequency domain representation of a signal, fourier series,
complex fourier spectrum (discrete spectrum or line spectrum), fourier transform,
properties of fourier transform, energy and power spectral density spectrum,
distortion less transmission, causality and physical realizability, pre-envelope and
canonical representation of band pass signals.
Module – II 7
Amplitude modulation- demodulation communication systems
Amplitude modulation, square law modulator, switching modulator, square law
demodulator, envelope detector, double side band suppressed carrier modulation,
balanced and ring modulators, single side band modulation, frequency
discrimination and phase discrimination modulators, coherent detection of SSB,
frequency division multiplexing and time division multiplexing, super heterodyne
AM receiver and its characteristics.
Module – III 7
Angle modulation - demodulation communication systems
Basics of frequency and phase modulation, single tone frequency modulation,
NBFM, WBFM, Transmission bandwidth of FM wave, indirect and direct methods
of FM generation, frequency discriminator, phase locked loop demodulator, super
heterodyne FM receiver.
Module – IV 10
Pulse modulation demodulation communication systems
Sampling process, pulse amplitude modulation, pulse duration modulation, pulse
position modulation.
Module – V 6
Noise in communication systems
Noise, shot noise, thermal noise, white noise, noise equivalent bandwidth, signal
to noise ratio for coherent detection of DSBSC, SNR for coherent reception with
SSB modulation, SNR for AM receiver using envelope detection, Noise in FM
reception, FM Threshold effect, pre emphasis and de-emphasis.
Page 74 of 465
Text Books:
1. Simon Haykin, “Communication Systems”, Wiley Eastern Limited, New Delhi, 2016, 4/e.
2. B. P. Lathi and Zhi Ding, “Modern Digital and Analog Communication Systems”, Oxford
University Press, 2011, 4/e, (Indian Edition)
Reference Books:
1. John G. Proakis and Masoud Salehi, “Fundamentals of Communication Systems”Pearson

Education, Inc., New Delhi, 2013.
2. Bruce Carlson and Paul B. Crilly, “Communication Systems: An Introduction to signals and
Noise in Electrical Communication”, Tata McGraw Hills Education Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi,
2011, 5/e.
Course Outcome (CO) Attainment Assessment Tools & Evaluation Procedure:PO2
Direct Assessment

First Quiz 10
Second Quiz 10
Indirect Assessment
Page 75 of 465
Program
Specific
Outcomes
Outcome
(PSOs)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
CO1 3 2 2 1 - - - - - - - 2 3 2 1
CO2 3 3 3 3 2 - - - - - - 1 3 2 2
CO3 3 3 3 3 2 - - - - - - 1 3 2 1
CO4 3 3 3 3 2 - - - - - - 1 3 2 3
CO5 3 3 3 3 3 - - - - - - 1 3 2 2

CD1 Lecture by use of Boards/LCD Projectors CO1 CD1, CD8
CD2 Tutorials/Assignments CO2 CD1 ,CD8
CD3 Seminars CO3 CD1, CD8
CD4 Mini Projects/Projects CO4 CD1, CD8
CD5 Laboratory Experiments/Teaching Aids CO5 CD1,CD8
CD8
Internets
CD9 Simulation
Page 76 of 465
Course Code: EC 257

Course Title: Electromagnetic Field and Waves
Pre-requisite(s): Engineering Mathematics
Co- requisite(s):
Credits: L: 3 T: 0 P: 3
Class: B. Tech.
Semester / Level: Four
Branch: Electronics and Communication Engineering
Name of Teacher:
Course Objectives
1. To apply the basic skills of mathematics, physics and science to understand, design
and develop various engineering problems involving electromagnetic fields.
2. To lay the foundations of electromagnetic engineering and its applications in
modern communications involving both wireless and guided wave medium.
3. To analyse the electromagnetic wave propagation in guided and unguided
medium having different medium properties and different boundary conditions.
4. To develop an ability to identify, formulate, and solve electromagnetic
engineering problems.
5. To review and present the literature ethically and also develop the skill to work
individually or in a team.
Course Outcomes
CO1 Explain the basic concepts of time varying electric and magnetic fields in different
electromagnetic media.
CO2 Analyze Maxwell’s equation in differential and integral forms and apply them to
diverse engineering problems.
CO3 Examine and understand the phenomena of wave propagation in different media and
its interfaces as well as in guided medium and its applications in microwave
engineering.
CO4 Identify, formulate and solve electromagnetic engineering problems.
CO5 Work in a small team and communicate electromagnetic concepts both orally and in
writing following ethical rules.
Page 77 of 465
SYLLABUS
(NO. OF
MODULE LECTURE
HOURS)
Module – I
Introduction to Maxwell’s Equations: Faraday’s Law, Transformer & Motional 8
EMF, Displacement Current, Maxwell’s Equations (Generalized form).
Boundary Conditions and Wave Equation: Electromagnetic Boundary
Conditions
Time varying Potentials & Fields: Time varying Potentials, Time harmonic
fields, Time harmonics Maxwell’s Equations.
Module – II
EM Wave propagation: Wave Equation & Plane Waves in unbounded 9

homogeneous, plane waves in free space and lossy media, Skin depth, Poynting
vector and Power considerations, Polarization of Electromagnetic waves,
Reflection of a plane wave at Normal incidence and Oblique incidence. Parallel
& Perpendicular Polarization at perfect conducting & dielectric boundaries,
Brewster’s Angle.
Module – III
Transmission lines: Transmission line parameters & Equations, Input 9

Impedance, SWR and Power , The Smith Chart, Quarter Wave Transformer
Matching, Single Stub Tuner(Matching), Slotted line (Impedance Measurement,
Transients on transmission lines, Microstrip Transmission lines, strip lines, Slot
lines and Co-planar lines.
Module – IV
Waveguides: Transverse Electric and Transverse Magnetic wave propagation in 8

Rectangular Waveguide, Rectangular Cavity Resonator, Circular Cavity
Resonator, Quality factor of the rectangular Cavity Resonator.
Module – V
Antennas: Radiation from the Hertz dipole, Power radiated by Hertzian dipole, 6
Radiation Parameters of antenna, Monopole and Dipole antenna.
Text Books:
1. Principle of Electromagnetics, Matthew N.O. Sadiku & S.V. Kulkarni, Oxford University
Press, Sixth Edition.
Page 78 of 465
Reference Books:
1. Electromagnetics field Theory and Transmission Line G.S.N Raju, Pearson Education
2. Electromagnetic Waves and Radiating Systems, 2/e, E. C. Jordan and K. G. Balmain, PHI.
3. Electromagnetics, David Cheng, Prentice Hall
EM field and Waves is a basic course, hence it only lays down the foundation of Advanced
Courses.


3. Application of EM fields and Waves in the analysis of EM interference
4. Design of Omni directional Antennas for various applications.

Direct Assessment
First Quiz 10
Second Quiz 10
Indirect Assessment
Program
Specific
Outcomes
Outcome
(PSOs)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
CO1 3 1 1 1 2 1 1 2 3 1 2
CO2 2 1 1 2 1 1 2 2 2 2
CO3 3 1 1 2 1 1 2 2 2 2
CO4 1 2 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 3 3 3
CO5 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 2 1 1 2 2 2 2
Page 79 of 465
CD Course
Code Outcome
CD1
CD3
CD4
CD8
CD9 Simulation
Page 80 of 465
Course Code: EC 258

Course Title: Electromagnetic Waves Lab.
Pre-requisite(s): MATLAB
Co- requisite(s):
Class: B. Tech.
Semester / Level: Four
Name of Teacher:
Course Objectives
1. Analyze the Maxwell’s equation in explaining the phenomenon of wave propagation.

2. Apply Maxwell’s equation in solving the time varying electromagnetic field
problems.
3. Apply appropriate boundary conditions to solve the time varying Electromagnetic
phenomena.
4. Characterize the wave propagation in guided and unguided media under different
media characteristics.
5. Develop an insight to visualize and solve practical electromagnetic engineering
problems.
Course Outcomes
CO1 Formulate the electromagnetic problem and solve them using MATLAB simulation
tool.
CO2 Visualize the wave propagation in different media and its implication on transmission,
reflection and propagation phenomena.
CO3 Visualize the concept of wave propagation in guided media such as transmission lines
and waveguides.
CO4 Visualize the concept of wave polarization.
CO5 Visualize and solve practical Electromagnetic engineering problems.
Page 81 of 465
SYLLABUS
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS:
1. Using MATLAB, simulate and plot the phenomenon of Skin effect in current carrying
conductors as a function of the conductivity of the conductor and the frequency of
operation.
AIM
Study the effect of frequency and conductivity on skin depth.
2. Using MATLAB, simulate and plot the variation of the time varying field as a function of
distance. Also plot the waveforms to depict linear, circular and elliptical polarization of
the wave.
AIM
Study the polarization phenomena and understand its significance in communication.
3. A parallel-plate capacitor with plate area 5 cm2 and plate separation of 3 mm has a
voltage 50 sin 103 t V applied to its plates. Using MATLAB, Compute the displacement
current assuming (i) ε = ϵ0 (ii) ε = 2ϵ0
AIM
Study the effect of dielectric material on displacement current.
4. An electric field in free space is given by E = 50 cos (108t + β x) ay V/m. Using

MATLAB, Compute (i) k, λ and T (ii) the time it takes to travel a distance of λ/2. (iii)
Plot the wave at t = 0, T/4, and T/2.
AIM
Study the characteristics of the EM wave.
5. Using MATLAB Compute the following problems
(a) In free space, E = 20 cos (ωt – 50 x) ay V/m. Compute (i) Jd (ii) H (iii) ω
(b) In a medium characterized by σ = 0, µ = µ0, ε = 4ϵ0, and E = 20 sin (108t – βz) ay V/m
AIM
Examine the characteristics of the EM wave in free space and in a specified medium.
6. A plane wave propagating through a medium with ϵr = 8, µr = 2 and E = 0.5 e-z/3 sin(108t
– βz) ax V/m. Using MATLAB, compute (i) β (ii) the loss tangent (c) Intrinsic
impedance (iv) Wave velocity (v) H field.
AIM
Examine the characteristics of the EM wave in the specified dielectric medium.
7. In free space (z ≤ 0), a plane wave with Hi = 10 cos (108t - βz) ax mA/m is incident
normally on a lossless medium (µ = 8µ0, ε = 2ϵ0) in region z ≥ 0. Using MATLAB,
compute and plot the reflected wave Hr, Er and the transmitted wave Ht and Et.
Page 82 of 465
AIM
Study the reflected and transmitted phenomena of Plane wave at normal incidence on a
lossless dielectric medium.
8. Given a uniform plane wave in air as Ei = 40 cos(ωt –βz)ax + 30 sin(ωt –βz)ay V/m.
Using MATLAB compute and plot
(i) Hi
(ii) If the wave encounters a perfectly conducting plate normal to the z-axis at z = 0,
find the reflected wave Er and Hr.
(iii) The total E and H fields for z ≤ 0.
(iv) The time-average Poynting vectors for z ≤ 0 and z ≥ 0.
AIM
Study the phenomenon of plane wave propagation and power calculation.
9.
For the transmission line system shown,

f = 600 MHz, Zg = 50 Ω, Z0 = 50 Ω, l = 0.75 λ0, εr = 1.0. The values of the load
is given as
(i) ZL = 0 Ω
(ii) ZL = open
(iii) ZL = 100 Ω
(iv) ZL = ( 25 + j 25 ) Ω
(v) ZL = ( 25 – j 25 ) Ω
Using MATLAB, obtain the following for each of the loads given above.
• The Standing Wave pattern
• Calculate SWR for each load. And plot the normalized SWR pattern.
AIM
Study the propagation of EM wave in two wire transmission line and stud the effect of load
on propagation characteristics.
Page 83 of 465
10. A right-hand circularly polarized wave at 1.5 GHz is propagating through a material with
r = 6.2 and r = 2.0 and arrives at an interface with air. It is incident at an elevation angle
of 15° and an azimuthal angle of 45°. The wave has an amplitude of 12 V/m. The
interface lies in the x-y plane. Using MATLAB, Compute
(i) The angle of incidence 1.
(ii) The critical angle and the Brewster’s angles for this configuration for both
polarizations.
(iii) The reflection and transmission coefficients for both polarizations.
(iv) The percent reflectance and transmittance for both polarizations. Verify conservation
of energy
AIM
Study the reflected and transmitted phenomena of Plane wave under oblique incidence
condition.
11. Use MATLAB to visualize the first four electromagnetic modes in a rectangular waveguide
with a/b = 2.25 and plot the phase constant  of the fundamental mode in from 0.5 GHz up
to 3.0 GHz.
AIM
Study the propagation of EM wave in rectangular waveguide and study the dispersion
characteristics.
12. Write a MATLAB program that determines the first 20 modes supported by an air-filled
rectangular waveguide and sorts them to be in ascending order, starting with the
fundamental mode. The program should output a formatted table that labels each mode as
either TEmn or TMmn along with its cutoff frequency. Create five difference tables, one
for each of the following five cases: Table 1: a = 0.5 cm and b = 1.0 cm Table 2: a = 1.0
cm and b = 1.0 cm Table 3: a = 1.5 cm and b = 1.0 cm Table 4: a = 2.0 cm and b = 1.0 cm
Table 5: a = 2.5 cm and b = 1.0 cm.
AIM
Study the propagation of EM wave in rectangular waveguide and study the effect of
waveguide dimension on mode characteristics.
Text books:
1. Principle of Electromagnetics, Matthew N.O. Sadiku & S.V. Kulkarni, Oxford University
Press, Sixth Edition.
Reference books:
1. Electromagnetics field Theory and Transmission Line G.S.N Raju, Pearson Education
2. Electromagnetic Waves and Radiating Systems, 2/e, E. C. Jordan and K. G.Balmain, PHI.
3. Electromagnetics, David Cheng, Prentice Hall

NA

NA
Page 84 of 465
Simulations based on advanced topics after completion of compulsory twelve experiments.

Direct Assessment

Attendance Marks 12
Lab file Marks 12
Viva Marks 24
Lab quiz Marks 20
Indirect Assessment
Program
Specific
Outcomes
Outcome
(PSOs)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
CO1 3 3 3 3 3 1 1 1 1 2 1 3 3 2 1
CO2 3 3 3 3 3 1 1 1 1 2 1 3 2 2 2
CO3 3 3 3 3 3 1 1 1 1 2 1 3 2 2 2
CO4 3 3 3 3 3 1 1 1 1 2 1 3 2 2 2
CO5 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2
Page 85 of 465
CD Course
Code Outcome
CD1
CD3
CD4
CD5
Aids CO5 CD4, CD5, CD7, CD9
CD8
CD9 Simulation
Page 86 of 465
Course Code: EC 301

Course Title: Digital Communication
Pre-requisite(s): Knowledge of Analog Communication, Probability and Random Signal Theory
Co- requisite(s): NA
Class: B. Tech.
Semester / Level: Fifth / Third
Name of Teacher:
Course Objectives
6. To know the principles of sampling, Quantization and various waveform coding

schemes.
7. To learn the various baseband transmission schemes
8. To learn the different digital modulation techniques
9. To know the elements of information theory
10. To know spread spectrum techniques
Course Outcomes
CO1 Demonstrate the concept of sampling, Quantization and various waveform coding
schemes
CO2 Apply the concepts of various baseband transmission schemes.
CO3 Design and develop the different digital modulation systems

CO4 Apply the concepts of information theory for digital communication systems
CO5 Apply the concepts of spread spectrum techniques for digital communication systems
Page 87 of 465
SYLLABUS
(NO. OF
MODULE LECTURE
HOURS)
Module – I
Introduction to digital communication System, Sampling Process, Sampling 10

Theorems for Low Pass and Bandpass Signals, Types of Sampling, Quantization
of Signals, Companding, Different Encoding schemes like NRZ, Multilevel
Binary, Bi-phase, Differential Manchester, Pulse Code Modulation, Differential
Pulse Code Modulation, Delta Modulation and Adaptive Delta Modulation, Noise
in Pulse Code Modulation and Delta Modulation Systems.
Module – II
Matched Filter, Error Rate due to Noise, Intersymbol Interference, Nyquist 8

Criterion for Distortion-less Baseband Binary Transmission, Geometric
Representation of Signals, The Gram-Schmidt Orthogonalization Procedure,
Maximum Likelihood Decoding, Correlation Receiver.
Module – III
Digital Modulation Techniques: Amplitude Shift Keying, Binary Phase Shift 8

Keying, Differential Phase Shift Keying, Quadrature Phase Shift Keying, M-ary
PSK, Binary Frequency Shift Keying, M-ary FSK, and Minimum Shift Keying.
Error Probability and Power Spectra of ASK, BPSK, QPSK and BFSK,
Equalization Techniques, Synchronization and Carrier Recovery for Digital
modulation.
Module – IV
The concept of Amount of Information, Entropy, Information Rate, Shannon 7

Fano and Huffman Source Coding Schemes, Shannon’s theorem, Channel
capacity, Capacity of Gaussian Channel, Bandwidth-S/N Trade off
Module – V
Characteristics and Applications of Spread Spectrum, Direct Sequence Spread 7

Spectrum, Effect of Thermal Noise, Single Tone Interference and Jamming, Code
Division Multiple Access, PN Sequence, Frequency Hop Spread Spectrum, Time
Hop Spread Spectrum.
Page 88 of 465
Text Books:
1. “Principles of Communication Systems”, 4/e, by H. Taub and D L Schilling, Goutam Saha, Tata
McGraw Hills, ND.
2. “Communication Systems”, 4/e by Simon Haykin, John Wiley and Sons, Delhi.
3. “Modern Digital and Analog Communication System” 4/e by B.P.Lathi, Zhi Ding, Oxford
University Press
Reference Books:
1. Digital Communications Fundamental and Applications by Bernard Sklar, Pearson Education.
2. Proakis J. G. and Salehi M., "Communication Systems Engineering", Pearson Education,
2002.
3. P Ramakrishna Rao, “Digital Communication” TMH Education Private Limited 2011
Gaps in the Syllabus (to meet Industry/Profession requirements) : NA
POs met through Gaps in the Syllabus : NIL

1. Estimation Theory for Communication System
POs met through Topics beyond syllabus/Advanced topics/Design Po2, Po3, Po4
Direct Assessment

First Quiz 10
Second Quiz 10
Indirect Assessment
Page 89 of 465
Program
Specific
Outcomes
Outcome
(PSOs)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
CO1 3 3 2 3 3 1 1 3 2 2 1 3 3 2 2
CO2 3 3 2 3 3 1 1 3 2 2 1 3 3 2 2
CO3 3 3 2 3 3 1 1 3 2 2 1 3 1 2 3
CO4 3 3 2 3 3 1 1 3 2 2 1 3 3 2 1
CO5 3 3 2 3 3 1 1 3 2 2 1 3 3 2 1

Lecture by use of boards/LCD projectors/OHP
CD1
projectors CO1 CD1, CD 8
CD2 Tutorials/Assignments CO2 CD1, CD 8 and CD9
CD1, CD4, CD8 and
CD3
Seminars CO3 CD9
CD4 Mini projects/Projects CO4 CD1 and CD8
CD5 Laboratory experiments/teaching aids CO5 CD1 and CD8
Self- learning such as use of NPTEL materials and
CD8
internets
CD9 Simulation
Page 90 of 465
Course code: EC302

Course title: Communication System Lab.
Pre-requisite(s): Analog Communication
Co- requisite(s): Digital Communication
Credits: L: 0 T: 0 P: 3 C: 1.5
Class: B. Tech.
Semester / Level: Fifth/Three
Branch: Electronics & Communication Lab
Name of Teacher:
Course Objectives:
6. To develop an understanding about the Analog Modulation Techniques, V-F
conversion and Butterworth LPF.
7. To develop an understanding about the signal sampling, quantization and its
reconstruction
8. To develop an ability to understand and design the various waveform coding
techniques
9. To develop an ability to evaluate and design various digital modulation Techniques
10. To develop an ability to evaluate and design Time Division Multiplexing
Technique
Course Outcomes:
CO1 Demonstrate understanding of the various Analog Modulation Techniques, V-F
CO2 Analyse the signal sampling, quantization and its reconstruction.
CO3 Design the generation and detection of various waveform coding techniques such
as PCM, DM and ADM
CO4 Design the modulators and demodulators for various digital modulation
techniques such as ASK, PSK, FSK, QPSK, and QAM
CO5 Design system for Time Division multiplexing Technique
Page 91 of 465
SYLLABUS
1. Name of the Experiment: Generation and detection of Amplitude Modulated

AIM-1: Generation and detection of Amplitude Modulated wave and calculation of percentage
modulation using ACL 01 and ACL 02 Kits
AIM-2: Design of Amplitude Modulation, DSB-SC, and SCB-SC Modulation and
Demodulation Systems using ALTAIR Solid Thinking Embed/Comm.
2. Name of the Experiment: : Generation and detection of Frequency Modulated wave

AIM-1: Generation and detection of Frequency Modulated wave using ACL 03 and ACL 04
FM trainer Kits
AIM-2: Design of Frequency Modulation and Demodulation Systems using ALTAIR Solid
Thinking Embed/Comm.
3. Name of the Experiment: Generation and detection of PAM, PWM, PPM

AIM-1: Generation and detection of PAM, PWM, PPM using DCL 08 Falcon kit.
AIM-2: Design of PAM, PWM, PPM Modulation and Demodulation Systems using ALTAIR
Solid Thinking Embed/Comm.
4. Name of the Experiment: Design and implementation of 2nd and 4th order Low pass
Butterworth filters
AIM-1: Design and implementation of 2nd and 4th order Low pass Butterworth filters using
Multisim
AIM-2: Design and implementation of 2nd and 4th order Low pass Butterworth filters
5. Name of the Experiment: Investigation of Signal Sampling and Reconstruction

AIM-1: Investigation of Signal Sampling and Reconstruction using DCL 01 Falcon kit
AIM-2: Investigation of Signal Sampling and Reconstruction using ALTAIR Solid Thinking
Embed/Comm
6. Name of the Experiment: Investigation of TDM system

AIM-1: Investigation of TDM system using DCL02 Falcon kit
8. Name of the Experiment: Investigation of practical PCM system

AIM-1: Investigation of practical PCM system using DCL03 and DCL04 Falcon kit
Page 92 of 465
9. Name of the Experiment: Investigation of Delta Modulation system
AIM-1: Investigation of Delta Modulation and Adaptive Delta modulation system using
DCL07 Falcon kit
10. Name of the Experiment: Investigation of ASK, FSK, PSK modulation/demodulation

AIM-1: Investigation of ASK, FSK, PSK modulation/demodulation using trainer kits
AIM-2: Design of ASK, PSK, FSK modulator/demodulator using ALTAIR Solid Thinking
Embed/Comm
9. Name of the Experiment: Investigation of MSK modulation/demodulation

AIM-1: Investigation of MSK modulation/demodulation using trainer kits
AIM-2: Design of MSK modulator/demodulator using ALTAIR Solid Thinking Embed/Comm
10. Name of the Experiment: Investigation of QAM modulation and demodulation

AIM-1 : Investigation of QAM modulation and demodulation using ST 2112 QAM trainer kit
AIM-2: Design of QAM modulator/demodulator using ALTAIR Solid Thinking

Embed/Comm
11. Name of the Experiment: Investigation of QPSK modulation and demodulation

AIM-1: Investigation of QPSK modulation and demodulation using ST 2112 QAM trainer kit
AIM-2: Design of QPSK modulator/demodulator using ALTAIR Solid Thinking

Embed/Comm
Text Book:
1. “Principles of Communication Systems”, 2/e, by H. Taub and DL Schilling, Tata McGraw

Hills, ND.
2. “Communication Systems”, 4/e by Simon Haykin, John Wiley and Sons, Delhi.
Reference Books:
1. Simon Haykin, “Communication Systems”, Wiley Eastern Limited, New Delhi, 2016,
4/e.
2. J. Schiller, “Mobile Communication” 2/e, Pearson Education, 2012.
Page 93 of 465
Direct Assessment

Attendance Marks 12
Lab Viva marks 20
Lab file Marks 12
Lab Quiz-I Marks 10
Program
Specific
Outcomes
Outcome
(PSOs)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
CO1 3 3 3 3 3 1 1 1 1 2 1 3 2 2 1
CO2 3 3 3 3 3 1 1 1 1 2 1 3 2 2 1
CO3 3 3 3 3 3 1 1 1 1 2 1 3 2 2 1
CO4 3 3 3 3 3 1 1 1 1 2 1 3 2 2 1
CO5 3 3 3 3 3 1 1 1 1 2 1 3 2 2 1
Page 94 of 465
CD Course
Code Delivery
Method Used
CD2 Tutorials/Assignments CO2 CD1, CD5

CD3 Seminars/ Quiz (s) CO3 CD1, CD5
CD5 Laboratory Experiments/Teaching Aids CO5 CD1, CD5

CD9 Simulation
Page 95 of 465
Course code: EC303

Course title: Microprocessors and Microcontrollers
Pre-requisite(s): EC203 Digital system Design
Co- requisite(s):
Class: B.Tech.
Semester / Level: V/03
Branch: ECE
Name of Teacher:
Course Objectives
1. To explain the basic building blocks of a Microprocessor/ Microcontroller

architecture and the operation with relevant timing diagrams.
2. To demonstrate the knowledge of different addressing modes and instruction set of
a Microprocessor/ Microcontroller in developing efficient programing logic.
3. To develop the interfacing circuits for different applications with appropriate
peripherals.
4. To analyze the evolution of Microprocessor/Microcontroller and compare the

different features.
5. To design a Microprocessor/ Microcontroller based system suitable for industrial

applications.
Course Outcomes
After the completion of this course, students shall be able to:
CO1 Define the architectural differences between Microprocessor and Microcontroller.
CO2 Apply the programming concepts for the design of efficient codes.
CO3 Make use of different I/O chips for the desired application by programming them
in different modes.
CO4 Illustrate the advancements made to the recent generations Microprocessor/
Microcontroller.
CO5 Develop Microprocessor/ Microcontroller based products to meet the industrial
requirements.
Page 96 of 465
SYLLABUS
(NO. OF
MODULE LECTURE
HOURS)
Module – I
Review of SAP-I Concept, Introduction to 8085 Microprocessor : Architecture of 10
8085 Processor , Functions of all signals, Bus concepts, Multiplexed and De-
multiplexed Bus, Instruction set, Addressing modes, Stack operation, Timing
diagrams, Programming examples, Memory Organization, Memory Interfacing,
Memory Mapped I/O, I/O Mapped I/O, Data transfer schemes and Interrupt
structure of 8085 Microprocessor.
Module – II
Introduction to 8086 Microprocessor: Architecture of 8086, concept of pipelining, 10
pin diagram, difference between 8086 and 8088 microprocessor, maximum and
minimum modes, Memory organization, advantages of memory segmentation,
even and odd addressing of memory, Instruction set, Addressing modes, Stack
operation, Timing diagrams, Programming examples, Memory interfacing and
interrupt structure of 8086 microprocessor.
Module – III
Peripheral Interfacing with 8086 Microprocessor: Architecture of 8255 I/O 7
peripheral chip, Modes of operation, Hand shake mode operation, BSR mode,
ADC 0801 and ADC 0808 Interfacing with 8086 microprocessor, Analogue
multiplexed ADC, DAC 0808 specifications, DAC Interfacing, Programming
examples for Generation of square wave, positive and negatives ramps, triangular
and sine waves, Sample and Hold circuit, LF 398 and its applications in Data
Acquisition. 8253 timer, Modes of operation, Applications, 8279
Keyboard/Display Interface, Different modes of operation, Interfacing,
Programming examples
Module – IV
Introduction to advanced Microprocessors: Evolution of Microprocessors, 5
Harvard and Princeton architecture, Concept of CISC and RISC processors
Evolutionary steps and Additional features of 80186, 80286, 80386, 80486 and
Pentium Processors, Introduction to ARM processors.
Module – V
Introduction to Microcontrollers: Architecture of 8051, instruction set, interrupt 8
structure of 8051, programming examples, Introduction to 16-bit
microcontrollers, Features of 16-bit microcontrollers such as 80196 and PIC24.
Page 97 of 465
Books recommended:
Textbooks:
1. Digital Computer Electronics, 2/e. by A. P. Malvino.
2. Microprocessor Architecture, Programming and Applications with 8085 by R. S. Gaonkar.
3. Advanced Microprocessors and Peripherals by K. M. Bhurchandi and A. K. Ray.
4. The 8051 Microcontroller and Embedded System by Muhammad Ali Mazidi.
5. ARM architecture reference manual, 2/e by David Seal.
Reference books:
1. Intel Manual’s for 8085, 8086, 8051 and other peripheral chips.
2. Advanced Microprocessor” by Y. Rajasree.
3. Microprocessor and Interfacing, Programming of Hardware” by Douglas Hall.
Direct Assessment

First Quiz 10
Second Quiz 10
Indirect Assessment
Page 98 of 465
Program
Specific
Outcomes
Outcome
(PSOs)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
CO1 3 3 2 3 3 1 1 3 3 3 3 2
CO2 3 3 2 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 3 2
CO3 3 3 2 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 3 2
CO4 3 3 2 3 3 2 2 3 3 3 3 2
CO5 3 3 2 3 3 2 2 3 3 3 3 2

CD1 Lecture by use of Boards/LCD Projectors CO1 CD1,CD2 and CD 8
CD2 Tutorials/Assignments CO2 CD1
CD8
Internets
CD9 Simulation
Page 99 of 465
Course code: EC304

Course title: Microprocessors and Microcontrollers Lab
Pre-requisite(s):
Co- requisite(s):
Class: B. Tech.
Semester / Level: V/ 03
Branch: ECE
Name of Teacher:
Course Objectives
1. To develop efficient 8085 based program for different tasks.
2. To develop efficient 8086 based program for different tasks.
3. To develop efficient 8051µc based program for different tasks.

4. To build interfacing circuits for different tasks.
5. To be able to develop microprocessor and microcontrollers based systems for

industrial applications.
Course Outcomes
After the completion of this course, students shall be able to:
CO1 Demonstrate the programming concepts of 8085/8086/8051 for efficient coding.
CO2 Show the interfacing of different peripherals with 8085/8086/8051.
CO3 Analyse the output of different peripherals when programmed in different modes
using 8085/8086/8051.
CO4 Develop the interfacing circuits for different applications with appropriate
peripherals.
CO5 Design 8085/8086/8051 based system for various real time applications.
Page 100 of 465

SYLLABUS
Therefore, EC303 Microprocessors and Microcontrollers is the syllabus for the EC304
Microprocessors and Microcontrollers Lab. Following experiments are the guidelines for the
students. However, the questions for exams are not limited to this experiment list.
8085 AND 8086 PROGRAMMING
Data Transfers
Aim1: REARRANGING BYTES
Aim2: GROUPING ODD, EVEN, DIVIDE BY 4 AND DIVIDE BY 16 BYTES
Aim3: FORMATION OF A THIRD BLOCK
Aim4: FILLING UP 128 LOCATIONS

Arithmetic Operations
Aim1: ADDITION OF 12 BYTES
Aim2: MULTIPLICATION OF SINGLE BYTE BY SINGLE BYTE
Aim3: ADDITION OF 18 BCD NO’S
Aim4: ADDITION OF TWO 10-BYTE NO’S
Aim5: ADDITION OF TWO 20-DIGIT BCD NO’s:
Aim6: BCD SUBTRACTION
Aim7: MULTIPLICATION OF TWO 5-BYTE BINARY NUMBERS
Aim8: BCD MULTIPLICATION
Aim9: BINARY DIVISION
Logical Operations
Aim1: CHECKING BITS OF A WORD
Aim2: LOGICAL OPERATION
Data Processing
Aim1: NUMBER OF BITS IN BYTES
Aim2: MAXIMUM AND MINIMUM BYTES
Aim3: SIZE OF A BLOCK ENDING WITH A SPECIFIED BYTE
Aim4: SIZE OF A BLOCK STARTING WITH 00H AND ENDING WITH 60H
Aim5: SIZE OF A BLOCK ENDING WITH THREE ALTERNATE 00H
Aim6: NUMBER OF TIMES FFH OCCURS AS PAIR
Aim7: CONSECUTIVE MEMORY LOCATIONS WITH IDENTICAL DATA
Aim8: COUNT OF SPECIFIED BYTES
Aim9: ADDRESS OF LAST NON-BLANK CHARACTER
Aim10: REPLACING TRAILING ZEROS WITH BLANKS
Aim11: ADDING EVEN PARITY TO ASCII CHARACTERS
Page 101 of 465

Sorting
Aim1: SORTING IN DESCENDING ORDER
Aim2: SORTING EVEN AND ODD PARITY BYTES
Aim3: SORTING SIGNED BYTES
Aim4: SORTING SIGNED BINARY BYTES IN ASCENDING ORDER
String Operations
Aim1: COMPARISON OF TWO ASCII STRINGS
Aim2: AN ASCII STRING TO BYTE CONVERSION
Aim3: INSERTION TO A LIST
Parallel Communication
Aim1: WRITE AN ASSEMBLY LANGUAGE PROGRAM FOR GENERATION OF
SQUARE WAVE USING 8255.
Aim2: WRITE AN ASSEMBLY LANGUAGE PROGRAM FOR INPUTTING AN 8-BIT

DATA THROUGH PORT A OF 8255 IN MODE – 0
Aim3: WRITE AN ASSEMBLY LANGUAGE PROGRAM FOR INPUTTING AN 8-BIT
DATA THROUGH PORT A OF 8255 IN MODE – 1 THROUGH STATUS
CHECK.
SQUARE WAVE USING 8253.
Aim5: WRITE AN ASSEMBLY LANGUAGE PROGRAM TO GENERATE
TRIANGULAR WAVE USING DAC 0808.
Aim6: WRITE AN ASSEMBLY LANGUAGE PROGRAM TO GENERATE SAW
TOOTH WAVE OF MAGNITUDE 0 VOLT TO +4 VOLTS USING DAC 0808.
Aim7: WRITE AN ASSEMBLY LANGUAGE PROGRAM TO CONVERT ANALOG
SIGNALS OF MAGNITUDE +3.5 VOLTS TO +5 VOLTS IN STEPS OF 0.1
VOLTS TO DIGITAL EQUIVALENT HEX VALUES.
Aim8: WRITE AN ASSEMBLY LANGUAGE PROGRAM TO CONTROL THE SPEED
OF STEPPER MOTOR USING 8255 PPI.
Aim9: WRITE AN ASSEMBLY LANGUAGE PROGRAM TO CONTROL THE
TRAFFIC LIGHTS USING 8255 PPI
Serial Communication
SQUARE WAVE USING SERIAL OUTPUT PIN
Aim2: WRITE AN ASSEMBLY LANGUAGE PROGRAM FOR INPUTTING AN 8-
BIT DATA SERIALLY THROUGH SERIAL INPUT PIN.
Interrupts
Aim1: To study the software and hardware interrupts of 8085.
Aim2: To study the Interrupt controller 8259.
Aim3: To study the Interrupt features of 8051.
Page 102 of 465

Timers
Aim1: WRITE AN ASSEMBLY LANGUAGE PROGRAM TO CALCULATE THE

CONVERSION TIME OF ADC USING 8253 TIMER.
Aim2: WRITE AN ASSEMBLY LANGUAGE PROGRAM TO OBSERVE WAVEFORMS
OF 8253 TIMER IN DIFFERENT MODES.
Keyboard and Display
Aim1: WRITE AN ASSEMBLY LANGUAGE PROGRAM TO FLASH AND ROTATE
“HELP US” USING 8259 PIC.

Code Conversion
Aim1: BINARY TO BCD CONVERSION
Aim2: BCD TO BINARY CONVERSION
Aim3: CONVERSION OF NIBBLES TO ASCII CODES
Aim4: ASCII TO HEXADECIMAL CONVERSION
Books recommended:
Textbooks:
6. Microprocessor Architecture, Programming and Applications with 8085 by R. S. Gaonkar.

7. Advanced Microprocessors and Peripherals by K. M. Bhurchandi and A. K. Ray.
8. The 8051 Microcontroller and Embedded System by Muhammad Ali Mazidi.
Reference books:
4. Intel Manual’s for 8085, 8086, 8051 and other peripheral chips.
5. Advanced Microprocessor” by Y. Rajasree.
6. Microprocessor and Interfacing, Programming of Hardware” by Douglas Hall.
Page 103 of 465

Direct Assessment

Continuous Internal Assessment (60)
Attendance Marks 10
Lab file Marks 06
Lab quiz Marks 08
Lab Viva marks 12
Indirect Assessment
Direct Assessment

Attendance Marks 10
Lab file Marks 06
Lab quiz Marks 08
Lab Viva marks 12
Page 104 of 465

Program
Specific
Outcomes
Outcome
(PSOs)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
CO1 3 3 2 3 3 1 1 2 2 2 2 1
CO2 3 3 2 3 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 1
CO3 3 3 2 3 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 1
CO4 3 3 2 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 1
CO5 3 3 2 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 1

CD Course Delivery methods Course Outcome Course
Delivery
Method
CD1 Lecture by use of boards/LCD projectors/OHP projectors CO1 CD5, CD9
CD2 Tutorials/Assignments/Quiz (s) CO2 CD5, CD9
CD4 Mini projects/Projects CO4 CD5, CD9
CD5 Laboratory experiments/teaching aids CO5 CD5, CD9
CD8 internets
CD9 Simulation
Page 105 of 465

Course Code: EC 305
Course Title: Signal Processing Techniques
Pre-requisite(s): Signals and Systems
Co- requisite(s):
Class: B. Tech.
Semester / Level: 5
Name of Teacher:
Course Objectives
This course envisions to impart students to:
1 Understand the basic concepts of signals and system in frequency and Z- domain.
2 Develop transfer function, and structure of digital systems.
3 Develop an ability to design and apply analog filters.
4 Design and implement the digital FIR and IIR filters.
5 Understand the multi-rate signal processing and spectrum estimation.
Course Outcomes
CO1 Study the system representation and characteristics in frequency and Z-transform
Domain.
CO2 Design and implement the digital system structures and analyse them.
CO3 Design of analog filters Butterworth filter, Chebyshev filter for various applications.
CO4 Design of digital FIR and IIR filters for various applications.
CO5 Implement multi rate signal processing and spectral estimation.
Page 106 of 465

SYLLABUS
(NO. OF
MODULE LECTURE
HOURS)
Module – I 10
Introduction to Discrete-Time Signals and system, concept of frequency in
continuous and discrete time signal, LTI system as frequency selective filter,
Inverse system and de-convolution, Discrete Time Fourier Transform (DTFT)
and Discrete Fourier Transform (DFT), Periodic convolution, Direct evaluation
of DFT, FFT algorithms- decimation in time and frequency, Z-transform,
Analysis of LTI system in Z-domain, Relationship between Laplace and Z-
transforms, Relationship between Fourier and Z-transforms.
Module – II 8
Digital Filter Structures (FIR & IIR): Direct form I&II, cascade, parallel and
ladder realizations, lattice structure, representation of numbers, quantization of
filter coefficients, round-off effects.
Module – III 8
Filter Function Approximations and Transformations.
Review of approximations of ideal analog filter response, Butterworth filter,
Chebyshev Type I & II, Elliptic filters. Frequency Transformations:
Frequency transformation in analog domain, frequency transformation in digital
domain.
Module – IV 8
Design of IIR Filter: Design based on analog filter approximations, Impulse
invariance method, Matched Z-transformation, Bilinear transformation. Design
of FIR Filters: Symmetric and antisymmetric FIR filters, design of linear phase
FIR filters using windows and frequency – sampling methods, design of optimum
equiripple linear phase FIR filters, comparison of FIR and IIR filters.
Module – V 6
Multi rate DSP, Decimators and Interpolators, Sampling rate conversion,
multistage decimator & interpolator, Poly phase filters, Estimation of Spectra
from Finite-Duration Observations of Signals.
Page 107 of 465

Text Books:
1. John G. Proakis, Dimitris G. Mamalakis, Digital Signal Processing, Principles, Algorithms and
Applications
2. Alan V. Oppenheim Ronald W. Schafer, Digital Signal Processing, PHI, India.
3. S. K. Mitra - Digital Signal Processing: A computer based approach, TMH, 2001
Reference Books:
1. Antonious, Digital Filter Design, Mc-Graw-Hill International Editions.

1. Applications of signal processing techniques through hardware platform.

NA

DSP Processor architectures

2
Direct Assessment

First Quiz 10
Second Quiz 10
Indirect Assessment
Page 108 of 465

Program
Specific
Outcomes
Outcome
(PSOs)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
CO1 3 3 2 1 1 1 1 2
CO2 3 3 2 2 1 2 1 2
CO3 2 3 2 3 1 1 1 2
CO4 3 3 2 3 1 1 1 2
CO5 3 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 2

CD8
Internets
CD9 Simulation
Page 109 of 465

Course Code: EC 306
Course Title: Signal Processing Lab
Pre-requisite(s): Signals & Systems
Co- requisite(s):
Class: B. Tech.
Semester / Level: 5
Name of Teacher:
Course Objectives
1 Understand the basics of Signal Processing algorithms such as convolution and

correlation via MATLAB implementation.
2 Design system and analyse its characteristics in transform domain.
3 Design of FIR and IIR filters.
4 Develop skill for MATLAB code and its implementation in DSP processor.
5 Apply the signal Processing techniques in various applications.
Course Outcomes
CO1 Demonstrate understanding of MATLAB with signal processing perspective.
CO2 Design digital system and analyse its characteristics in transform domain.
CO3 Design and implement FIR and IIR filters.
CO4 Apply the knowledge of MATLAB to various set of signal processing problems.
CO5 Develop and apply the signal Processing Algorithms in various applications.
Page 110 of 465

SYLLABUS
(NO. OF
Experiments Sessional
Classes)
1. Familiarization with MATLAB. Generation of the following sequence and to 12

plot them using MATLAB:
a. Unit Sample Sequence [n]
b. Unit Step Sequence u[n]
c. Ramp Sequence n. u[n]
d. Exponential Sequences
e. Sine / Cosine Sequences
2. To generate the discrete time signal from analog signal using sampling
theorem and analyse the aliasing effect.
3. Verification of the following general properties of LTI system.
a. Linearity
b. Time-invariance
4. Computation of the linear convolution of two finite-length sequences.
Compare your result with that obtained by theoretical evaluation.
5. To compute the auto correlation/cross-correlation of two finite-length
sequences. Compare your result with that obtained by theoretical evaluation.
6. Obtain Inverse Z-Transforms using the Partial Fraction Expansion and test its
stability.
7. Cascade realization of the Linear-Phase FIR/ IIR transfer functions using
MATLAB.
8. Find out the output of two Periodic Digital sequences using Circular
Convolution. Compare your result with that obtained by theoretical
evaluation.
9. Computation of N-point DFT and FFT of the length-N sequence using
MATLAB and implement using TMS DSP processor.
10. Design of digital filter (LP/HP/BP) and evaluate its performance.
11. To realize the decimation, interpolation and sampling rate conversion of a
signal.
12. To write a program and simulate using C language / assembly language for
computation of Linear Convolution using TMS DSP Processor

1. To develop a MATLAB program to convert Analog to Digital Frequencies 8
using Bilinear Transformation.
2. To design a Butterworth filter using standard design steps (for LP, HP, BP
& BR filters), i.e. find out the order of the filter when Pass Band Gain,
Sampling frequency and Pass Band and Stop Band Cut-Off frequencies
are given. Then find out the Normalized Transfer Function and Actual
Transfer Function
3. To design a Chebyshev filter using standard design steps (general
programs for LP, HP, BP & BR filter design)
Page 111 of 465

Text Books:
1. Getting Started with MATLAB by RudraPratap, Oxford Publication
2. Digital Signal Processing: A computer-Based Approach by Sanjit K. Mitra, Mc-graw Hill
3. Digital Signal Processor: Architecture, Programming and Applications by B.
Venkataramani and M. Bhaskar, Tata Mc-graw Hill
Reference Books:
1. Digital Signal Processing using Matlab by Vinay K. Ingle and John J. Proakis, Cengage
Learning.

NA

Through experiments involving design/modelling of device/circuits on advanced topics
Direct Assessment
Attendance Marks 12
Lab file Marks 12
Viva Marks 24
Lab quiz Marks 20
Page 112 of 465

Program
Specific
Outcomes
Outcome
(PSOs)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
CO1 1 2 3 3 1 2 3
CO2 2 2 3 3 1 2 3
CO3 2 2 3 3 1 2 3
CO4 1 2 3 3 1 2 3
CO5 1 2 3 3 1 2 3

CD1 Lecture by use of Boards/LCD Projectors CO1 CD5
CD3 Seminars CO3 CD5
CD4 Mini Projects/Projects CO4 CD5
CD5 Laboratory Experiments/Teaching Aids CO5 CD5
CD8
Internets
CD9 Simulation
Page 113 of 465

Course code: EC307

Course title: Fundamentals of Data communication
Pre-requisite(s): basic concepts of communication
Co- requisite(s):
Class: B.E
Semester / Level: VI
Branch: ECE
Name of Teacher:
Course Objectives:

A. To build an understanding of the fundamental concepts of Data Communication
B. To analyze the performance of different flow control and error control mechanism
and implement Error detection and correction scheme.
C. Find out a suitable multiplexing scheme for effective utilization of the bandwidth.
D. Implement different routing algorithm on a given network
E. To justify the need of protocol and standards in data communication
Course Outcomes:
After the completion of this course, students will be:
CO1 Understand the basic concepts of data encoding and data transmission.
CO2 Explain different Data link control techniques like, error detection, correction, flow
control and error control.
CO3 Demonstrate different multiplexing schemes and their practical application.
CO4 Compare the performance of different switching techniques.

CO5 Define the protocols and standards used in data communication
Page 114 of 465

SYLLABUS
(NO. OF
MODULE LECTURE
HOURS)
Module – I 9
Data Communication Techniques:: Basic Concepts, Analog and Digital
Transmission, Transmission line Impairments, Channel Capacity, Guided
Transmission media, Digital data to Digital Signal, Different encoding schemes
like NRZ, Multilevel Binary, Bi phase, Differential Manchester, Scrambling
techniques, Self clocking codes, CODEC and MODEM. Synchronous and
Asynchronous transmission, Backward and Forward Error Control, Error detection
techniques like CRC, Shift register implementation, Error correction, Block Code
principles, Hamming distance, Interfacing standards like V.24/EIA-232.F, CCITT-
X.21 Interface
Module – II 9
Data Link Control: Line Configurations, Flow Control using Stop and Wait ARQ,
Sliding window protocol, Error control using Stop and Wait ARQ, Go-back-to N
ARQ, Selective Reject ARQ, Data Link Control Protocol HDLC, Basic
characteristics, Frame structure and operation of HDLC, Data transparency control
using bit stuffing, Utilization efficiency of a link, Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP),
Introduction to LCP, PAP, CHAP, NCP and IPCP.
Module – III 8
Multiplexing and switched Network Frequency Division Multiplexing, Carrier
standards, Synchronous Time Division Multiplexing, TDM link control, Digital
Carrier systems, SONET/SDH, Statistical Time Division Multiplexing,
Performance, Cable Modem, ADSL Design, Discrete multitone, xDSL.
Comparison of Circuit switching, Message switching and Packet switching
techniques, Digital switching concepts like Space division switching, 3-Stage
Space division switch, Control Signalling, Common-channel Signalling, TDM Bus
switch, TSI switch, Time Multiplexed Switches like STS and TST, Routing in
circuit switched networks.
Page 115 of 465

Module – IV 7
Packet Switching: Datagram packet switching and Virtual circuit Packet switching,
Use of Least cost algorithms like Dijkstra’s and Bellman-Ford algorithms, Routing
characteristics, Routing strategies, Example system of ARPANET (all 3
generations) Congestion, Congestion control techniques, Traffic management,
Congestion control in Packet switched networks, CCITT X.25 Interface.
Module – V 7
Protocols : The need for a Protocol Architecture, OSI layered structure, TCP/IP
Protocol Suite, Fundamental differences between OSI and TCP/IP, Primitives and
PDUs. LAN protocol architecture, Function of LLC and MAC. Connecting devices
like Repeaters, Hubs, Bridges, Two-layer switches, Routers and Three layer
switches. IP header and IP addressing. Transport protocols TCP and UDP.
Text Books:
1. Data and Computer Communication, 7/e. by William Stallings.

2. Data Communication and Networking, 3/e. by Behrouz. A. Forouzan.
Reference Books:
1. Data Communication and Computer Networks by Prakash C. Gupta. Prentice Hall India
Pvt., Limited
Hardware implementation and testing of encoding techniques, link layer protocols,

multiplexing techniques.
3, 4, 12

• Network Security
• Application Layer protocol

2, 3, 4, 12
Page 116 of 465

Direct Assessment

First Quiz 10
Second Quiz 10
Indirect Assessment
Program
Specific
Outcomes
Outcome
(PSOs)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
CO1 3 1 1 2 1 - - - - - - 2 2 1 3
CO2 3 3 3 2 1 - - - - - - 1 3 1 3
CO3 3 3 2 2 2 - - - - - - 1 2 2 2
CO4 3 2 1 1 1 - - - - - - 1 2 2 2
CO5 3 1 1 2 1 - - - - - - 2 2 1 3

CD8
Internets
CD9 Simulation
Page 117 of 465

Course Code: EC 309
Course Title: Adaptive Signal Processing
Co- requisite(s):
Class: B. Tech.
Semester / Level: 5
Name of Teacher:
Course Objectives
11. Understand the concept of adaptive systems and its characteristics.
12. Impart knowledge on adaptive algorithms LMS and RLS.
13. Impart knowledge on adaptive filter for optimal control.
14. Demonstrate the concept of adaptive beam forming and array system.
15. To help to design and apply adaptive filters for real- time applications.
Course Outcomes
CO1 Demonstrate the adaptive systems and its characteristics and LMS algorithm.
CO2 Apply and analyse the RLS algorithms, lattice filters and Kalman filter.
CO3 Design and implement adaptive control techniques.
CO4 Implement the adaptive array and beam forming techniques in engineering
applications.
CO5 Design and evaluate adaptive filters for adaptive noise cancellation, adaptive line
enhancement and interference cancellation, prediction considering present day
challenges and recent research development.
Page 118 of 465

SYLLABUS
(NO. OF
MODULE LECTURE
HOURS)
Module – I 8
Introduction to adaptive systems - definitions and characteristics, Adaptive linear
combiner : input signal and weight vector, the performance function, gradient and
minimum mean square error, alternative expression of gradient, LMS, NLMS,
sign-error, sign-data and FXLMS algorithms, transform domain LMS.
Module – II 8
Recursive least square algorithm, windowed RLS, computational complexity,
Block adaptive filter (time and DFT domains), adaptive lattice filters, Adaptive
filters with Orthogonal signals, Kalman Filter.
Module – III 8
Adaptive model control, Adaptive inverse control and model reference controls.
Plant noise and the filtered-X LMS Algorithm, Inverse control using Filtered-X
LMS algorithm.
Module – IV 8
Adaptive array and adaptive beam forming: Sidelobe cancellation, Beam forming
with a Pilot signal, Narrowband experiments , Broadband experiments,
Characteristics of receiving arrays, Griffiths LMS Beamformer, Adaptive
beamformer with pole and zeros, signal cancellation and distortion.
Module – V 8
Applications of Adaptive Filters: Adaptive Noise Cancellation, Adaptive Line
Enhancement, System identification, Channel equalization, Cancelling antenna
sidelobe Intereference, Adaptive self tuning filter.
Page 119 of 465

Text Books:
1. B.Widrow and S. D. Sterns, Adaptive Signal Processing, Pearson Education, 2nd Indian
reprint, 2002.
2. D. G. Manolokis, V. K. Ingle and S. M. Kogar, “Statistical and Adaptive Signal
Processing”, Mc Graw Hill International Edition, 2000.
3. S. Haykin and T. Kailath, Adaptive Filter Theory, Pearson Education, 4th Edition, 2005.
Reference Books:
1. Digital Signal Processing 3/E by S.K.Mitra TMH Edition.
2. Fundamentals of adaptive filtering, A. H. Sayed, Wiley, 2003.
3. Monson H. Hayes, Statistical Digital Signal Processing and Modelling, Wiley, 2002

2. Applications of adaptive signal processing techniques through hardware platform.

NA

DSP Processor architectures

2
Direct Assessment

First Quiz 10
Second Quiz 10
Indirect Assessment
Page 120 of 465

Program
Specific
Outcomes
Outcome
(PSOs)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
CO1 3 3 2 1 1 1 1 2
CO2 3 3 2 2 1 2 1 2
CO3 2 3 1 1 3 1 1 1 2
CO4 3 3 2 3 1 1 1 2
CO5 3 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 2

CD8
Internets
CD9 Simulation
Page 121 of 465

Course Code: EC 311

Course Title: DSP Processor
Co- requisite(s):
Class: B. Tech.
Semester / Level: 5
Name of Teacher:
Course Objectives
1. Understand the real time signal processing with hardware.
2. Explain the architectures of DSP and General Purpose Processors.
3. Learn to develop code on code Composer Studio.
4. Write the real time DSP algorithm for real time signal using Processing.
5. Apply the concept of the signal processing to understand the programming skills.
Course Outcomes
CO1 Demonstrate understanding on the real time signal processing with hardware and
software
CO2 Compare the architectures of DSP and General Purpose Processors.
CO3 Demonstrate understanding of DSP Instruction Set and Assembly Language

Programming
CO4 Implement and evaluate the DSP algorithms in code composer studio.
CO5 Develop the DSP algorithm for processing of real time signal using DSP Processor.
Page 122 of 465

SYLLABUS
(NO. OF
MODULE LECTURE
HOURS)
Module – I 8
Introduction – DSP Tasks and Applications, Real-time Signal Processing,
Representation of DSP algorithms; Number Representations and Arithmetic
Operations - Fixed point and floating-point representations and arithmetic
operations; Q notation
Module – II 8
Typical DSP Hardware: Digital Signal Processor Architectures – CPU,
Peripherals; Specific DSP processor architecture; Introduction to DSP systems
and architecture; Texas Instruments family of DSP Processors, study of
TMS320C6713/6416 Processor’s architecture.
Module – III 8
DSP Instruction Set and Assembly Language Programming – Instruction types;
Parallel programming; Pipelining; Efficient programming; Arithmetic: Fixed
point, floating point and residue arithmetic, Cordic architectures.
Module – IV 8
Extensive parallel operations, MAC operations, different addressing techniques,
common instructions used for extensive DSP applications, familiarity with Code
Composer Studio.
Module – V 8
DSP Algorithms and their Efficient Implementation - a) Linear filtering; b) FFT
and spectrum analysis; c) Scalar and vector quantization, source coding, linear
prediction coding; d) Function generation; Software Design for Low Power
Consumption. Software Configurable processors, Application case studies in
multimedia compression and communication
Page 123 of 465

Text Books:
1. Rulph Chassaing, “Digital Signal Processing and Applications with the C6713 and C6416
DSK”, Wiley, 2005
2. U. Meyer Baesse, “Digital Signal Processing with FPGAs”, Springer, 2001
Reference Books:
1. Behrooz Parhami, “Computer Arithmetic Algorithms and Hardware Design”, Oxford,
2000.
2. Shehrzad Qureshi, “Embedded Image Processing on the TMS320C6000 DSP” Springer,
2005.
NA

PO8 will be met though report-writing/presentation-based assignment

Teaching through research paper
Direct Assessment

First Quiz 10
Second Quiz 10
Indirect Assessment
Page 124 of 465

Program
Specific
Outcomes
Outcome
(PSOs)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
CO1 3 3 2 1 1 1 1 2
CO2 3 3 2 2 1 2 1 2
CO3 2 3 1 1 3 1 1 1 2
CO4 3 3 2 3 1 1 1 2
CO5 3 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 2

CD8
Internets
CD9 Simulation
Page 125 of 465

Course code: EC312

Course title: Digital Signal Processor Lab
Pre-requisite(s): EC311 Digital Signal Processor
Co- requisite(s): EC305 Signal Processing Techniques
Class: B. Tech.
Semester / Level: V
Branch: ECE
Name of Teacher:
Course Objectives

1. Develop concept to process the signal with the help of DSP processor
2. Demonstrate the concept of signal processing algorithm to implement in DSP

processor.
3. Understand the architecture of DSP Processor and development of programming

concept.
4. Grasp how to develop signal processing using Code composer studio to build a
dedicated hardware for particular work.
5. To elaborate the real time signal processing to control real time system
Course Outcomes
CO1 Apply the concept of DSP processor to implement signal operation.
CO2 Illustrate the concept of signal processing algorithm to implement in DSP processor.
CO3 Explain the architecture of DSP Processor and development of programming concept.
CO4 Implement signal processing algorithm using Code composer studio to build a
dedicated DSP processor hardware for particular work.
CO5 Develop real time signal processing-based inference and decision system
Page 126 of 465

Syllabus
This Lab is the application of the theory (i.e., hands-on experiments related to the course contents).
Therefore, EC311 Digital Signal Processor is the syllabus for the EC312 Digital Signal Processor
Lab. Following experiments are the guidelines for the students. However, the questions for exams
are not limited to these experiments.
1. To study the Code Composer Studio and architecture of TMS 320C6416/6473 DSP Kit.
2. Implementation of FFT and its analysis Using TMS 320C6416 DSP Kit.
3. Design and analysis of FIR filter using TMS 320C6416 DSP Kit.
4. To implement LMS Algorithm using TMS 320C6416 DSP Kit.
5. To write a program for finding the heart rate variability using TMS 320C6416 DSP Kit.
6. To write a MATLAB program for computation of the PSD of two Sinusoids using Analog
discovery 2 kit.
7. Implementation of BPSK Digital modulation using Analog discovery 2 kit.
8. Visualise the spectrum of vocal fold vibration using Electroglottpograph using Analog
discovery 2 kit.
9. Develop an algorithm for de-noising the biomedical signal and its implementation using
TMS 320C6416 DSP kit.
10. Implementation of Noise cancellation in bio signal using TMS 320C6473 DSP Kit.
11. Implementation of Image segmentation using TMS 320C6473 DSP kit.
12. Implementation of Image compression using TMS 320C6473 DSP kit.
Page 127 of 465

Textbooks:
1. Rulph Chassaing, “Digital Signal Processing and Applications with the C6713 and C6416
DSK”, Wiley, 2005
2. U. Meyer Baesse, “Digital Signal Processing with FPGAs”, Springer, 2001
Reference Books:
1. Behrooz Parhami, “Computer Arithmetic Algorithms and Hardware Design”, Oxford, 2000.
2. Shehrzad Qureshi, “Embedded Image Processing on the TMS320C6000™ DSP: Examples in
Code Composer Studio™ and MATLAB.

NA

NA


Direct Assessment

Attendance Marks 12
Lab file Marks 12
Viva Marks 24
Lab quiz Marks 20
Indirect Assessment
Page 128 of 465

Program
Specific
Outcomes
Outcome (PSOs)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
CO1 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 1 2 3 2 3
CO2 2 3 3 2 1 1 1 1 2 3 2 3
CO3 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 2 3 3 3
CO4 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 2 3 3 3
CO5 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2

CD1, CD2, CD3,
CD3 CD4, CD5, CD8,
Seminars CO3 CD9.
CD1, CD2, CD3,
CD4 CD4, CD5, CD8,
CD8
Internets
CD9 Simulation
Page 129 of 465

Course code: EC313

Course title: Electronic Measurements
Co- requisite(s):
Credits: L: 3 T: 0 P: 0 C: 3
Class: B. Tech
Semester / Level: III/03 In-depth Specialization/Programme Elective
Branch: ECE
Name of Teacher:
Course Objectives
1. Understand the need and concept of measurement, calibration, standards, errors,

static and dynamic performance characteristics of measuring instruments.
2. Demonstrate the operating principles of different analog and digital instruments.
3. Experiment and analyze various a.c. and d.c. bridges for the measurement.
4. Explain the operation and construction of analog and digital CRO used for different
parameter measurement in the department laboratory.
5. Solve the problems of measuring non electrical parameters using different
transducers.
Course Outcomes
CO1 Find and investigate errors and explain the static and dynamic characteristics of
instruments.
CO2 Explain the working of different analog instruments (PMMC, Moving iron) and use
them to design multi-range voltage, current and resistance measuring instruments.
CO3 Demonstrate the process of balancing different bridge networks to find the value
of unknown arm components.
CO4 Summarize the working of analog and digital CRO.
CO5 Schematize the measurement of non-electrical parameters using different
transducers.
Page 130 of 465

SYLLABUS
(NO. OF
MODULE LECTURE
HOURS)
Module – I 10
Introduction of measurements and measurement systems: Significance of
measurements, different methods of measurements, Instruments used in
measurements, Electronic Instruments and its classification, Elements of a
Generalized Measurement System. Characteristics of instruments, Static
characteristics, Errors in measurements, scale, range, and scale span, calibration,
Reproducibility and drift, Noise, Accuracy and precision, Significant figures,
Linearity, Hysteresis, Threshold, Dead time, Dead zone, Resolution and Loading
Effects.
Module – II 10
Analogue and Digital Instruments: Classification and Principles of Operation,
Working Details Moving Coil (PMMC) and Moving Iron Instruments
Construction, DC Ammeter, DC Voltmeter, Series and Shunt type Ohmmeter.
Analogue Electronic voltmeter, DC Voltmeter with chopper type DC amplifier,
Advantages of digital over analogue processing. Digital Voltmeters Digital Multi-
meters, Digital frequency Meter.
Module – III 7
Introduction of DC and AC Bridges: Wheatstone Bridge, Kelvin Double Bridge,
Maxwell’s Bridge, and Hay’s Bridge, Anderson’s Bridge, Scherings Bridge,
Wien’s Bridge, Sources of errors in Bridges and their elimination by shielding and
grounding. Q meter.
Module – IV 5
Oscilloscopes: CRT, Construction, Basic CRO circuits, Block diagram of a
modern oscilloscope, Y-amplifiers, X-amplifiers, Triggering, Oscilloscopic
measurement. Special CRO's: Dual trace, Dual beam, Sampling oscilloscope,
Storage CROs.
Page 131 of 465

Module – V 8
Transducers: Definition, Classification, Principle of Analogue transducer:
Resistive (Strain Gauge, POT, Thermistor and RTD), Capacitive, Piezoelectric,
Thermocouple and Inductive (LVDT) and RVDT) transducer, Working principle
of Digital Transducer and Optical transducer. Application of above transducers to
be discussed on the basis of Pressure, Displacement, Level, Flow and Temperature
measurements.
Books recommended:
Textbooks:
1. “Electrical and Electronic Measurements and Instrumentation” by A. K. Sawhney.
2. “Modern Electronic Instrumentation & Measurement Techniques” by Helfrick& Cooper.
Reference books:
1. “Electronic Instrumentation”, by H. S. Kalsi.
Gaps in the syllabus (to meet Industry/Profession requirements): Visit to CIF, BIT Mesra.
Direct Assessment

First Quiz 10
Second Quiz 10
Indirect Assessment
Page 132 of 465

Program
Specific
Outcomes
Outcome
(PSOs)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
CO1 3 3 2 3 3 1 1 3 3 3 2 1
CO2 3 3 2 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 2 1
CO3 3 3 2 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 2 1
CO4 3 3 2 3 3 2 2 3 3 3 2 1
CO5 3 3 2 3 3 2 2 3 3 3 2 1

CD1 Lecture by use of Boards/LCD Projectors CO1 CD1,CD2,CD5,CD8
CD2 Tutorials/Assignments CO2 CD1,CD2,CD5,CD8
CD3 Seminars CO3 CD1,CD2,CD5,CD8
CD4 Mini Projects/Projects CO4 CD1,CD2,CD5,CD8
CD5 Laboratory Experiments/Teaching Aids CO5 CD1,CD2,CD5,CD8
CD8
Internets
CD9 Simulation
Page 133 of 465

Course code: EC315

Course title: Introduction to Industrial Instrumentation
Pre-requisite(s): EC208 Electronic Measurements Lab
Co- requisite(s):
Credits: L: 3 T: 0 P: 0 C: 3
Class schedule per week: 3x1
Class: B. Tech
Branch: ECE
Name of Teacher:
Course Objectives
1. Understand the role of instrumentation for controlling different electrical or non-

electrical process variables in process industry.
2. Demonstrate the working of various components of an Automation System.
3. Summarize the various control schemes used in industry.
4. Experiment with PLC systems and its programming for controlling industrial
processes.
5. Schematize intelligent controllers for industrial applications.
Course Outcomes
CO1 Reproduce the different working principles of transducers and also design
transducers for measurement of non-electrical process variables.
CO2 Explain the role and working of different components of an industrial automation
systems.
CO3 Investigate and analyse the various control schemes used in industry.
CO4 Demonstrate the working of PLC and its programming.
CO5 Apply the concept of intelligent controllers as dynamic controller to control the
process with dynamic disturbances.
Page 134 of 465

SYLLABUS
(NO. OF
MODULE LECTURE
HOURS)
Module – I 10
Review of Transducers: Principles of operations and its classification,
Characteristics, Technological trends in making transducers, Silicon sensors for
the measurement of pressure, Level, Flow and Temperature, Bio-sensors ,types
and its Application .Radiation Sensors, X -ray and Nuclear radiation sensors,
Fiber optic sensors for Temperature, Liquid level, Fluid- flow measurement,
Electro-analytical sensors: Electrochemical cell, Standard Hydrogen Electrode
(SHE), Smart sensors.
Module – II 10
Components of Industrial Automation system: Detailed study of each block
involved in making of DAS, Signal Conditioners: as DA, IA, Signal Converters
(ADC & DAC), Sample and hold, Designing of Pressure, Temperature measuring
instrumentation system using DAS, Data logger. Introduction about Automation
system, Concepts of Control Schemes, Types of Controllers, Components
involved in implementation of Automation system i.e., DAS, DOS, Converter ( I
to P ) and Actuators: Pneumatic cylinder, Relay, Solenoid (Final Control
Element).
Module – III 7
Control Systems: Concepts of Controllers Schemes, Types of Controllers,
Computer Supervisory Control System (SCADA), Direct Digital Control’s
Structure and Software, Introduction to Distributed Digital Control.
Module – IV 8
Programmable Logic Controllers: Introduction of Programmable logic
controller, Principles of operation, Architecture of Programmable controllers,
Programming the Programmable controller.
Page 135 of 465

Module – V 5
Intelligent Controllers: Introduction to Intelligent Controllers, Model based
controllers, Predictive control, Artificial Intelligent Based Systems, Experts
Controller, Fuzzy Logic System and Controller, Artificial Neural Networks,
Neuro-Fuzzy Controller system.
Books recommended:
Textbooks:
1. “Computer-Based Industrial Control”, by Krishna Kant, PHI.
2. “Process Control Instrumentation Technology”, by Curtis D Johnson, Pearson Ed.
Reference books:
1. “Sensors and Transducers”, 2/E by D. Patranabis

Direct Assessment

First Quiz 10
Second Quiz 10
Indirect Assessment
Page 136 of 465

Program
Specific
Outcomes
Outcome
(PSOs)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
CO1 3 3 2 3 3 1 1 3 3 3 3 1
CO2 3 3 2 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 3 1
CO3 3 3 2 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 3 1
CO4 3 3 2 3 3 2 2 3 3 3 3 1
CO5 3 3 2 3 3 2 2 3 3 3 3 1

CD1, CD2, CD7, CD
CD1
Lecture by use of Boards/LCD Projectors CO1 8
CD1, CD2, CD7, CD
CD2
Tutorials/Assignments CO2 8
CD1, CD2, CD7, CD
CD3
Seminars CO3 8
CD1, CD2, CD7, CD
CD4
Mini Projects/Projects CO4 8
CD1, CD2, CD7, CD
CD5
Laboratory Experiments/Teaching Aids CO5 8
CD8
Internets
CD9 Simulation
Page 137 of 465

Course code: EC316
Course title: Industrial Instrumentation Lab
Pre-requisite(s): Electronic Measurement, Sensor and transducers,
Co- requisite(s): Electronic measurement Lab
Class: B. Tech.
Branch: ECE
Name of Teacher:
Course Objectives

1. To provide exposure to various measuring techniques for flow, level, vibration etc.
2. To demonstrate the working of different actuators.
3. To introduce virtual instrumentation with Lab VIEW software.

4. To program PLC for different real time control application.
5. To demonstrate various controllers parameter tuning.
Course Outcomes

CO1 Demonstrate the measuring techniques for flow, level, vibration etc.
CO2 Actuate control signal using different actuators for controlling valves.
CO3 Able to design measuring instruments using Lab VIEW software.
CO4 Program PLC for given real time application.
CO5 Schematize various control loop for industrial application.
Page 138 of 465

SYLLABUS
FLOW MEASUREMENT
Aim1. Flow Measurement using orifice, U tube Manometer and Rotameter.
FLOW CONTROL LOOP
Aim1. Liquid flow control using Flow control loop trainer.
VIBRATION MEASUREMENT
Aim1. Displacement Velocity and Acceleration measurement using Piezoelectric
acceleration sensor.
PNEUMATIC TRAINER
Aim1. Perform actuations using Pneumatic Actuator Trainer.
PRESSURE CONTROL LOOP
Aim1. Pneumatic Pressure control using Pressure control loop trainer.
LEVEL CONTROL LOOP
Aim1. Liquid Level control using Level control loop trainer
I to P CONVERTOR
Aim1. Study of current to pressure converter.
PLC-I
Aim1. Lift control using ABB PLC
PLC-II
Aim1. Logic gate simulation on ABB PLC.
PRESSURE GAUGE TESTER
Aim1. Calibration of pressure instruments using dead weight pressure gauge tester.
Lab VIEW-I
Aim1. Design of function generator using Lab VIEW.
Lab VIEW-II
Aim1. Design of CRO using Lab VIEW
.
Page 139 of 465

Books recommended:
Textbooks:
3. “Computer-Based Industrial Control”, by Krishna Kant, PHI.
4. “Process Control Instrumentation Technology”, by Curtis D Johnson, Pearson Ed.
Reference books:
2. “Sensors and Transducers”, 2/E by D. Patranabis
Gaps in the syllabus (to meet Industry/Profession requirements): Visit CIF lab at BIT
Mesra.

Direct Assessment


Quiz(zes) 10
Viva 20

Performance
Quiz 10
Indirect Assessment
Page 140 of 465

Program
Specific
Outcomes
Outcome
(PSOs)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
CO1 3 3 3 3 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 1
CO2 3 3 3 3 3 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 1
CO3 3 3 3 3 3 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 1
CO4 3 3 3 2 2 1 1 1 1 2 2 1
CO5 3 3 3 3 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 1


CD8
Internets
CD9 Simulation
Page 141 of 465

Course code: EC319

Course title: VLSI Systems
Pre-requisite(s): EC101 Basics of Electronics & Communication Engineering, EC201
Electronic Devices
Co- requisite(s):
Credits: L: 3 T: 0 P: 0 C: 3
Class: B. Tech.
Branch: ECE
Name of Teacher:
Course Objectives
1. Understand the static and dynamic behavior of MOSFET and CMOS inverter.
2. Interpret the interconnect routing issues, interconnection problems and solutions in
integrated circuits and apply the perceived knowledge.
3. Appraise and analyse the characteristics of combinational logic gates in CMOS.
4. Design and Evaluate the characteristics of sequential logic circuits.
5. Create the NMOS/CMOS gain stages for desired gains and analyze their frequency
responses.
Course Outcomes
CO1 Describe and illustrate the static and dynamic behavior of MOSFET and CMOS
inverter.
CO2 Sketch interconnect parasitics. Explain the interconnect routing issues,
interconnection problems and solutions in Integrated Circuit.
CO3 Diagram and explain the combinational logic circuits and illustrate their
characteristics and analyse them.
CO4 Schematize the sequential logic circuits, assess their characteristics and summarize
their features.
CO5 Design the NMOS/CMOS gain stages for desired gains, schematize their frequency
responses and analyze them.
Page 142 of 465

SYLLABUS
(NO. OF
MODULE LECTURE
HOURS)
Module – I
Static and dynamic behavior of MOSFET and CMOS inverter:
The MOS(FET) Transistor: Static Conditions, Dynamic Behavior, Secondary
Effects. Static and Dynamic Behaviour of CMOS Inverter: Switching Threshold,
Noise Margin formulation, Computing the Capacitances, Propagation Delay, 8
Power, Delay, Power-Delay Product, Energy-Delay Product.
Module – II
The Wire and Interconnection:
Interconnect Parameters, Electrical Wire Models, Capacitive Parasitics, Resistive
Parasitics, Inductive Parasitics, Advanced Interconnect Techniques, I/O
structures Design: VDD and VSS pads, output & input pads, tri-state and bi- 8
directional pads, application of Schmitt trigger in I/O pads, MOSIS I/O pads,
Mixed-Voltage I/O pad.
Module – III
Designing Combinational Logic Gates in CMOS:
Static CMOS Design: Complementary CMOS, Ratioed Logic, Pass-Transistor
Logic (PTL), Complementary pass-transistor logic (CPL), Dynamic CMOS 8
Design and issues, Domino logic and issues, np-CMOS, Introduction to the
SPICE, Verilog, SystemVerilog with Design examples of inverter, NAND and
NOR gates.
Module – IV
Designing Sequential Logic Circuits:
Latches and Registers, Dynamic Latches and Registers, Alternative Register
Styles: Pulse Registers, Sense-Amplifier Based Registers; Pipelining: Latch- 8
versus Register-Based Pipelines, NORA-CMOS—A Logic Style for Pipelined
Structures; Nonbistable Sequential Circuits, Design examples of latch, flip-flop
and register using Verilog, SystemVerilog HDL.
Page 143 of 465

Module – V 8
Basic NMOS/CMOS gain stages and their frequency responses:
MOS Amplifier Topologies, Biasing, Realization of Current Sources, CS Core,
CS stage With Resistive Load, Current-Source Load, and Diode-Connected Load,
CS Stage with Source Degeneration, CG Stage with Biasing, Source Follower
with Biasing, Cascode Stage as a Current Source, Cascode Stage as an Amplifier;
general frequency response.
Textbooks:
1. Jan M. Rabaey, A. Chandrakasan, B. Nikolic, “Digital Integrated Circuits: A Design
Perspective”, 2nd ed., Prentice Hall, 2003.
2. Neil H. E. Weste, David Money Harris, “CMOS VLSI Design – A Circuits and Systems
Perspective,” 4th ed., Addison Wesley, 2011.
Perspective,” 3rd ed., Pearson Education, 2006.
Reference books:
2. Behzad Razavi, “Fundamentals of Microelectronics,” Wiley, 2009.
3. Samir Palnitkar, “Verilog HDL: A guide to Digital Design and Synthesis,” SunSoft Press,
1996.
4. Stuart Sutherland, Simon Davidmann, Peter Flake, “SystemVerilog Design - A Guide to Using
SystemVerilog for Hardware Design and Modeling,” 2nd ed., Springer, 2006.

1. Hands-on-practical for CMOS IC (Integrated Circuit) fabrication.

10

1. Memory and RF circuits.

1. N/A
Page 144 of 465

Direct Assessment

First Quiz 10
Second Quiz 10
Indirect Assessment
Program
Specific
Outcomes
Outcome
(PSOs)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
CO1 3 3 2 3 3 1 1 3 3 3 2 1
CO2 3 3 2 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 2 1
CO3 3 3 2 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 2 1
CO4 3 3 2 3 3 2 2 3 3 3 2 1
CO5 3 3 2 3 3 2 2 3 3 3 2 1

CD8
Internets
CD9 Simulation
Page 145 of 465

Course code: EC320

Course title: VLSI Systems Lab
Electronic Devices
Co- requisite(s): EC319 VLSI Systems
Credits: L: 0 T: 0 P: 3 C: 1.5
Class period per week: 03
Class: B. Tech.
Branch: ECE
Name of Teacher:
Course Objectives
1. Understand the structural, behavioural, data-flow models for digital circuits simulation.
2. Apply their understanding to design digital circuits/universal gates and draw layout of
the same.
3. Analyse the MOS device characteristics and its model parameters.
4. Integrate basic blocks to build a bigger module and evaluate the results.
5. Create/develop digital and analog subsystems keeping design goals in consideration.
Course Outcomes
CO1 Translate/express their theoretical knowledge while modelling/designing the basic

digital circuits using HDL and Xilinx ISE and observe and explain the simulation
results.
CO2 Write HDL RTL codes for designing digital circuits, simulate HDL RTL codes, and
observe/examine the results. Interpret the same for the correctness of their
functionality. Sketch layouts of universal gates. Simulate and observe/examine the
results. Interpret the same for the correctness of their functionality. Apply appropriate
bias to the terminals of an nMOSFET/pMOSFET. Simulate and show the output and
transfer curves. Determine various MOSFET parameters.
CO3 Outline a VHDL/Verilog model and write RTL codes for Moore/Mealy machines and
digital circuits. Test for their operation and analyse the results.
CO4 Evaluate a properly biased short-channel nMOSFET and test it for the short-channel
effects.
CO5 Design 2-input NAND gate using SCMOS and pseudo-nMOS logic families and
design a 2-input XOR using symbols of 2-input SCMOS NAND gate to achieve design
goal. Simulate the designs, test and validate the results. Design/develop single-stage
and two-stage CMOS amplifiers. Simulate the design, test and validate the anticipated
gain / frequency response.
Page 146 of 465

SYLLABUS
Therefore, EC319 VLSI Systems is the syllabus for the EC320 VLSI System Lab. Following
experiments are the guidelines for the students. However, the questions for exams are not limited
to this experiment list.
List of compulsory experiments:

1. Outline a model of seven-segment decoder to display HEX digits and translate the same into
VHDL/Verilog/SystemVerilog RTL code. Simulate the design and find errors, if any. Observe
and show the results.
2. Sketch/draw layouts of 2-input CMOS NAND gate and 2-input CMOS NOR gate by the direct
translation of their schematics. Perform DRC (design rule checking) on the dawn layout and
find design rule errors, if any. Simulate and observe/examine the results. Interpret the same for
the correctness of their functionality.
3. Outline a VHDL/Verilog model and write RTL code for a Moore machine with the following
state transition diagram. Simulate/compile the same using the Xilinx development software
(Xilinx ISE 8.1i./10.1i) and find errors, if any. Test for its operation and analyse the results.
4. Outline a VHDL/Verilog model and write RTL code for a Mealy machine with the following
state transition diagram. Simulate/compile the same using the Xilinx development software
(Xilinx ISE 8.1i./10.1i) and find errors, if any. Test for its operation and analyse the results.
Page 147 of 465

5. Write a VHDL/Verilog/SystemVerilog RTL code to develop a tri-stated buffer controlled 4-
channel multiplexer with each channel carrying 4 signals. Simulate/compile the same using the
Xilinx development software (Xilinx ISE 8.1i./10.1i) and find errors, if any. Test and evaluate
the obtained results.
6. Write VHDL/Verilog/SystemVerilog RTL code and develop/design an adder that adds three
8-bit binary number. Simulate using the Xilinx development software (Xilinx ISE 8.1i./10.1i)
and find errors, if any, test and validate its operation.
7. Apply appropriate bias voltages to the terminals of an nMOSFET/pMOSFET. Change the bias
voltage & simulate using Virtuoso Analog Design Environment of Cadence and show the ID-
VD and ID-VG curves. Determine MOSFET parameters: ron, μn, μp, gm, gds, cgb, cgs, cgd, Vtn, and
Vtp.
8. Evaluate a properly biased short-channel nMOSFET and test it for the short-channel effects:
channel length modulation (CLM), drain-induced barrier lowering (DIBL), Vt rolloff using
Virtuoso ADE of Cadence.
9. Design 2-input NAND gate using SCMOS and pseudo-nMOS logic families with given
specifications with the Virtuoso ADE of Cadence and design a 2-input XOR using symbols of
2-input SCMOS NAND gate to achieve propagation delay (tp) not longer than 20 ns and
average power consumption (Pavg) not higher than 10 μW. Simulate the designs, test and
validate your anticipation. Simulate and report the propagation delay (tp) and power
consumption (Pavg) of your XOR gate. Load the input and output of XOR gate with single-
stage NAND to make the input and output realistic.
10. Design a common source (CS) amplifier using an nMOSFET (Q1) with a small-signal gain of at least
3 with respect to ground with the Virtuoso ADE of Cadence. Implement the load current with current
source IDC and pMOSFET current mirror, input device of which is Q3 and output device of which is
Q2. Simulate the design, test and validate the anticipated gain.
11. Design an inverting differential amplifier with a gain of at least 3 with respect to ground using
the Virtuoso ADE of Cadence. Simulate the design, test and validate the anticipated gain.
12. Design an Op Amp based square wave generator with a frequency of at least 1 MHz using the
Virtuoso ADE of Cadence. Simulate the design, test and validate the anticipated frequency
response.
List of optional experiments:

13. Write a VHDL/Verilog/SystemVerilog model and prepare a Linear-Feedback Shift Register
(LFSR). Use the same to develop a Pseudo Random Sequence Generator (PRSG). Simulate
and examine the results. Interpret the same for the correctness of its functionality. CO2
14. Write a VHDL/Verilog/SystemVerilog model and develop a Fibonacci LFSR with
characteristic polynomial of 1 + x + x4. Simulate it with the seed test pattern = 1000 and
prepare a table with the results. Interpret the same for its correctness. CO2
15. Write a VHDL/Verilog/SystemVerilog model and develop an 8-bit barrel shifter. Simulate it
with the seed test pattern = 11000110 and prepare a table and record the results for consecutive
8 clock pulses. Examine the same for its correctness. CO2
16. Draw the layout of an inverter with donut (round transistor) connection on Microwind 2.6a.
Show the advantage of donut connection compared to the layout that is drawn by the direct
translation of its schematic.
Page 148 of 465

17. Draw the layout of 2-input NAND gate that has less drain area connected to the output node
and show how this layout improves gate performance compared to the layout that is drawn by
the direct translation of its schematic.
18. Draw the optimized layout of a 4-input domino AND gate to improve its performance and
show how this layout improves gate performance compared to the layout that is drawn by the
direct translation of its schematic.
19. Draw the layout of 2-input NOR gate that has less drain area connected to the output and show
how this layout improves gate performance compared to the layout that is drawn by the direct
translation of its schematic.
20. Write a VHDL/Verilog/SystemVerilog model and develop a 4:1-bit multiplexer. Simulate and
synthesize the CPLD design using the Xilinx development software (Xilinx ISE 8.1i.) and find
errors, if any. Create the CPLD configuration bitstream file (*.jed), use Spartan-2 CPLD
Trainer Kit and download CPLD design (using the iMPACT programming software and the
JTAG cable) onto it, demonstrate and interpret the results displayed on the kit.CO2
21. Develop a VHDL/Verilog/SystemVerilog model and design a parameterized N-bit parity
generator circuit. The model should provide both an odd parity and an even parity output.
Simulate and compile/synthesize the FPGA design using the Xilinx development software,
create the FPGA configuration bitstream file (*.bit), download FPGA design (using the
iMPACT programming software and the USB cable) onto the prototyping kit (use Spartan-3E
FPGA Starter Kit), test and validate its operation. CO5
22. Write a VHDL/Verilog model and develop a 416 decoder. Simulate the design using the
Xilinx development software (Xilinx ISE 8.1i/10.1i) and find errors, if any. Observe/examine
the results. Interpret the same for the correctness of their functionality.
23. Outline a model of 4-bit ripple carry full adder and translate/express the same into
VHDL/Verilog RTL code. Simulate/compile the same using the Xilinx development software
(Xilinx ISE 8.1i./10.1i) and find errors, if any. Observe and show the results and explain the
same.
24. Outline a VHDL/Verilog model and write RTL code for a synchronous counter` with the
following states. Simulate/compile the same using the Xilinx
Integrated Synthesis Environment (ISE) 8.1i./10.1i) and find errors, if any. Test for its
operation and analyse the results.
Page 149 of 465

Textbooks:
4. Jan M. Rabaey, A. Chandrakasan, B. Nikolic, “Digital Integrated Circuits: A Design
Perspective”, 2nd ed., Prentice Hall, 2003.
Reference books:
5. Behzad Razavi, “Fundamentals of Microelectronics,” Wiley, 2009.
6. Samir Palnitkar, “Verilog HDL: A guide to Digital Design and Synthesis,” SunSoft Press,
1996.


10.

1. Memory and RF circuits.

10
Direct Assessment


Quiz(zes) 10
Viva 20

Performance
Quiz 10
Page 150 of 465

Indirect Assessment
Program
Specific
Outcomes
Outcome
(PSOs)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
CO1 3 3 3 3 3 1 1 1 3 3 3 3 2
CO2 3 3 3 3 3 1 1 1 3 3 3 3 2
CO3 3 3 3 3 3 1 1 1 3 3 3 3 2
CO4 3 3 3 3 3 1 1 1 3 3 3 3 1
CO5 3 3 3 3 3 1 1 1 3 3 3 3 1

CD2 Assignments
CD4 Mini Projects
CD7 Simulation

Page 151 of 465

Course code: EC321

Course title: Microelectronic Devices and Circuits
Electronic Devices
Co- requisite(s):
Credits: L: 3 T: 0 P: 0 C: 3
Class: B. Tech.
Branch: ECE
Name of Teacher:
Course Objectives
6. Understand the Physics of Modern Devices.
7. Grasp the characteristics modern MOS Devices and apply the obtained knowledge.
8. Appraise and analyse the CMOS Performance Factors.

9. Evaluate the characteristics of Current Mirrors, Single- and -two Stage OTA.
10. Comprehend the manufacturing principles of CMOS integrated circuits and

create/develop their structures.
Course Outcomes
CO1 Describe and illustrate the Physics of Modern Devices.

CO2 Sketch and explain the modern MOS Devices.
CO3 Illustrate with the sketch the CMOS Performance Factors, diagram their
CO4 Design and schematize the Current Mirror, Single- and -two Stage OTA; assess
their characteristics and summarize their features.
CO5 Appraise the Manufacturing steps and Layout of CMOS Integrated Circuits and
create/develop/design their structures.
Page 152 of 465

SYLLABUS
(NO. OF
MODULE LECTURE
HOURS)
Module – I 8
Basic Device Physics:
Modern CMOS Transistors: CMOS processes, CMOS process enhancements,
Metal-Silicon Contacts, High-Field Effects: Impact Ionization and Avalanche
Breakdown, Band-to-Band Tunneling, Tunneling into and through Silicon
Dioxide, Injection of Hot Carriers from Silicon into Silicon Dioxide, High-Field
Effects in Gated Diodes, Dielectric Breakdown
Module – II 8
MOS Devices:
Long-Channel MOSFETs, Short-Channel MOSFETs, MOSFET Scaling,
Threshold Voltage: Various Definitions of Threshold Voltage, Channel Profile
Design, Nonuniform Doping, Quantum Effect on Threshold Voltage, Discrete
Dopant Effects on Threshold Voltage. MOSFET Channel Length: Various
Definitions of Channel Length, Extraction of the Effective Channel Length.
Module – III 8
CMOS Performance Factors:
Basic CMOS Circuit Elements, Parasitic Elements, Sensitivity of CMOS Delay
to Device Parameters, Performance Factors of Advanced CMOS Devices:
MOSFETs in RF Circuits, Effect of Transport Parameters on CMOS
Performance, Low-Temperature CMOS.
Module – IV 8
Current Mirrors, Single- and -two Stage OTA:
Current Mirror, MOS Differential Pair: Qualitative Analysis, Large-Signal
Analysis, Small-Signal Analysis; Frequency Response of Differential Pairs;
Design of Current-sink CMOS inverting Amplifier, General Characteristics of the
ideal CMOS OTA, Division of a two-stage uncompensated CMOS OTA into
voltage-to-current and current-to-voltage stages, Functions of different stages,
two-stage CMOS OTA.
Page 153 of 465

Module – V 8
Manufacturing steps and Layout of CMOS Integrated Circuits:
CMOS IC fabrication Steps: Silicon Wafer, Diffusion, ion-implantation,
annealing, etching, patterning or lithography, oxidation, sputtering, deposition,
metallization, planarization; Layout: Design Rules, Stick Diagram, Layouts of
Universal Gates & complex logic gates; Variability and Mismatch; Analog
Layout Considerations: Analog design issues, common-centroid layout,
capacitor & resistor layout and matching.
Textbooks:
1. Neil H. E. Weste and Kamran Eshranghian, “Principles of CMOS VLSI Design: A Systems
Perspective”, 2nd ed., Addition-Wesley, 1993.
2. Y. Taur and T. H. Ning, “Fundamentals of Modern VLSI Devices,” Cambridge University
Press, NY, USA, 2/e, 2009.
3. Behzad Razavi, Fundamentals of Microelectronics, Wiley, 2009.
4. Neil H. E. Weste and David Harris, “CMOS VLSI Design: A Circuits and Systems
Perspective”, 4th International Edition, Pearson Education, Inc., 2011.
Reference books:
1. Tony Chan Carusone, David A. Johns and Kenneth W. Martin, Analogue Integrated Circuit
Design, 2/e, John Wiley & Sons, 2012.
2. Phillip E. Allen & Douglas R. Holberg, CMOS Analog Circuit Design, 3/e, Oxford
University Press, 2012.

1. Hands-on-practical for Device/IC fabrication.

10
1. CNFET
2. TFET
3. MTJ
4. Memristor
5. SET
6. RTD.

10
Page 154 of 465

Direct Assessment

First Quiz 10
Second Quiz 10
Indirect Assessment
Program
Specific
Outcomes
Outcome
(PSOs)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
CO1 3 3 2 3 3 1 1 3 3 3 2 1
CO2 3 3 2 3 3 2 1 3 3 3 2 1
CO3 3 3 2 3 3 2 1 3 3 3 2 1
CO4 3 3 2 3 3 3 1 3 3 3 2 1
CO5 3 3 2 3 3 3 1 3 3 3 2 1

Page 155 of 465

CD8
Internets
CD9 Simulation
Page 156 of 465

Course code: EC323

Course title: Microwave Theory and Techniques
Pre-requisite(s): EC257Electromagnetic Fields and Waves
Co- requisite(s): EC324 Microwave Engineering Lab.
Credits: L: 3 T: 0 P: 0 C: 3
Class: B. Tech.
Semester / Level:V/03
Branch:ECE
Name of Teacher:
Course Objectives
6. To appraise the requirements of Microwave engineering

7. To develop ability to analyse microwave networks.
8. To describe and analyse the operation of Microwave sources and amplifiers.
9. To differentiate, describe, design and analyse the active and passive microwave
components
10. To differentiate, describe, design and analyse reciprocal and nonreciprocal components
Course Outcomes
CO1 To describe the characteristics and applications of microwave engineering

CO2 To define microwave network theories and analyse the various microwave networks.
CO3 To design, characterize and describe microwave sources and amplifiers.
CO4 To differentiate, describe, design and analyse the active and passive microwave
components
CO5 To differentiate, describe, design and analyse reciprocal and nonreciprocal
components
Page 157 of 465

SYLLABUS
(NO. OF
MODULE LECTURE
HOURS)
Module – I 8
Introduction to Microwave and Microwave Network Analysis: Microwave
Frequency bands, Applications of Microwaves, Equivalent Voltages and currents,
Impedance and Admittance Matrices, Scattering Parameters, The Transmission
(ABCD) Matrix.
Module – II 8
Passive Microwave Devices and Components: Basic Properties of Dividers and
Couplers, The T-Junction Power Divider, Wilkinson Power Divider, Waveguide
Directional Couplers, Quadrature (90◦) Hybrid, Coupled Line Directional
Couplers.
Module – III 8
Microwave Tubes: Limitations and Losses of conventional Tubes at Microwave
Frequencies, Klystron, Travelling Wave Tube, Magnetron
Module – IV 8
Microwave Filters: Filter Types and parameters, Realization of Butterworth and
Chebyshev type filter, Filter Implementation.
Module – V 8
Design of Ferromagnetic Components: Intro to Ferromagnetic Material,
Faraday rotation in ferrite, Ferrite Isolators, Ferrite Phase Shifters, Ferrite
Circulators.
Page 158 of 465

Books recommended:
Textbooks:
1. David M. Pozar, "Microwave Engineering", Third Edition, Wiley India.
Reference books:
1. S. Y. Liao , “Microwave Devices & Circuits”, PHI 2nd Edition
2. R. Ludwig and G. Bogdanov, “RF Circuit Design, Theory and Applications”, Pearson, 2nd
Edition.
3. B. R. Vishvakarma, R U Khan, M K. Meshram, “ Intoduction to Microwave Measurements”
4. R.E.Collin, "Foundations for Microwave Engineering", Second edition, IEEE Press.
Gaps in the syllabus (to meet Industry/Profession requirements): Hands on experience on real-
time industrial projects and management
POs met through Gaps in the Syllabus: PO11
Topics beyond syllabus/Advanced topics/Design: EMI-EMC due to electromagnetic radiations
POs met through Topics beyond syllabus/Advanced topics/Design: PO 6, PO 8
Direct Assessment

First Quiz 10
Second Quiz 10
Indirect Assessment
Program
Specific
Outcomes
Outcome
(PSOs)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
CO1 3 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3
Page 159 of 465

CO2 3 3 3 3 3 1 1 1 2 2 1 3
CO3 3 3 3 3 3 1 1 1 2 2 1 3
CO4 3 3 2 3 3 1 1 1 2 2 1 3
CO5 3 3 2 3 3 1 1 1 2 2 1 3
CD Course
Code Outcome
CD1, CD2, CD8
CD1 Lecture by use of Boards/LCD Projectors CO1
CD1, CD2, CD4,CD5, CD8
CD2 Tutorials/Assignments CO2
CD1, CD2, CD4, CD5, CD8
CD3 Seminars CO3
CD1, CD2, CD4, CD5, CD8
CD4 Mini Projects/Projects CO4
CD1, CD2, CD4,CD5, CD8
CD5 Laboratory Experiments/Teaching Aids CO5
Self- learning such as use of NPTEL Materials
CD8
and Internets
CD9 Simulation
Page 160 of 465

Course code: EC324

Course title: Microwave Engineering Lab
Pre-requisite(s): Electromagnetic Fields and Waves
Co- requisite(s):
Credits: L: 0 T: 0 P: 3 C: 1.5
Class: B. Tech.
Course Objectives:
11. To develop an understanding about the measurements of the various microwave
passive components.
12. To develop an understanding about the measurements of the performance
parameters of Microwave Crystal Detector and Gunn Diode.
13. To develop an ability to understand a planar microwave filter.
14. To develop an ability to understand a planar microwave coupler .
15. To develop an ability to understand a microstrip planar power divider
Course Outcomes:
CO1 Demonstrate understanding of the measurements of the various microwave
passive components.
CO2 Demonstrate understanding of the measurements of the performance parameters
of Microwave Crystal Detector and Gunn Diode.
CO3 Design a planar microwave filter.
CO4 Design a planar microwave coupler and power divider
CO5 Design a microstrip planar power divider
Page 161 of 465

Syllabus

1. Name of the Experiment: Rectangular Waveguide
AIM-1: To Determine the Rectangular Waveguide Parameters
2.Name of the Experiment: Waveguide T-Junctions

AIM-1: To Find out the Coupling Coefficients of E-plane and H-plane Tee.
3.Name of the Experiment: Magic Tee

AIM-1: To Find out the Coupling Coefficients and Isolation of Magic Tee
4. Name of the Experiment: Multi Hole Direction Coupler

AIM-1: To Find out the Coupling Factor, Directivity and Insertion Loss of a Multi Hole
Direction Coupler
5. Name of the Experiment: Three Port Circulator
AIM-1: To Find out the Coupling Coefficients and Isolation of a three port Circulator
6. Name of the Experiment: Phase Shifter
AIM 1: To Find out the Isolation of an Isolator and amount of phase shift of a phase shifter
7. Name of the Experiment: Variable Attenuator
AIM 1: To Determine the Attenuation of a Variable Attenuator
8. Name of the Experiment:, Design of rectangular micro strip patch antenna using IE3D
AIM 1: To Examine the square law characteristics of a Microwave Crystal Detector
9. Name of the Experiment: Microstrip Low Pass Filter
AIM 1: Using the IE3D, Design a low pass filter whose input and output are matched to a 50
Ω impedance and that meets the following specifications: cut-off frequency of 3 GHz, equi-
ripple of 0.5 dB, and rejection of at least 25 dB at approximately 1.5 times the cut-off
frequency. Assume a dielectric material that results in a phase velocity of 60 % of the speed of
light.
10. Name of the Experiment:, Branch-line Quadrature Hybrid Junction

AIM 1: Using the IE3D, Design a 50 Ω branch-line quadrature hybrid junction, and plot the
scattering parameter magnitudes from 0.5𝑓0 to 1.5𝑓0 where 𝑓0 is the design frequency.
11. Name of the Experiment:, Microstrip Power Divider

AIM 1: Using the IE3D, Design a 3 dB equal power divider and plot the scattering parameter
magnitudes from 0.5𝑓0 to 1.5𝑓0 where 𝑓0 is the design frequency
Page 162 of 465

1. Name of the Experiment:, X-band Pyramidal Horn Antenna
AIM 1: To Determine the Power gain, Radiation Pattern and 3dB Beamwidth of a X-band
Pyramidal Horn Antenna
2. Name of the Experiment:, KU- band Pyramidal Horn Antenna

AIM 1: To Determine the Power gain, Radiation Pattern and 3dB Beamwidth of a KU-band
Pyramidal Horn Antenna.
3. Name of the Experiment:, Microstrip Antenna

AIM 1: To Determine the Power gain, Radiation Pattern and 3dB Beamwidth of a Microstrip
patch Antenna.
4. Name of the Experiment:, Parabolic Disc Antenna

AIM 1: Measurement of Power gain, Radiation Pattern and 3dB Beamwidth of a Parabolic
Disc Antenna.
5. Name of the Experiment:, Coaxial Line

AIM 1: To Find out the Frequency and line parameters for a coaxial line.
6. Name of the Experiment:, VHF Transmission Line

AIM 1: To Find out the frequency and line Parameters of a two wire VHF transmission line.
Text Book:
1. “David M. Pozar, "Microwave Engineering", Third Edition, Wiley India.
Reference Books:
1. S. Y. Liao , “Microwave Devices & Circuits”, PHI 2nd Edition

2. R. Ludwig and G. Bogdanov, “RF Circuit Design, Theory and Applications”, Pearson, 2nd
Edition.
2. B. R. Vishvakarma, R U Khan, M K. Meshram, “ Intoduction to Microwave Measurements”
3. R.E.Collin, "Foundations for Microwave Engineering", Second edition, IEEE Press.
Page 163 of 465

Direct Assessment

Attendance Marks 12
Lab Viva marks 20
Lab file Marks 12
Lab Quiz-I Marks 10
Program
Specific
Outcomes
Outcome
(PSOs)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
CO1 3 3 1 1 3 1 - - 1 3 1 2 2 2 1
CO2 3 1 1 3 1 - - 1 3 1 2 2 2 1
3
CO3 3 3 3 2 3 1 - - 1 3 1 3 2 2 1
CO4 3 3 3 2 3 1 - - 1 3 1 3 2 2 1
CO5 3 3 3 2 3 1 - - 1 3 1 3 2 2 1
Page 164 of 465

CD Course Delivery
Code Method Used
CD1 Lecture by use of Boards/LCD Projectors CO1 CD1, CD5 ,CD8
CD2 Tutorials/Assignments CO2 CD1, CD5,CD8

CD3 Seminars/ Quiz (s) CO3 CD1, CD5,CD8, CD9

CD9 Simulation
Page 165 of 465

Course code: EC325

Course title: Antenna and Wave Propagation
Pre-requisite(s): Knowledge of Electromagnetic theory, Basic understanding of Network
Theorem
Co- requisite(s): Electromagnetic Theory
Credits: L:3 T :0 P :0 C:3
Class schedule per week: 03/week
Class: B. Tech
Semester / Level: Fifth
Branch: ECE
Name of Teacher:
Course Objectives
1. To impart knowledge on the fundamental antenna parameters .

2. To develop the concept of mechanism of radio wave propagation and applications.
3. To Analyze the concepts associated with operating principles of antenna theory,
antenna performance, operation ,classification and applications.
4. To explain the concept and basic principles associated with the implementation of
antenna arrays.
5. To Apply the Antenna measurement techniques using microwave equipment setup.
Course Outcomes
After the completion of this course, students will be:
CO1 Understand the basic radiation mechanism and antenna parameters.

CO2 Design and characterize the various antenna arrays
CO3 Analyze the wire antennas and aperture antennas.
CO4 Apply the knowledge on the measurements of Antenna parameters.
CO5 Understand the concept of the wave propagation in free space.
Page 166 of 465

SYLLABUS
(NO. OF
MODULE LECTURE
HOURS)
Module – I 10
Antenna Fundamentals:
Radiation mechanism - single wire, two wire, dipole and current distribution on
thin wire, Radiated field components - Hertzian dipole, Half wave Dipole and
Monopole Antenna.
Antenna Parameters: Radiation Pattern, Beam Width, Radiation Power Density,
Directivity and Gain, Bandwidth, Polarization, Input Impedance, Efficiency,
Antenna Effective Length and Area, Antenna Temperature, Reciprocity Principle.
Problem solving .
Module – II 9
Antenna Arrays:
Linear Array - Two element array, N-element linear array- Broadside array, End
fire array- Directivity, Pattern Multiplication, Non-uniform excitation- Binomial
Array, Problem solving
Module – III 8
Special Antennas:
Practical antennas VLF, LF, MF transmitting antennas ,resonant antennas & non
resonant antennas , Wire Antennas- Small Loop Antenna, V-Antenna, Rhombic
antenna, Helical antenna and Yagi-Uda antenna, Frequency Independent Antenna
- Spiral and Log periodic antenna,
Aperture antennas - Horn antenna, Parabolic Reflector antenna, Microstrip
antenna.
Module – IV 7
Antenna Measurements:
Measurement of antenna impedance , Pattern measurements, Measurement of
Antenna Gain, Beam width , Radiation resistance , Antenna efficiency ,
Directivity -Polarization.
Module – V
Propagation of radio waves: 6
Mode of propagation Ground wave propagation, sky wave propagation Space
wave propagation, atmospheric effects, structure of atmosphere General picture
of ionosphere, and its effect on radio waves. skip distance, MUF, ionospheric
propagation, Fading, Problem solving
Page 167 of 465

Text Books:
1. E.C. Jordan & K.G. Balmain, Electromagnetic waves & Radiating Systems, PHI, 2007
2. .D. Kraus, R.J. Marhefka and Ahmad S Khan, Antennas and Wave Propagation, 4th Edition,
Mc Graw Hill, 2010
Reference Book:
1. Antennas and Wave propagation by A.R.Harish, M.Sachidananda, Oxford University press ,Ist
edition 2007,ISBN-13:978-0-19-568666-1,ISBN -10: 0-19-568666-7
1. Application of Simulation software /tools to design antenna for research and industrial
requirements

4,5,9
2. Antenna synthesis and modeling

3. Fabrication of antennas and Testing

1,2,10,12
Direct Assessment

First Quiz 10
Second Quiz 10
Indirect Assessment
Page 168 of 465

Course Program Outcomes(POs) Program

Outcomes Specific
Outcomes
(PSOs)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
CO1 3 3 2 1 2
CO2 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 1 2 2
CO3 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 1
CO4 1 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 2 2
CO5 1 2 1 2 2 3 3
CD Course Delivery Methods Course Course Delivery Method

Code Outcome Used
CD1 Lecture by use of Boards/LCD CO1 CD1, CD2, CD7,CD 8
Projectors
CD2 Tutorials/Assignments CO2 CD2,CD5, CD4
CD3 Seminars CO3 CD2, CD6,CD 8,CD9
CD4 Mini Projects/Projects CO4 CD4,CD5,CD6 ,CD7
CD5 Laboratory CO5 CD1,CD6 ,CD8,

Experiments/Teaching Aids
CD7 Industrial Visits/In-plant

Training
CD8 Self- learning such as use of
NPTEL Materials and Internets
CD9 Simulation
Page 169 of 465

Course Code: EC327

Course Title: Mobile and Cellular Communication
Pre-requisite(s): Knowledge of Communication process, probability theory, basic understanding
of interference and noise in communication process, basic understanding of communication
media.
Co-requisite(s):N/A
Credits: L: 3 T: 0 P: 0 C: 3
Class: B. Tech.
Semester / Level: Fifth/ Third
Name of Teacher:
Course Objectives
1 To understand cellular concept, cellular architecture and evolution of different

generations and standards for mobile cellular communication.
2 To comprehend the impact of interference on the cellular system capacity.
3 To comprehend different channel parameters causing impairments in signal propagation.
4 To understand impairment removal techniques in signal propagation
5 An understanding of multiple access techniques to support mobile cellular
communication
Course Outcomes:
CO1 Explain cellular concept, cellular architecture and evolution of different generations
and standards for mobile cellular communication.
CO2 Analyze the impact of interference on the cellular system capacity.
CO3 Analyze different channel parameters causing impairments in signal propagation
CO4 Evaluate different methods of Channel impairments removal techniques.
CO5 Explain multiple access techniques to support mobile cellular communication
Page 170 of 465

SYLLABUS
(NO. OF
MODULE LECTURE
HOURS)
Module – I
The cellular fundamentals: cellular communication and frequency reuse, 10
general architecture of a cellular system, channel assignment strategies, hand-
off in a cellular system. Evolution of mobile cellular communication:
different generations of mobile cellular communication (1G, 2G. 2.5G, 3G
and beyond), typical cellular standards (AMPS, GSM, GPRS, WCDMA,
LTE, concept of LTE-advanced), 4G features and challenges, 5G vision.
Module – II
Interference and cellular system capacity: co-channel interference and 8
adjacent channel interference, power control, inter-symbol interference,
enhancing cellular system capacity (cell splitting, sectorization, smart antenna
technique, link adaptation and small cell deployment).
.
Module – III
Signal propagation in mobile communication : mobile cellular environment, 8
multipath propagation and fading, free space propagation model, propagation
path loss, outdoor propagation models (Okumura model & Hata model),
indoor propagation models, power delay profile, channel parameters (delay
spread, doppler spread, coherence bandwidth, coherence time, LCR and
ADF).
Module – IV
Diversity & combining techniques: diversity mechanisms (space, time, 7
frequency and polarization), diversity gain and array gain, combining
techniques (SC, MRC, TC and EGC), concept of equalization.
Module – V
Multiple access schemes: duplexing schemes, FDMA, TDMA, SDMA, 7
spread spectrum technique and CDMA, OFDMA, ALOHA and CSMA.
Page 171 of 465

Text Book:
1. Vijay K. Garg, “Wireless Communications and Networks”, Morgan Kaufmann Publishers

an Imprint of Elsevier, USA 2009 (Indian reprint).
Reference Books:
1. Simon Haykin and Michael Moher, “Modern Wireless Communications”, Parson

Education, Delhi, 2005.
2. Theodore S Rappaport, “Wireless Communication: Principles and Practice” Prentice Hall
of India, New Delhi, 2006, 2/e.
3. Sanjay Kumar, “Wireless Communication the Fundamental and Advanced Concepts”
River
Publishers, Denmark, 2015 (Indian reprint).
Gaps in the syllabus (to meet Industry/Profession requirements): Current technological

developments in the field
POs met through Gaps in the Syllabus: PO1 & PO12
Topics beyond syllabus/Advanced topics/Design: Current research findings in the field of

mobile cellular communication.
POs met through Topics beyond syllabus/Advanced topics/Design: PO1 & PO12
Direct Assessment

First Quiz 10
Second Quiz 10
1. Student Feedback on Course Outcome.
Page 172 of 465

Program
Specific
Outcomes
Outcome
(PSOs)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
CO1 3 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 2 3 2 2
CO2 3 3 2 3 2 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 3 2 2
CO3 3 3 2 3 2 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 2 3
CO4 3 3 2 3 3 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 3 2 1
CO5 3 3 2 3 3 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 3 2 1

Lecture by use of boards/LCD CD1,CD2,CD6, CD8
CD1
projectors/OHP projectors CO1
CD3 Seminars CO3 CD1, CD2, CD6, CD8
CD4 Mini projects/Projects CO4 CD1, CD2, CD6, CD8
CD5 Laboratory experiments/teaching aids CO5 CD1,CD2,CD3, CD9
CD8
materials and internets
CD9 Simulation
Page 173 of 465

Course code: EC328

Course title: Mobile & Cellular Communication Lab
Pre-requisite(s): Knowledge of Communication process, probability theory, basic understanding
of interference and noise in communication process, basic understanding of communication
media.
Co- requisite(s):
Credits: L: 0 T: 0 P: 3 C: 1.5
Class: B. Tech.
Semester / Level: Fifth/Third
Course Objectives:
1 To explain GSM modem and the GPRS system, Spread Spectrum and 4G -LTE.
2 To explain the cellular frequency reuse concept, interference and handover
mechanism
3 To understand path loss and in estimation of received signal power
4 To identify Performance parameters related to cellular communication
5 To explain MIMO system
Course Outcomes:
CO1 Experiment for GSM modem ,GPRS system, Spread Spectrum and 4G -LTE
CO2 Demonstrate the working of cellular frequency reuse concept, interference and
handover mechanism
CO3 Design and Develop path loss models through simulation
CO4 To measure Performance parameters related to cellular communication
CO5 Demonstrate MIMO system
Page 174 of 465

Syllabus

1. Name of the Experiment: Understanding GSM Handset Setup
AIM: Study the GSM modem and its different module for phone book access, setting up
a call, sending SMS and identifying call history using AT commands.
2. Name of the Experiment: Understanding Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum Technique
AIM: Study of Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum Modulation and Demodulation process
using Trainer Kit.
3. Name of the Experiment: Understanding 3G Mobile Communication System
AIM: To establish 3G Mobile Communication and observe SIM signal, switch fault and test
various AT command on 3G terminal.
4. Name of the Experiment: Understanding 4G - VoLTE Smart Phone System
AIM: To establish 4G Communication and observe signal at various test points using Trainer
kit.
5. Name of the Experiment: Measurement of received signal power in mobile cellular
communication
AIM: Evaluate the impact of path loss for estimation of received signal power using Virtual
Lab/MATLAB.
6. Name of the Experiment: Measurement of Signal to Interference and Noise Ratio
AIM: To Understand the concept of co-channel interference and evaluate Signal to
Interference and Noise Ratio using Virtual Lab/MATLAB for Fading Channels.
7. Name of the Experiment: Understanding cellular frequency reuse concept

AIM: Finding the co-channel cells for a particular cell and finding the cell clusters within
certain geographic area Virtual Lab/MATLAB.
8. Name of the Experiment: Downlink C/I ratio measurement
AIM: To understand the impact of many different parameters influencing the downlink C/I
ratio like: Cell radius, Transmitter power of B.S, Frequency reuse, Sectoring, Shadowing, Base
station height, Path loss exponent etc using Virtual Lab/MATLAB for Fading Channels.
9. Name of the Experiment: Understanding Handover Mechanism
AIM: To understand the Hard and Soft handover mechanism using Virtual
Lab/MATLAB for Fading Channels.
10. Name of the Experiment: Analysis of wireless communication parameters
AIM: To study the outage probability, LCR & ADF in SISO for Selection Combining and MRC
using Virtual Lab/MATLAB for Fading Channels.
11. Name of the Experiment: Analysis of delay spread for fading channel
AIM: To study the effect of delay spread on frequency selectivity channel using Virtual
Lab/MATLAB.
12. Name of the Experiment: Channel Capacity evaluation for MIMO System
AIM: To obtain and compare the channel capacity for SISO, SIMO, MISO and MIMO
system Using Virtual Lab/MATLAB.
Page 175 of 465

Text Book:
1. Theodore S Rappaport, “Wireless Communication: Principles and Practice” Prentice Hall

Reference Books:

River Publishers, Denmark, 2015 (Indian reprint).
Direct Assessment

Attendance Marks 12
Lab Viva marks 20
Lab file Marks 12
Lab Quiz-I Marks 10
Page 176 of 465

Program
Specific
Outcomes
Outcome
(PSOs)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
CO1 3 3 1 2 3 1 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 1
CO2 3 3 1 2 3 1 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 1
CO3 3 2 1 2 3 1 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 1
CO4 3 3 1 2 3 1 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 1
CO5 3 2 1 2 3 1 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 1



CD9 Simulation
Page 177 of 465

Course Code: EC 329

Course Title: Information Theory and Coding
Pre-requisite(s): Knowledge of digital electronics, probability theory, basic understanding of
communication system.
Co- requisite(s):
Class: B. Tech.
Name of Teacher:
Course Objectives
6. An understanding of the fundamental knowledge of information
7. An understanding of channel capacity to achieve efficient as well as reliable

communication.
8. An understanding of various Source and Channel Coding Techniques
9. Fundamental understanding on block codes, cyclic codes and convolutional codes,

also explore its practical challenges.
10. An ability to design and provide solutions for practical low cost, efficient, reliable
and secure communication system.
Course Outcomes
CO1 Have an ability to measure information from a discrete as well as continuous source
CO2 Have an ability to compute the capacity of discrete and continuous time channels in
presence and absence of noise.
CO3 Have an ability to measure and evaluate entropy for lossy & lossless source coding..
Page 178 of 465

CO4 Have an ability to ensure error free transmission of a discrete/ continuous message
source using suitable channel coding techniques like linear block codes, cyclic codes,
convolution codes and turbo codes.
CO5 Have an ability to provide practical solutions and apply the subject expertise for the
well fare of society
Page 179 of 465

SYLLABUS
(NO. OF
MODULE LECTURE
HOURS)
Module – I 10
Source Coding:
Information measure, Entropy, Differential Entropy, Conditional Entropy, Relative
Entropy, Information rate, Mutual Information, Shannon’s Source Coding Theorem,
Prefix Coding, Huffman Coding, Shannon-Fano Coding, Arithmetic Coding, Lempel-
Ziv Algorithm, Rate Distortion Theory.
Module – II 10
Channel Capacity & Coding:
Channel Coding Theorem, Markov Sources, Discrete Channel with discrete Noise,
BSC, BEC, Capacity of a Gaussian Channel, channel capacity for MIMO system,
Bandwidth-S/N Trade-off.
Module – III
Block Codes:
Galois Fields, Hamming Weight and Hamming Distance, Linear Block Codes, 7
Encoding and decoding of Linear Block-codes, Parity Check Matrix, Bounds for block
codes, Hamming Codes, Syndrome Decoding.
Module – IV
Cyclic Codes:
Introduction to cyclic code, Method for generating Cyclic Codes, Matrix description 7
of Cyclic codes, Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) codes, Circuit implementation of
cyclic codes, Burst error correction, BCH codes.
Module – V
Convolutional Codes:
Introduction to Convolutional Codes, Polynomial description of Convolutional Codes, 7
Generating function, Matrix description of Convolutional Codes, Viterbi Decoding of
Convolutional code, Introduction to Turbo Code, Introduction to Cryptography,
Overview of Encryption Techniques.
Page 180 of 465

Text Books:
1. “Information Theory, Coding & Cryptography”, by Ranjan Bose, TMH, Second Edition.
2. “Communication Systems”, by S. Haykin, 4th Edition, Wiley-Publication.
Reference Books:
1. “Elements of Information Theory” by Thomas M. Cover, J. A. Thomas, Wiley-Inter
science Publication.
2. “Error Correction Coding Mathematical Methods and Algorithms” by Todd K. Moon,
Wiley India Edition.
3. “Cryptography and Network Security”, Fourth Edition, by William stallings
POs met through Topics beyond syllabus/Advanced topics/Design: PO1
Direct Assessment
First Quiz 10
Second Quiz 10
Indirect Assessment
Program
Specific
Outcomes
Outcome
(PSOs)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
CO1 3 1 3 2 1
CO2 3 3 1 3 2 2
CO3 3 3 1 3 2 1
CO4 3 3 1 3 1 1 2 3 2 3
CO5 3 3 1 3 1 1 2 3 2 2
Page 181 of 465


CD8
Internets
CD9 Simulation
Page 182 of 465

Course code: EC331

Course title: Issues in Nanoscale CMOS Design
Pre-requisite(s): EC101Basics of Electronics and Communication Engineering, EC201
Electronic Devices
Co- requisite(s):
Credits: L: 3 T: 0 P: 0 C: 3
Class: B. Tech.
Branch: ECE
Name of Teacher:
Course Objectives
1. Understand trend of technology scaling and its impact on device and circuit
performance.
2. Comprehend pitfalls in CMOS circuit and apply the perceived knowledge.
3. Appraise and analyse the variability and reliability issues.

4. Perceive the sources of variation and evaluate variation prevention techniques.
5. Apprehend the advantages and pitfalls of silicon-on-insulator technology and
create/design SOI device using TCAD tools.
Course Outcomes
CO1 Describe and illustrate the technology scaling and its impact on device and circuit
performance.
CO2 Sketch and explain the pitfalls in CMOS circuits.
CO3 Diagram and explain the variability and reliability issues.
CO4 Summarize and schematize the sources of variation, assess the variation
prevention techniques.
CO5 Design and schematize SOI devices and write issues in SOI technology.
Page 183 of 465

SYLLABUS
(NO. OF
MODULE LECTURE
HOURS)
Module – I 8
Technology Scaling and its impact on device and circuit performance:
Transistor Scaling, Interconnect Scaling, ITRS; Impacts of Technology Scaling
on Design, Physical Limits of Technology Scaling, tunnelling current through
thin oxides, Poor I-V characteristics due to short-channel effects, mobility
degradation and velocity saturation, channel length modulation, substrate current-
induced body effect (SCBE), drain-induced barrier lowering (DIBL).
Module – II 8
Pitfalls in CMOS Circuit:
Threshold drops, Ratio failures, Leakage currents, leakage prevention techniques;
Charge sharing, Power supply noise, Hot spots, Minority carrier injection, Back-
gate coupling, Diffusion input noise sensitivity, Process sensitivity, Domino
Noise Budgets: Charge leakage, Charge sharing, Capacitive coupling, Noise
feedthrough, Process corner effects, Soft errors; Manufacturing Issues.
Module – III 8
Variability and Reliability Issues:
Variability: Process variation, Supply voltage, Operating temperature, Design
Corners; Reliability: Reliability Terminology, Oxide Wearout, Hot Carriers,
Negative bias temperature instability (NBTI), Time-dependent dielectric
breakdown (TDDB); Interconnect Wearout: Electromigration, Self-Heating, Soft
Errors, Overvoltage Failure, Latchup and its prevention technique.
Module – IV 8
Sources of Variation and Variation Prevention Techniques:
Channel Length Variation, linewidth variation, line edge roughness, proximity
effect, orientation Effect, topography effect, Threshold voltage variation, random
dopant fluctuations (RDF), Oxide Thickness variation, Layout Effects, across-
chip mobility variation; Impact of variation on Device and Circuit Performance,
Variation in Delay, Variation in Power, Variation in Energy, Malfunctioning
Device and Circuits, Matched Delays, Variation-Tolerant Design.
Page 184 of 465

Module – V 8
Issues in SOI Technology: Types of Silicon-on-Insulator Devices, Partially-
depleted Silicon-on-Insulator device, Fully-depleted Silicon-on-Insulator device,
pitfalls of Partially-depleted Silicon-on-Insulator device: history effect, pass-gate
leakage, Self-heating, implications for circuit styles in Partially-depleted Silicon-
on-Insulator devices, advantages of Silicon-on-Insulator CMOS process.
Textbooks:
1. Neil H. E. Weste and David Harris, “CMOS VLSI Design: A Circuits and Systems
Perspective”, 4th International Edition, Pearson Education, Inc., 2011.
2. Y. Taur and T.H. Ning. Fundamentals of Modern VLSI Devices. Cambridge University
Press, NY, USA, 2/e, 2016.
Reference books:
1. J. M. Rabaey, A. Chandrakasan, B. Nikolic, “Digital Integrated Circuits: A Design
Perspective,” 2nd ed., Pearson Education, 2016.
2. Alice Wang, Benton H. Calhoun, A. P. Chandrakasan “Sub-threshold Design for Ultra Low-
Power Systems”, Springer, 2006, ISBN-13: 978-0387335155.


10

N/A

10
Direct Assessment

First Quiz 10
Second Quiz 10
Indirect Assessment
Page 185 of 465

Program
Specific
Outcomes
Outcome
(PSOs)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
CO1 3 3 2 3 3 1 1 3 3 3 2 1
CO2 3 3 2 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 2 1
CO3 3 3 2 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 2 1
CO4 3 3 2 3 3 2 2 3 3 3 2 1
CO5 3 3 2 3 3 2 2 3 3 3 2 1

CD8
Internets
CD9 Simulation
Page 186 of 465

Course Code: EC333

Course title: Sensors and Transducers
Pre-requisite(s):
Co- requisite(s):
Course type: Elective
Class: B.E
Branch: ECE
Name of Teacher:
Course Objectives
11. To describe the operation of various sensors and their application
12. To select an appropriate sensor for a given application
13. Design a smart sensor using conventional sensors and microcontroller
14. Compare analog and digital transducer.
15. To discuss the latest technology in sensor development
Course Outcomes
CO1 Understand the principle of operation of different sensors and their applications
CO2 Classify sensors on different basis
CO3 Differentiate between smart sensor and conventional sensor
CO4 Demonstrate the operation of various digital transducer
CO5 Be updated on the recent trends in sensor technologies.
Page 187 of 465

SYLLABUS
(NO. OF
MODULE LECTURE
HOURS)
Module – I 6
Introduction
Introduction about sensors and transducers, Principles of operation and their
classification, characteristics of sensors, Errors in measurement.
Module – II 10
Resistive and Inductive Transducer
Resistive transducers: Potentiometers, metal and semiconductor strain gauges and
signal conditioning circuits, strain gauge applications: load and torque
measurement, RTD, Thermistor, LDR,
Self and mutual inductive transducers, LVDT, RVDT, eddy currents transducer
.
Module – III 10
Capacitive and Piezoelectric transducer
The parallel plate capacitive sensor, variable permittivity capacitive sensor,
stretched diaphragm variable capacitive transducer, piezoelectric transducers and
their signal conditioning, photoelectric transducers, Hall Effect sensors.
Module – IV 8
Smart Sensor
Principle, design approach, interface design, configuration supports,
communication in smart transducer network. HART protocol.
Module – V 6
Recent trends in sensor technology
Digital transducer, Principles and applications of Fibre optic sensor, MEMS
sensor, Bio sensor, Silicon sensor, sensors for robotics.
Page 188 of 465

Text Books:
1. Sensors and Transducers, by D. Patranabis. 2nd Edition
2. Elctrical & Electronics Measurements and Instrumentation by A.K Sawhney, Dhanpat Rai
& Sons.
3. Transducers and Instrumentation, by Murthy D. V. S., Prentice Hall, 2nd Edition, 2011.
Reference Books:
1. Sensor and signal conditioning by John G. Webster, Wiley Inter Science,2nd edition, 2008
POs met through Gaps in the Syllabus: PO8 will be met though report-writing/presentation-
based assignment
Topics beyond syllabus/Advanced topics/Design: Teaching through paper/ latest standards

in data communication
POs met through Topics beyond syllabus/Advanced topics/Design: Teaching through paper
Direct Assessment

First Quiz 10
Second Quiz 10
Indirect Assessment
Page 189 of 465

Program
Specific
Outcomes
Outcome
(PSOs)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
CO1 3 2 3 3 3 1 2 3 3 3 3 2 2 1
CO2 2 3 3 3 3 1 2 3 3 3 2 2 2 1
CO3 2 3 3 3 3 1 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 1
CO4 2 2 3 3 1 3 1 2 3 3 3 2 2 2 1
CO5 2 3 3 2 1 3 1 2 3 3 3 2 2 2 1

CD1 Lecture by use of Boards/LCD Projectors CO1 CD1, and CD 8
CD2 Tutorials/Assignments CO2 CD1, and CD 8
CD3 Seminars CO3 CD1, and CD 8
CD4 Mini Projects/Projects CO4 CD1, and CD 8
CD5 Laboratory Experiments/Teaching Aids CO5 CD1, and CD 8
CD8
Internets
CD9 Simulation
Page 190 of 465

Course code: EC335

Course title: Consumer Electronics
Pre-requisite(s): EC101 Basics of Electronics and Communication Engineering,
Co- requisite(s):
Credits: L:3 T:0 P:0
Class schedule per week: 0x
Class: B. E.
Semester / Level:0X
Branch:
Name of Teacher:
Course Objectives
1. To describe the operating principles of different types of microphones and audio systems
2. To explain the process of composite video signal transmission and reception.
3. To familiarize with various devices related to telecommunication system.
4. To Demonstrate the working of household electronics equipment with sketches of block
diagram
5. To illustrate the working principles of various consumer electronic devices.
Course Outcomes
CO1 Demonstrate technical specification of Audio systems and its operation.
CO2 Identify and explain working of various colour analog and digital TV
CO3 Able to understand different telecommunication technology.
CO4 Able to understand the working of different household appliances.
CO5 Explain the basic functions of various consumer electronic goods and trouble shoots
consumer electronics products
Page 191 of 465

SYLLABUS
(NO. OF
MODULE LECTURE
HOURS)
Module – I 7
Introduction to audio recorders and players
Microphones, types of microphones, Magnetic Tape recorder, Audio compact
disc system, High fidelity Audio system, Stereo sound system, Loudspeaker,
Public address system, Magnetic sound recording.
Module – II 10
Introduction to Radio and TV Transmission & Reception
FM and AM radio transmission and reception, Block diagram of TV transmitter,
Television studios and Equipment, Antenna for TV transmitter, Block diagram of
TV receiver, TV camera tube, Persistence of vision, Scanning, Synchronization,
CCTR-B System, Composite video signal, Bandwidth of TV signal, Audio signal
modulation, TV channel, Television Rx antenna, Feeder cable, Balun T/F,
Monochrome picture tube, Black & white TV Rx, Colour TV signal, Colour TV
Rx, PAL, NTSC, SECAM signal, compatibility, CCTV, Cable TV, Dish TV,
HDTV, 3D TV
Module – III 10
Introduction to Telecommunication Systems:
Basics of Telephone system, Caller ID Telephone, Intercoms, Cordless
Telephones, Cellular mobile systems, 2G, 3G and 4G technolog.
Module – IV 7
Introduction to Home Electronics:
Cord less Door Bell, Inverter, Digital Camera system, Microwave ovens,
Washing Machines, Air Conditioners and Refrigerators.
Module – V 6
Digital watch, Calculators, An electronic guessing game, Cordless Telephone,
Mobile telephone, Cellular telephone, Battery telephone, Battery Eliminator,
Battery charger, DC supply, DC supply operational amplifier, IC regulator, UPS,
Inverter, Decorative Lighting, Microwave oven, LCD tunes with alarm.
Page 192 of 465

Text books:
1. S.P. Bali, Consumer Electronics, Pearson Education,
2. R.R.Gulati, “Monochrome and Color Television”, New Age International Publisher
3. B.R. Gupta and V. Singhal, “Consumer Electronics”, S.K. Kataria & Sons,
Direct Assessment

First Quiz 10
Second Quiz 10
Indirect Assessment
Program
Specific
Outcomes
Outcome
(PSOs)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
CO1 3 3 2 3 2 1 2 3 2 1
CO2 3 3 2 3 1 1 2 3 2 1
CO3 3 3 2 2 1 1 2 3 2 1
CO4 3 3 2 3 2 1 2 3 2 1
CO5 3 3 2 3 2 1 2 3 2 1
Page 193 of 465


CD1 Lecture by use of Boards/LCD Projectors CO1 CD1 and CD 8
CD2 Tutorials/Assignments CO2 CD1 and CD 8
CD3 Seminars CO3 CD1 and CD 8
CD4 Mini Projects/Projects CO4 CD1 and CD 8
CD5 Laboratory Experiments/Teaching Aids CO5 CD1 and CD 8
CD8
Internets
CD9 Simulation
Page 194 of 465

Course code: EC351
Course title: Fiber Optic Communication
Pre-requisite(s): Knowledge of Semiconductor Devices, Electromagnetic Theory
Credits: L: 3 T: 0 P: 0 C: 3
Class: B. Tech
Branch: ECE
Name of Teacher:
Course Objectives
1. To demonstrate the different generations, elements required to establish the fiber
optic link, the losses and the dispersion effects in fiber optic communication.
2. To identify the types of couplers, optical sources for fiber optic communication
system.
3. To identify the types of photodiode, optical receivers in fiber optic communication

system and understand system performance through the link power budget and
dispersion limitations of digital fiber optic link.
4. To understand WDM, optical amplifiers, optical switching in fiber optic networks.
5. To understand different network topologies and nonlinear effects in fiber optic

communication.
Course Outcomes
CO1 Identify the elements required to establish the fiber optic link and determine the
losses and the dispersion effects in fiber optic communication.
CO2 Choose the appropriate couplers, optical sources for fiber optic communication
system.
CO3 Select the types of photodiodes/optical receivers in fiber optic communication
system and assess the system performance through the link power budget and
dispersion limitations of digital fiber optic link.
CO4 Implement the WDM, optical amplifiers, optical switching for fiber optic networks.
CO5 Analyze the different network topologies and nonlinear effects in fiber optic
communication.
Page 195 of 465

Syllabus
(NO. OF
MODULE LECTURE
HOURS)
Module – I
Generations of optical communication, Basic elements of an optical fiber 10

transmission link, Fiber types and fiber parameters, Fiber material and fabrication
methods, Ray and modal analysis in Step index(SI) and Graded index(GI) fibers,
Modes in SI&GI fibers , Power flow in step index fibers, Attenuation mechanisms
in optical fibers, Dispersion effects in optical fibers.
Module – II
Structure and materials of LED and LD sources, Operating characteristics and 10

modulation capabilities of the LED and LD sources, Source to Fiber Power
launching and coupling, Lensing scheme for coupling improvement, Fiber to fiber
coupling and alignment methods, Splicing techniques, Fiber Connectors.
Module – III
Principle of PIN photodiode and Avalanche photodiode, Noise in photodetectors, 7

Detector response time, Photodiode materials, Optical receiver configuration and
performance, Pre-amplifier design for optical receiver, analog and digital receiver.
Optical link design - BER calculation, quantum limit, power penalties, Point to point
transmission links, Link power and rise time budget.
Module – IV
WDM and DWDM operational principles, Optical couplers, Fiber Bragg grating, 8
AWG router/multiplexer, Add/Drop Multiplexer, Optical amplifiers, Amplification
mechanism of semiconductor optical amplifier(SOA) and Erbium doped fiber
amplifier (EDFA), EDFA architecture, Optical switches, Wavelength converters.
Module – V
SONET/ SDH architecture, SONET/ SDH Rings, All optical WDM networks, 5
Single hop and multihop networks, Nonlinear effects on network performance, SRS,
SBS, Self-phase modulation(SPM), Soliton pulses, Soliton based communication.
Page 196 of 465

Text books:
1. “Optical Fiber Communications” G.Keiser, 3/e, McGraw Hill
2. “Optical Fiber Communication”,J. M. Senior, PHI,2nd Ed.
3. “Optical Networking and WDM”, Walter Goralski, Tata McGraw-Hill
Ref. Books:
1. “Introduction to Fiber Optics”, Ghatak &Thyagarajan, Cambridge University press.
2. “Optical Communications”, J.H.Franz &V.K.Jain Narosa Publishing House.
3. “Fiber Optics Communication”, Harold Kolimbiris, Pearson Education.
4. “Fundamentals of Fiber optics in telecommunication and sensor systems”, B.P.Pal,
New age International (P) Ltd.
5. “Optical Communication Networks”, B.Mukherjee McGraw Hill.

CD2 Assignments
CD7 Simulation
Direct Assessment
Mid Sem Examination Marks 25
End Sem Examination Marks 60
Assignment / Quiz (s) 15
Page 197 of 465

Indirect Assessment
Program
Specific
Outcomes
Outcome
(PSOs)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
CO1 3 3 2 2 3 1 2 1 2 3 1 3 2 2
CO2 3 3 2 2 3 1 2 1 2 3 2 3 2 2
CO3 3 3 2 3 3 1 2 1 2 3 2 3 2 2
CO4 3 3 2 3 3 2 3 2 2 2 3 2 3 2 3
CO5 3 3 2 3 3 2 3 2 2 2 3 2 3 2 3

Page 198 of 465

Course code: EC353

Course title: Pulse, Digital and Switching System
Pre-requisite(s): Basic Electronic Engineering, Analog Circuits
Credits: L: 3 T: 0 P: 0 C: 3.0
Class: B. Tech
Branch: ECE
Name of Teacher:
Course Objectives
1. To understand RC filter circuits, attenuators, RL, RLC circuits, ringing, clipper and
clampers
2. To understand Non-Linear Wave Shaping
3. To realize various Multivibrators using transistors, op-amp and other discrete

components
4. To understand negative resistance devices and circuits
5. To understand time base generator circuits or sweep circuits
Course Outcomes
CO1 Understand the concept of linear wave shaping circuits
CO2 Understand the concept of non-linear wave shaping circuits
CO3 Demonstrate the Bistable, Monostable and Astable Multivibrators using discrete
components
CO4 Evaluate the Negative Resistance circuits
CO5 Schematize voltage and current sweep circuits
Page 199 of 465

Syllabus
(NO. OF
MODULE LECTURE
HOURS)
Module – I
10
Linear Wave Shaping: Introduction, Wave Shaping Circuits: High pass and low
pass circuits, Response to sine, step, pulse, square, exponential and ramp inputs
with different time constants, High pass as a differentiator, Low pass as an
Integrator, Attenuators- response to step input, compensated attenuator, RL and
RLC circuits and their response for step input, Ringing circuit.
Module – II
10
Non-Linear Wave Shaping: Diode clippers, Transistor clippers, Clipping at two
independent levels, Comparators, Applications of Voltage comparators.
Clamping Operation, Clamping circuit taking Source and Diode resistances into
account, Clamping Circuit Theorem, Practical Clamping Circuits, Effect of Diode
Characteristics on Clamping Voltage, Synchronized Clamping.
Module – III
7
Switching Circuits and Multivibrators: Switching Circuits: Astable,
Monostable and Bistable Multivibrators (both collector and emitter coupled),
Schmitt trigger circuit, Symmetric and Asymmetric triggering for bistable,
Schmitt trigger circuit. Multivibrators using op-amp and IC 555 timer.
Module – IV
Negative Resistance Switching Circuits: Negative resistance devices: Tunnel 7
diode, UJT; Negative Resistance Switching Circuits: Voltage controlled and
Current controlled negative resistance circuits, Negative–Resistance
Characteristics, Monostable, Bistable, and Astable operations, Applications using
Tunnel diode and UJT.
Module – V
Sweep circuits: General features of a Time base Signal, Methods of Generating 6
Time Base Waveform, Miller and Bootstrap Time base Generators-Basic
Principles, Transistor Miller Time Base generator, Transistor Bootstrap Time
Base Generator, Transistor Current Time Base Generators, Methods of Linearity
improvement.
Page 200 of 465

Text books:
1. “Pulse, Digital and Switching Waveforms”, Millman and Taub, Tata McGraw-Hill
2. “Wave Generation and Shaping”, L. Strauss, TMH.
3. “Solid State Pulse Circuits”, David A. Bell, Prentice Hall India.

CD2 Assignments
CD7 Simulation

Direct Assessment
Mid semester examination 25
Two quizzes 20 (2×10)
Page 201 of 465

Indirect Assessment

CD2 Assignments
CD4 Mini Projects
CD7 Simulation
Outcomes
Program
Specific
Outcomes
Outcome
(PSOs)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
CO1 3 3 2 3 3 1 1 3 3 3 3 3
CO2 3 3 2 3 3 2 1 3 3 3 3 3
CO3 3 3 2 3 3 2 1 3 3 3 3 3
CO4 3 3 2 3 3 3 1 3 3 3 3 3
CO5 3 3 2 3 3 3 1 3 3 3 3 3

Page 202 of 465

Course code: EC354

Course title: Pulse, Digital and Switching System Lab
Pre-requisite(s): Basic Electronic Engineering, Analog Circuits
Co- requisite(s): Pulse, Digital and Switching System
Credits: L: 0 T: 0 P: 3 C: 1.5
Class: B. Tech.
Semester / Level: V
Branch: ECE
Name of Teacher:
Course Objectives
1. Know the response of RC high pass and low pass filter circuits
2. Realize the diode clipper and clamper circuits
3. Understand the operation of multrivibrator circuits
4. Know the response of negative resistance device and design the sweep circuits
5. Understand the sweep circuits
Course Outcomes
CO1 Analyse the RC high pass and low pass filter circuits
CO2 Design and analyse the diode clipper and clamper circuits
CO3 Characterize and design the multrivibrator circuits
CO4 Characterize the negative resistance device and design the sweep circuits
CO5 Design of sweep circuits
Page 203 of 465

Syllabus
Experim Name of the Experiments

ent No.
1 Design of a low pass RC circuit for a given cutoff frequency and obtain its frequency
response and observe the response for square waveform for T<<RC, T=RC and
T>>RC.
AIM1: Obtain the frequency response of a low pass RC circuit with sine wave input.
AIM2: Plot the output for square wave input under T<<RC, T=RC and T>>RC.
2 Design of a high pass RC circuit for a given cutoff frequency and obtain its frequency
response and observe the response for square waveform for T<<RC, T=RC and
T>>RC.
AIM1: Obtain the frequency response of a high pass RC circuit with sine wave input.
AIM2: Plot the output for square wave input under T<<RC, T=RC and T>>RC.
3 Determination of the resonance frequency in a series RLC circuit and plotting of its
waveforms.
AIM1: Obtain the frequency response of a series RLC circuit.
AIM2: Determine the resonance frequency in a series RLC circuit and compare this
to the expected resonance value.
4 Construction of Diode Clipper circuits and plotting of its waveforms.
AIM1: Design the Shunt Positive Clipper, Shunt Negative Clipper & Negative Bias
series Clipper circuits and plot input-output waveforms.
AIM2: Design the Positive bias series Clipper and Double ended shunt clipper and
plot input-output waveforms.
5 Construction of Diode Clamper circuits and plotting of waveforms.
AIM1: Design the Positive Clamper & Negative Clamper circuits and plot input-
output waveforms.
AIM2: Design the Positive Bias Clamper & Negative Bias Clamper circuits and plot
input-output waveforms.
6 Design of Schmitt trigger circuit using transistor and generation of square wave from
a given sine wave.
Page 204 of 465

AIM1: Design Schmitt Trigger circuit using BJT and plot waveforms.
AIM2: Find the UTP, LTP and Hystersis of the Schmitt Trigger circuit.
7 Construction of astable multivibrator using transistor and to plotting of the output

waveform.
AIM1: Observe the waveforms of Astable Multivibrator at base and collector of the
transistors.
AIM2: Verify different states and find the frequency.

8 Construction of monostable multivibrator using transistor and plotting of the output
waveform.
AIM1: Observe the waveforms of Monostable Multivibrator at base and collector of

the transistors.
AIM2: Find the width of pulse.

9 Construction of bistable multivibrator using transistor and plotting of the output
waveform.
AIM1: Observe the waveforms of Bistable Multivibrator at base and collector of the
transistors.
AIM2: Verify different states.

10 Design of Miller Sweep circuit and plotting of the output waveform.
AIM: Design of Miller Sweep circuit and plotting of the output waveform.
11 Design of Boot Strap Sweep circuit and plotting of the output waveform.
AIM: Design of Boot Strap Sweep circuit and plotting of the output waveform.
12 Construction of UJT Relaxation Oscillator and plotting of its waveforms.
AIM: Design of UJT relaxation Oscillator with a given frequency and to observe
waveforms.
Page 205 of 465

Text books:
1. “Pulse, Digital and Switching Waveforms”, Millman and Taub, Tata McGraw-Hill
2. “Wave Generation and Shaping”, L. Strauss, TMH.
Topics beyond syllabus/Advanced topics/Design: through experiments involving

design/modelling of device/circuits on advanced topics
POs met through Topics beyond syllabus/Advanced topics/Design: through experiments

involving design/modelling of device/circuits on advanced topics

CD2 Assignments
CD7 Simulation

CD2 Assignments
CD7 Simulation
Page 206 of 465

Direct Assessment


Quiz(zes) 10
Viva 20

Performance
Quiz 10
Indirect Assessment
Outcomes
Program
Specific
Outcomes
Outcome
(PSOs)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
CO1 3 3 2 3 3 1 1 3 3 3 3 3
CO2 3 3 2 3 3 2 1 3 3 3 3 3
CO3 3 3 2 3 3 2 1 3 3 3 3 3
CO4 3 3 2 3 3 3 1 3 3 3 3 3
CO5 3 3 2 3 3 3 1 3 3 3 3 3

CO1 CD3, CD7
CO2 CD3, CD7
CO3 CD3, CD7
CO4 CD3, CD7
CO5 CD3, CD7
Page 207 of 465

Course Code: EC 355

Course Title: Time Frequency and Wavelet Transform
Pre-requisite(s): Signals and Systems, Signal Processing Techniques, Probability and Random
Processes
Co- requisite(s):
Class: B. Tech.
Name of Teacher:
Course Objectives
1 Understand the mathematical basis of the wavelet transform and its performance in the
analysis of non-stationary signals.
2 Understand the concepts and properties of Continuous Wavelet Transform, Multi-
Resolution Analysis, Discrete Wavelet Transform and Wavelet Packets.
3 Learn to implement Discrete Wavelet transform using Filter banks and Fast Lifting
Scheme.
4 Learn the time domain and frequency domain approaches for the construction of
wavelets.
5 Implement Discrete Wavelet Transform and Wavelet Packet Transform for various
applications like
Course Outcomes
CO1 Demonstrate understanding on the wavelet transform and its performance in the analysis
of non-stationary signals.
CO2 Describe the concept and properties of Continuous Wavelet Transform, Multi-Resolution
Analysis, Discrete Wavelet Transform and Wavelet Packets.
CO3 Demonstrate understanding on Discrete Wavelet transform using Filter banks and Fast
Lifting Scheme. And time domain and frequency domain approaches for the construction
of wavelets.
CO4 Analyse the impact of Discrete Wavelet Transform and Wavelet Packet Transform for
various applications like Signal compression, de-noising, detection of anomalies in ECG,
EEG etc.
CO5 Apply the time frequency wavelet transform to extract the feature from real time signals
Page 208 of 465

SYLLABUS
(NO. OF
MODULE LECTURE
HOURS)
Module – I 8
Why wavelet transform? Stationary and Non-stationary Signal, Limitations of
standard Fourier analysis, Introduction to time frequency analysis, Windowed
Fourier transforms (STFT), Signal representation with continuous and discrete
STFT, concept of time-frequency resolution, Resolution problem associated with
STFT, Heisenberg's Uncertainty principle and time frequency tiling, Stock-well
transform, Wigner-Ville transform, Cohen’s Class distribution.
Module – II 9
Continuous time wavelet transforms, Wavelet function and its properties, energy
spectrum of wavelet, Nyquist Filters, Half band filters, Introduction, M-channel
Filter banks, QMF banks, Perfect reconstruction systems, Alias free filter banks,
Paraunitary perfect reconstruction Filter banks, Linear phase perfect
reconstruction QMF banks.
Module – III 9
Discrete wavelet transforms, Filter bank analysis of DWT, tiling of the time-
frequency plane, dyadic grid sampling, Scaling function, Fast wavelet algorithm,
compactly supported wavelets, Cascade algorithm, Franklin and spline wavelets.
Module – IV 8
Wave Packet Analysis, Hilbert space frames. Frame representation.
Representation of signals by frames. Iterative reconstruction. Frame algorithm.
Construction of wavelets. Multiresolution analysis, Introduction to frames and
biorthogonal wavelets.
Module – V 6
Signal Analysis and synthesis, two-dimensional wavelet systems, Application of
wavelet theory to signal denoising, image and video compression, multi-tone
digital communication, transient detection.
Page 209 of 465

Text Books:
1. Y.T. Chan, Wavelet Basics, Kluwer Publishers, Boston, 1993.

2. I. Daubechies, Ten Lectures on Wavelets, Society for Industrial and Applied
Mathematics, Philadelphia, PA, 1992.
3. C. K. Chui, An Introduction to Wavelets, Academic Press Inc., New York, 1992.
4. A.N. Akansu and R.A. Haddad, Multiresolution signal Decomposition: Transforms,
Subbands and Wavelets, Academic Press, Oranld, Florida, 1992.
Reference Book:
1. Gerald Kaiser, A Friendly Guide to Wavelets, Birkhauser, New York, 1995.
2. P. P. Vaidyanathan, Multirate Systems and Filter Banks, Prentice Hall, New Jersey, 1993.
3. B.Boashash, Time-Frequency signal analysis, In S.Haykin, (editor), Advanced Spectral
Analysis, pages 418--517. Prentice Hall, New Jersey, 1991.
Time frequency and wavelet transform is an advance course; hence it only lays down
the foundation of pattern recognition and classification problem.

Application of Time frequency and wavelet transform in the analysis of time varying signal.
Extraction of Pattern vector from time varying signal for the development of decision support
system for various applications.

Direct Assessment

First Quiz 10
Second Quiz 10
Page 210 of 465

Indirect Assessment
Program
Specific
Outcomes
Outcome
(PSOs)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
CO1 2 2 3 3 2 3 1 2 3 3 3 3
CO2 2 2 3 3 2 3 1 2 3 3 3 3
CO3 2 2 3 3 2 3 1 3 3 3 3 3
CO4 2 2 3 3 2 3 1 2 3 3 3 3
CO5 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

CD1, CD2, CD5,
CD1
CD1, CD2, CD5,
CD2
CD1, CD2, CD3,
CD3 CD4, CD5, CD8,
Seminars CO3 CD9.
CD1, CD2, CD3,
CD4 CD4, CD5, CD8,
CD4, CD5, CD7,
CD5
CD8
Internets
CD9 Simulation
Page 211 of 465

Course Code: EC 356

Course Title: Time Frequency and Wavelet Transform Lab.
Pre-requisite(s): MATLAB
Co- requisite(s):
Class: B. Tech.
Name of Teacher:
Course Objectives
1 Write MATLAB code to understand the non-stationary signal.

2 To understand behavior of real time signal in time-frequency plane.
3 Illustrate the failure of FFT when time is important point find the happening of any
event in the signal.
4 Elaborate the concept of STFT and wavelet transform to overcome the discrepancy
of FFT.
5 Develop programming skills to find the engineering solution to minimize the effect
of noise over observed signal.
Course Outcomes
CO1 Model the observed sensor data using MATLAB.
CO2 Represent the signal in time-frequency plane to retrieve unique information using
MATLAB.
CO3 De-noise the simulated data as well as observed data to get the desired information
using time-frequency analysis tools.
CO4 Apply the concept of time frequency analysis to explain real life data to retrieve
unique information present in the data.
CO5 Visualize and solve practical pattern recognition problems.
Page 212 of 465

SYLLABUS
Syllabus
Therefore, TIME FREQUENCY WAVELET TRANSFORM is the syllabus for the TIME
FREQUENCY WAVELET TRANSFORM LAB. Following experiments are the guidelines for
the students. However, the questions for exams are not limited to this experiment list.
1. To generate a sine wave with a linear change in frequency. Evaluate the time-frequency
characteristic using the STFT. Sine wave should vary between 10 Hz and 200 Hz over a
sec period. Assume a sample rate of 500 Hz.
2. Use Stockwell Transform to analyze any simulated signal or recorded signal in time
frequency plane using S-Transform.
characteristic using the Wigner-Ville Distribution. Sine wave should vary between 10 Hz
and 200 Hz over a sec period. Assume a sample rate of 500 Hz.
characteristic using the Cohen class Distribution. Sine wave should vary between 10 and
200 Hz over a sec period. Assume a sample rate of 500 Hz.
5. Generate 2 sinusoids that change frequency in a step-like manner. Apply the Continuous
Wavelet Transform and plot results using the different wavelets.
6. Plot of Wavelet boundaries for various values of scale parameter ‘a’. Determine the time
and scale range of various popular Wavelet function.
7. Construct a waveform of 4 sinusoids plus noise. Decompose the waveform in 4 levels, plot
each level, and then reconstruct the signal.
8. Application of DWT to nonlinear filtering (Signal De-noising using Threshold). Construct

a waveform of 4 sinusoids plus noise. Decompose the waveform into levels, plot each level,
and then reconstruct. Evaluate the two highest resolution high pass sub-bands and zero out
those samples below some threshold value.
9. Discontinuity detection. Construct a waveform of 2 sinusoids with a discontinuity in the

second derivative. Decompose the waveform into 3 levels to detect the discontinuity.
Page 213 of 465

10. "Balance Tree Decomposition (Wavelet Packet)". Construct a waveform of 4 sinusoids
plus noise. Decompose the waveform in 3 levels, plot outputs at the terminal level.
11. Balance Tree Decomposition applied to 2 EEG signals file ecg1.mat contains two 60 sec
segments of ECG data in variables ecg1 and ecg2 (fs = 250 Hz). Decompose each segment
using a 3-level balanced tree composition. Take as features the RMS value of each
decomposed sub-band. Find two features (RMS values) that best differentiate between the
two signals and plot the features from each segment on a 2D plot. Use a Daubechies 4 or 6
-element filter. Compare the output.
12. Apply DWT for image compression and evaluate its compression ratio.
Text Books:
1. Y.T. Chan, Wavelet Basics, Kluwer Publishers, Boston, 1993.
2. I. Daubechies, Ten Lectures on Wavelets, Society for Industrial and Applied
Mathematics, Philadelphia, PA, 1992.
3. C. K. Chui, An Introduction to Wavelets, Academic Press Inc., New York, 1992.
4. A.N. Akansu and R.A. Haddad, Multiresolution signal Decomposition: Transforms,
Subbands and Wavelets, Academic Press, Oranld, Florida, 1992.
Reference Book:
1. Gerald Kaiser, A Friendly Guide to Wavelets, Birkhauser, New York, 1995.
2. P. P. Vaidyanathan, Multirate Systems and Filter Banks, Prentice Hall, New Jersey, 1993.
3. B.Boashash, Time-Frequency signal analysis, In S.Haykin, (editor), Advanced Spectral
Analysis, pages 418--517. Prentice Hall, New Jersey, 1991.

NA

NA


Page 214 of 465

Direct Assessment

Attendance Marks 12
Lab file Marks 12
Viva Marks 24
Lab quiz Marks 20
Indirect Assessment
Program
Specific
Outcomes
Outcome
(PSOs)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
CO1 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 1 2 3 2 3
CO2 2 3 3 2 1 1 1 1 2 3 2 3
CO3 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 2 3 3 3
CO4 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 2 3 3 3
CO5 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2
Page 215 of 465


CD1, CD2, CD5,
CD1
CD1, CD2, CD5,
CD2
CD1, CD2, CD3,
CD3 CD4, CD5, CD8,
Seminars CO3 CD9.
CD1, CD2, CD3,
CD4 CD4, CD5, CD8,
CD4, CD5, CD7,
CD5
CD8
Internets
CD9 Simulation
Page 216 of 465

Course Code: EC357

Course Title: Adaptive Signal Processing
Pre-requisite(s): Digital Signal Processing
Co- requisite(s): Probability and Random Processes
Class: B. Tech.
Name of Teacher:
Course Objectives
1 To understand speech production and human auditory model. To analyse structures

of speech codecs and classification of speech coding techniques
2 To understand different speech signal processing techniques
3 To understand basics of scalar and vector quantization
4 To understand basic of LPC and its variants for various applications
5 To understand different coding techniques and speech coding standards
Course Outcomes
CO1 Understand the basics of production and auditory models and apply speech codecs for
speech coding techniques
CO2 Apply various signal processing techniques to speech signal for its enhancement
CO3 Analyse the quality and properties of speech signal
CO4 Modify and enhance the speech and audio signals using coding techniques
CO5 Design and evaluate the performance of an application based speech recognition
system.
Page 217 of 465

SYLLABUS
(NO. OF
MODULE LECTURE
HOURS)
Module – I 8
Introduction- Speech production and modelling - Human Auditory System;
General structure of speech coders; Classification of speech coding techniques –
parametric, waveform and hybrid; Requirements of speech codecs –quality,
coding delays, robustness.
Module – II 8
Speech Signal Processing- Pitch-period estimation, all-pole and all-zero filters,
convolution; Power spectral density, periodogram, autoregressive model,
autocorrelation estimation.
Module – III 8
Speech Quantization- Scalar quantization–uniform quantizer, optimum quantizer,
logarithmic quantizer, adaptive quantizer, differential quantizers; Vector
quantization – distortion measures, codebook design, codebook types.
Module – IV 8
Linear Prediction of Speech- Basic concepts of linear prediction; Linear
Prediction Analysis of non-stationary signals –prediction gain, examples;
Levinson-Durbin algorithm; Long term and short-term linear prediction models;
Moving average prediction, Scalar Quantization of LPC- Spectral distortion
measures, Quantization based on reflection coefficient and log area ratio, bit
allocation; Line spectral frequency – LPC to LSF conversions, quantization based
on LSF, Linear Prediction Coding- LPC model of speech production; Structures
of LPC encoders and decoders; Voicing detection; Limitations of the LPC model.
Module – V 8
Code Excited Linear Prediction-CELP speech production model; Analysis-
by-synthesis; Generic CELP encoders and decoders; Excitation codebook
search – state-save method, zero-input zero-state method; CELP based on
adaptive codebook, Adaptive Codebook search; Low Delay CELP and
algebraic CELP, Speech Coding Standards-An overview of ITU-T G.726,
G.728 and G.729standards.
Page 218 of 465

Text Books:
1. L.R. Rabiner, B. H. Juang and B. Yegnanarayana, “Fundamentals of Speech Recognition”,
Pearson, Education 2011
2. A. M. Kondoz, “Digital Speech”, Second Edition (Wiley Students Edition), 2004.
3. W. C. Chu, “Speech Coding Algorithms: Foundation and Evolution of Standardized Coders”,
Wiley Inter science, 2003.
Reference Books: NA

25. Applications of speech signal processing techniques through hardware platform.

NA

Teaching through Research paper

2
Direct Assessment

First Quiz 10
Second Quiz 10
Indirect Assessment
Page 219 of 465

Program
Specific
Outcomes
Outcome
(PSOs)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
CO1 3 3 2 2 2 1 1 2 3 3 1 2 2
CO2 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 3 3 1 2 3
CO3 3 3 3 3 3 1 2 2 3 3 3 2 3 3
CO4 3 3 2 3 3 2 2 1 2 3 3 3 2 2 3
CO5 3 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 3 3 3

CD8
Internets
CD9 Simulation
Page 220 of 465

Course code: EC359

Course title: Microcontrollers and Interfacing
Pre-requisite(s): Microprocessors Applications
Co- requisite(s):
Credits: L: 3 T: 1 P:
Class schedule per week: 3x
Class: B. Tech
Semester / Level: VI/3
Branch: ECE
Name of Teacher:
Course Objectives
1. Explain the concept of microcontrollers and embedded system architecture.

2. Develop assembly language programming skill in the student for 8051
microcontroller.
3. Explain the interrupt and serial I/O features of 8051 microcontroller
4. To outline the importance of different peripheral devices & their interfacing to
8051.
5. Introduce embedded microcontrollers and their programming
Course Outcomes
CO1 Demonstrate the knowledge about microcontrollers and embedded systems

architecture.
CO2 Write 8051 based assembly language program for given problem.
CO3 Will be able to interface 8051 with peripheral devices.
CO4 Will be able to communicate 8051 with peripheral devices using serial and parallel
I/O and design and implement microcontroller based system for given application
CO5 Schematize the microcontroller based real time systems.
Page 221 of 465

SYLLABUS
(NO. OF
MODULE LECTURE
HOURS)
Module – I
Introduction to Microcontrollers, Microprocessors vs Microcontrollers, History 10
and Applications of Microcontrollers, 8051 Architecture, Introduction, Features,
Pin details, Internal Memory organization, General purpose RAM, Bit
addressable RAM, Register banks, Special function Registers.
Module – II
8051 Addressing Modes, Boolean Processor, External Memory Addressing, 10
Interrupt Structure and priorities, 8051 Instruction types like Data movement,
Logic, Arithmetic, Control transfer and Program Control Instructions,
Instruction Set in detail. 8051 Programming examples like Arithmetic and Logic
operation, Branching, Looping, Stock Operations, Subroutines, Parameter
passing, A few Industrial examples, Software and Hardware Development tools,
Environments, Assembly Language, Interpreters, Debugging hints.
Module – III
8051 Interrupts and Timers/counters: Basics of interrupts, 8051 interrupt 7
structure, Timers and Counters, 8051 timers/counters, programming 8051 timers
in assembly and C. 8051 Serial Communication, connections to RS-232, Serial
communication Programming in assembly and C.
Module – IV
Basics of I/O concepts, I/O Port Operation, Interfacing 8051 to LCD, Keyboard, 8
I/O devices interfacing with 8051 using 8255A, parallel and serial ADC, DAC,
Stepper motor interfacing and DC motor interfacing and programming.
Module – V
Introduction to Embedded Microcontrollers, 68 HC11 and 68 HC12 5
Microcontrollers, Software and Hardware development, I/O Resources, CPU12
Programming model, Basic Assembly Programming techniques, Introduction to
Real time I/O and Multitasking.
Text books:
1. Mohamed Ali Mazidi, Janice Gillispie Mazidi, “The 8051 microcontroller and
embedded systems”, Pearson education, 2004
2. “Programming and Customising the 8051 Microcontroller”, by Myke Predko
Page 222 of 465

Reference books:
1. “Advanced Microprocessor and Microcontrollers”, by S.K. Venkata Ram.
Gaps in the syllabus (to meet Industry/Professional requirements)

Direct Assessment

First Quiz 10
Second Quiz 10
Indirect Assessment
Program
Specific
Outcomes
Outcome
(PSOs)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
CO1 3 3 3 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 2 2 1
CO2 3 3 2 3 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 1
CO3 3 3 2 3 3 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 1
CO4 3 3 3 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 2 2 1
CO5 3 3 2 3 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 1
Page 223 of 465


CD1 Lecture by use of Boards/LCD Projectors CO1 CD1,CD5,CD 8
CD2 Tutorials/Assignments CO2 CD1,CD5,CD 8
CD3 Seminars CO3 CD1,CD5,CD 8
CD4 Mini Projects/Projects CO4 CD1,CD5,CD 8
CD5 Laboratory Experiments/Teaching Aids CO5 CD1,CD5,CD 8
CD8
Internets
CD9 Simulation
Page 224 of 465

Course code: EC360
Course title: Microcontroller Lab
Pre-requisite(s):
Co- requisite(s):
Class: B. Tech.
Branch: ECE
Name of Teacher:
Course Objectives
1 To introduce the basics of microcontroller and its applications

2 To develop the assembly language programming skills in the student for
microcontrollers
3 To expertise working with Keil compiler and embedded C programming
4 To give practical training for interfacing I/O devices with 8051
5 To discuss the real time applications of microprocessor and microcontrollers
Course Outcomes

CO1 Demonstrate the working of microcontroller and its programming
CO2 Write 8081 based assembly language program.
CO3 Interface the I/O devices with and 8051
CO4 Design circuits for various real time applications with microcontrollers
CO5 Able to work with Keil compiler and embedded C programming
Page 225 of 465

Syllabus
Therefore, EC359 Microcontrollers and Interfacing is the syllabus for the EC360 Microcontroller
Lab. Following experiments are the guidelines for the students. However, the questions for exams
are not limited to this experiment list.

8051 PROGRAMMING
1. DATA TRANSFER OERATIONS (BLOCK MOVE/ SORTING)

2. ARITHMETIC OPERATIONS (ADD, SUB, DIV)
3. BOOLEAN ARITHMETIC AND LOGICAL OPERATION (SET, RESET, MOVE)
4. CODE CONVERSION (ASCII TO HEX, HEX TO ASCII, BINARY TO BCD)
5. DELAY SUBROUTINES USING DIFFERENT REGISTER BANKS
6. TIMERS OPERATION IN DIFFERENT MODES
7. COUNTER OPERATIONS
8. SERIAL I/O PROGRAMMING AT DIFFERENT BAUD RATE
9. INTERRUPT SERVICE ROUTINES
INTERFACING
1. LCD PANNEL AND HEX KEYBOARD INTERFACE

2. ADC INTERFACING FOR INPUTTING SENSOR DATA
3. DAC INTERFACING FOR WAVEFORM GENERATION
4. STEPPER MOTOR CONTROL
5. DC MOTOR CONTROL
Text Book:
1. Mohamed Ali Mazidi, Janice Gillispie Mazidi, “The 8051 microcontroller and
embedded systems”, Pearson education, 2004
Reference Book:
Topics beyond syllabus/Advanced topics/Design:N/A
Page 226 of 465

Direct Assessment

Continuous Internal Assessment (60)
Attendance Marks 10
Lab file Marks 06
Lab quiz Marks 08
Lab Viva marks 12
Indirect Assessment

Direct Assessment

Attendance Marks 10
Lab file Marks 06
Lab quiz Marks 08
Lab Viva marks 12
Page 227 of 465

Program
Specific
Outcomes
Outcome
(PSOs)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
CO1 3 3 2 3 3 1 1 2 2 2 2 1
CO2 3 3 2 3 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 1
CO3 3 3 2 3 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 1
CO4 3 3 2 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 1
CO5 3 3 2 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 1

CD Course Delivery methods Course Outcome Course
Delivery
Method
CD1 Lecture by use of boards/LCD projectors/OHP projectors CO1 CD5, CD9
CD2 Tutorials/Assignments/Quiz (s) CO2 CD5, CD9
CD4 Mini projects/Projects CO4 CD5, CD9
CD5 Laboratory experiments/teaching aids CO5 CD5, CD9
CD8 internets
CD9 Simulation
Page 228 of 465

Course code: EC361

Course title: Digital Systems Design with FPGAs
Electronic Devices
Co- requisite(s):
Credits: L: 3 T: 0 P: 0 C: 3
Class: B. Tech.
Branch: ECE
Name of Teacher:
Course Objectives
1. Understand Implementation strategies for digital ICs.
2. Interpret timing Issues in digital circuits and apply the perceived knowledge.
3. Appraise and analyse the arithmetic building blocks.
4. Design and Evaluate the characteristics of memory and array structures.
5. Validate and test manufactured circuits.
Course Outcomes
CO1 Describe and illustrate with diagram the Implementation strategies for digital ICs.
CO2 Sketch and explain timing Issues in digital circuits.
CO3 Diagram and explain the arithmetic building blocks, illustrate their characteristics
and analyse them.
CO4 Design and schematize the memory cell and array structures, assess their
characteristics and summarize their features.
CO5 Schematize and write the principles of manufactured circuit test techniques.
Integrate the techniques with circuit to be tested, validate and test the circuit.
Page 229 of 465

SYLLABUS
(NO. OF
MODULE LECTURE
HOURS)
Module – I
Implementation strategies for digital ICs: From Custom to Semicustom and 8
Structured Array Design Approaches, Custom Circuit Design, Cell-Based Design
Methodology, Array-Based Implementation Approaches: Pre-diffused (or Mask-
Programmable) Arrays, Pre-wired Arrays: The write-once or fuse-based FPGA,
The non-volatile FPGA, The volatile or RAM-Based FPGA, Implementation
Platforms of the Future.
Module – II
Timing Issues in digital circuits:Timing Classification of Digital Systems, 8
Synchronous Design: Synchronous Timing Basics, Sources of Skew and Jitter,
Clock-Distribution Techniques; Self-Timed Circuit Design: Self-Timed Adder
Circuit, Completion-Signal Generation with an example of DCVSL, Self-Timed
Signaling with an example of Muller C-element, Practical Examples of Self-
Timed Logic such as Self-resetting 3-input OR; Synchronizers and Arbiters:
Static Timing Analysis (STA), Design examples of clock and test bench using
Verilog/SystemVerilog HDL.
Module – III
Designing arithmetic building blocks: Full Adder Circuit Design 8
Considerations, Multiplier Design Considerations; Power and Speed Trade-
off’s in Datapath Structures: Design Time Power-Reduction Techniques, Run-
Time Power Management, Reducing the Power in Standby (or Sleep) Mode,
Design examples of Datapath using Verilog/ SystemVerilog HDL.
Module – IV
Designing memory and array structures: Memory classification, Memory 8
Architectures and Building Blocks; The Memory Core: Read-Only Memories,
Flash Memory, Static Random Access Memory (SRAM), Memory Peripheral
Circuitry: The Address Decoders, Sense Amplifiers, Voltage References,
Drivers/Buffers.
Module – V
Validation and test of manufactured circuits: Boundary-Scan Design, Built-in 8
Self-Test (BIST), Test-Pattern Generation, Fault Models: Stuck-At Faults, Short-
Circuit and Open-Circuit Faults, Fault Coverage, Delay Fault Testing, Automatic
Test-Pattern Generation (ATPG), FPGA-assisted testing.
Page 230 of 465

Textbooks:
1. J. Rabaey, A. Chandrakasan, B. Nikolic, “Digital Integrated Circuits: A Design Perspective”,
2nd Edition, Prentice Hall, 2003.
2. Neil H. E. Weste and David Money Harris, CMOS VLSI Design – A Circuits and Systems
Perspective, Addison Wesley, 4/e, 2011.
Reference books:
1. Samir Palnitkar, Verilog HDL: A guide to Digital Design and Synthesis, SunSoft Press, 1996.
2. Stuart Sutherland, Simon Davidmann, Peter Flake, SystemVerilog Design - A Guide to Using
SystemVerilog for Hardware Design and Modeling, 2/e, Springer, 2006.


10

1. Analog and RF circuits.

10
Direct Assessment

First Quiz 10
Second Quiz 10
Indirect Assessment
Page 231 of 465

Program
Specific
Outcomes
Outcome
(PSOs)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
CO1 3 3 2 3 3 1 1 1 1 3 2 1
CO2 3 3 2 3 3 3 1 1 1 3 2 1
CO3 3 3 2 3 3 2 2 1 2 3 2 1
CO4 3 3 2 3 3 2 1 1 2 3 2 1
CO5 3 3 2 3 3 3 1 1 2 3 2 1

CD8
Internets
CD9 Simulation
Page 232 of 465

Course code: EC362

Course title: Digital Systems Design with FPGAs Lab
Electronic Devices
Co- requisite(s): EC361 Digital Systems Design with FPGAs
Credits: L: 0 T: 0 P: 3 C: 1.5
Class: B. Tech.
Branch: ECE
Name of Teacher:
Course Objectives
Course Objectives
A. Understand the modelling styles of HDLs such as VHDL, Verilog and

SystemVerilog for designing/developing digital circuits.
B. Apply their understanding to design/develop given digital circuits using various

modelling styles of VHDL/Verilog/SystemVerilog.
C. Analyse and explain the outputs displayed on the prototyping board.

D. Appraise the simulated/compiled/synthesized/downloaded CPLD/FPGA designs
and evaluate the results.
E. Develop CPLD/FPGA designs and create necessary configuration bitstream files and
download them on the prototyping kit.
Course Outcomes
CO1 Outline models of digital circuits and translate the same into
VHDL/Verilog/SystemVerilog program. Simulate, compile, synthesize, and
download CPLD designs onto the prototyping kit and demonstrate/show the results
displayed on the kit and explain the same.
CO2 Write VHDL/Verilog/SystemVerilog model and develop given digital circuits.
Simulate and synthesize the CPLD design. Use Spartan-2 CPLD Trainer Kit and
download the design onto it. Demonstrate and interpret the results displayed on the
kit.
Page 233 of 465

CO3 Outline VHDL/Verilog/SystemVerilog model and given design digital circuits.
Simulate and compile/synthesize the CPLD design, download the same onto the
prototyping kit (Spartan-2 CPLD Trainer Kit). Test and analyse the outputs displayed
on the kit
CO4 Write VHDL/Verilog/SystemVerilog model of given digital circuit. Simulate and
compile/synthesize the FPGA design and find errors, if any. Create the FPGA
configuration bitstream file, download the same onto the prototyping kit (Spartan-3E
FPGA Starter Kit) and test its operation and evaluate outputs displayed on the kit.
CO5 Develop VHDL/Verilog/SystemVerilog model and design given digital circuits.
Simulate and compile/synthesize the FPGA design, create the FPGA configuration
bitstream file, download the same onto the prototyping kit (Spartan-3E FPGA Starter
Kit), test and validate its operation.
Page 234 of 465

SYLLABUS
Therefore, EC361 Digital Systems Design with FPGAs is the syllabus for the EC362 Digital
Systems Design with FPGAs Lab. Following experiments are the guidelines for the students.
However, the questions for exams are not limited to this experiment list.

5. Outline a model of clock generator and test bench for simulating a digital circuit and translate
the same into VHDL/Verilog/SystemVerilog RTL codes. Simulate and synthesize the CPLD
design using the Xilinx development software (Xilinx ISE 8.1i.) and find errors, if any. Create
the CPLD configuration bitstream file (*.jed), use Spartan-2 CPLD Trainer Kit and
download CPLD design (using the iMPACT programming software and the JTAG cable) onto
it, demonstrate/show the results displayed on the kit and explain the same.
6. Write VHDL/Verilog/SystemVerilog RTL codes and develop a sign-magnitude adder.
Simulate and synthesize the CPLD design using the Xilinx development software (Xilinx ISE
8.1i.) and find errors, if any. Create the CPLD configuration bitstream file (*.jed), use
Spartan-2 CPLD Trainer Kit and download CPLD design (using the iMPACT programming
software and the JTAG cable) onto it. Observe/examine the results for their correctness.
7. Outline a switch-level Verilog/SystemVerilog model and write RTL codes for the circuit
shown below. Experiment with the prototyping kit (Spartan-3E FPGA Starter Kit), test and
analyse its operation.
8. Outline a VHDL/Verilog/SystemVerilog model and design a stopwatch. Simulate and

compile/synthesize the FPGA design using the Xilinx development software (Xilinx ISE
14.1i.) and find errors, if any. Create the FPGA configuration bitstream file (*.bit), download
FPGA design (using the iMPACT programming software and the USB cable) onto the
prototyping kit (use Spartan-3E FPGA Starter Kit), test and evaluate its operation.
9. Develop a VHDL/Verilog/SystemVerilog model and design a digital multiplier. Simulate and
compile/synthesize the FPGA design using the Xilinx development software, create the FPGA
configuration bitstream file (*.bit), download FPGA design (using the iMPACT programming
software and the USB cable) onto the prototyping kit (use Spartan-3E FPGA Starter Kit),
test and validate its operation.
10. Develop a VHDL/Verilog/SystemVerilog model and design a traffic signal controller.
Simulate and compile/synthesize the FPGA design using the Xilinx development software,
create the FPGA configuration bitstream file (*.bit), download FPGA design (using the
Page 235 of 465

iMPACT programming software and the USB cable) onto the prototyping kit (use Spartan-
3E FPGA Starter Kit), test and validate its operation.
11. Design 2-input XOR gate using complex gate and use the same to design a 1-bit full adder
within the given specification to achieve propagation delay (tp) of OUTPUT CARRY no longer
than 100 ns and average power consumption (Pavg) not higher than 100 μW. Simulate the
designs, test and validate your anticipation using Cadence EDA tool. Load the input and output
of the designed full adder with inverters to obtain realistic input and output. Simulate and report
the propagation delay (tp) and power consumption (Pavg) of your design.
12. Develop a 4-bit full adder utilizing the previously designed 1-bit full adder within the given
specification to achieve propagation delay (tp) of the FINAL CARRY no longer than 1 μs and
average power consumption (Pavg) not higher than 1 mW. Simulate the designs using Cadence
EDA tool, test and validate your anticipation. Load the input and output of the designed full
adder with 1-bit full adder to obtain realistic input and output. Simulate and report the
propagation delay (tp) and power consumption (Pavg) of your design.
13. Design a positive-edge-triggered D flip-flop with setup time and hold time no longer than 10
ns and 15 ns respectively. Simulate using Cadence EDA tool and find errors, if any. Test its
functionality, tabulate the obtained results for setup time and hold time and compare the same
with the given specifications.
14. Develop a 4-bit register based on the previously designed positive-edge-triggered D flip-flop.
Simulate using Cadence EDA tool and find errors, if any. Test its functionality.
15. Design a JK flip-flop with setup time and hold time no longer than 20 ns and 25 ns respectively.
Simulate using Cadence EDA tool and find errors, if any. Test its functionality, tabulate the
obtained results for setup time and hold time and compare the same with the given
specifications.
16. Develop a 4-bit presettable counter based on the previously designed a JK flip-flop. Simulate
using Cadence EDA tool and find errors, if any. Test its functionality.
List of optional experiments:

17. Develop a VHDL/Verilog/SystemVerilog model and design a floating-point adder. Simulate
and compile/synthesize the FPGA design using the Xilinx development software, create the
FPGA configuration bitstream file (*.bit), download FPGA design (using the iMPACT
programming software and the USB cable) onto the prototyping kit (use Spartan-3E FPGA
Starter Kit), test and validate its operation.
18. Develop a VHDL/Verilog/SystemVerilog model and design a FIFO buffer. Simulate and
19. Develop a VHDL/Verilog/SystemVerilog model and design a divider. Simulate and
Page 236 of 465

20. Develop a VHDL/Verilog/SystemVerilog model and design a BINARY-TO-BCD conversion
circuit. Simulate and compile/synthesize the FPGA design using the Xilinx development
software, create the FPGA configuration bitstream file (*.bit), download FPGA design (using
the iMPACT programming software and the USB cable) onto the prototyping kit (use Spartan-
3E FPGA Starter Kit), test and validate its operation.
21. Write a VHDL/Verilog/SystemVerilog model and develop a 1:4-bit demultiplexer. Simulate
and synthesize the CPLD design using the Xilinx development software (Xilinx ISE 8.1i.) and
find errors, if any. Create the CPLD configuration bitstream file (*.jed), use Spartan-2 CPLD
Trainer Kit and download CPLD design (using the iMPACT programming software and the
JTAG cable) onto it, demonstrate and interpret the results displayed on the kit.
22. Write a VHDL/Verilog/SystemVerilog model and develop a 4-bit magnitude comparator.
Simulate and synthesize the CPLD design using the Xilinx development software (Xilinx ISE
8.1i.) and find errors, if any. Create the CPLD configuration bitstream file (*.jed), use
Spartan-2 CPLD Trainer Kit and download CPLD design (using the iMPACT programming
software and the JTAG cable) onto it, demonstrate and interpret the results displayed on the
kit.
23. Outline a VHDL/Verilog/SystemVerilog model and design a seven-segment display decoder.
Simulate and compile/synthesize the CPLD design using the Xilinx development software
(Xilinx ISE 8.1i.) and find errors, if any. Create the CPLD configuration bitstream file (*.jed),
download CPLD design (using the iMPACT programming software and the JTAG cable) onto
the prototyping kit (use Spartan-2 CPLD Trainer Kit), test and analyse the outputs displayed
on the kit.
24. Develop a VHDL/Verilog/SystemVerilog model and design a simple processor that performs
basic operations such as ADD, SUM, MUL and DIV using 8-bit operands. Simulate and
25. Outline a VHDL/Verilog/SystemVerilog model and design a 16:4-bit encoder. Synthesize the
circuit, download the configuration bitstream file onto the prototyping kit (use Spartan-2
CPLD Trainer Kit) and verify its operation. Simulate and compile/synthesize the CPLD
design using the Xilinx development software (Xilinx ISE 8.1i.) and find errors, if any. Create
the CPLD configuration bitstream file (*.jed), download CPLD design (using the iMPACT
programming software and the JTAG cable) onto the prototyping kit (use Spartan-2 CPLD
Trainer Kit), test and analyse outputs displayed on the kit.
26. Outline a VHDL/Verilog/SystemVerilog model and design a modulo-N binary up-counter with
synchronous Clear control signal. Simulate and compile/synthesize the CPLD design using the
Xilinx development software (Xilinx ISE 8.1i.) and find errors, if any. Create the CPLD
configuration bitstream file (*.jed), download CPLD design (using the iMPACT programming
software and the JTAG cable) onto the prototyping kit (use Spartan-2 CPLD Trainer Kit),
test and analyse outputs displayed on the kit.
Page 237 of 465

27. Write a VHDL/Verilog/SystemVerilog model of 2-by-2 register. Simulate and
compile/synthesize the FPGA design using the Xilinx development software (Xilinx ISE
14.1i.) and find errors, if any. Create the FPGA configuration bitstream file (*.bit), download
FPGA design (using the iMPACT programming software and the USB cable) onto the
prototyping kit (use Spartan-3E FPGA Starter Kit) and test its operation and evaluate output
displayed on the kit.
28. Write an 8x8 RAM VHDL/Verilog/SystemVerilog model. Simulate and compile/synthesize
the FPGA design using the Xilinx development software (Xilinx ISE 14.1i.) and find errors,
if any. Create the FPGA configuration bitstream file (*.bit), download FPGA design (using the
iMPACT programming software and the USB cable) onto the prototyping kit (use Spartan-
3E FPGA Starter Kit) and test its operation and evaluate output displayed on the kit.
Textbooks:
1. J. Rabaey, A. Chandrakasan, B. Nikolic, “Digital Integrated Circuits: A Design Perspective”,
2nd ed., Prentice Hall, 2003.
Reference books:
1. Samir Palnitkar, “Verilog HDL: A guide to Digital Design and Synthesis,” SunSoft Press, 1996.

1. Hands-on-practical for CMOS digital IC (Integrated Circuit) fabrication.

10

1. Mixed-signal circuit design.

10
Page 238 of 465

Direct Assessment


Quiz(zes) 10
Viva 20

Performance
Quiz 10
Indirect Assessment

CD2 Assignments
CD4 Mini Projects
CD7 Simulation

Program
Specific
Outcomes
Outcome
(PSOs)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
CO1 3 3 3 3 3 1 1 1 3 3 3 3 1
CO2 3 3 3 3 3 1 1 1 3 3 3 3 2
CO3 3 3 3 3 3 1 1 1 3 3 3 3 2
CO4 3 3 3 3 3 1 1 1 3 3 3 3 2
CO5 3 3 3 3 3 1 1 1 3 3 3 3 1
Page 239 of 465


Page 240 of 465

Course code: EC363
Course title: Nanoelectronics
Pre-requisite(s): EC101 Basics of Electronics and Communication Engineering, EC201
Electronic Devices
Co- requisite(s):
Credits: L: 3 T: 0 P: 0 C: 3
Class: B. Tech.
Branch: ECE
Name of Teacher:
Course Objectives
1 Understand the theory of Classical Particles, Classical Waves, Quantum Particles,

Quantum Mechanics of Electrons, Free and Confined electrons.
2 Interpret the various aspects of Electrons Subject to a Periodic Potential – Band
Theory of Solids and apply the perceived knowledge.
3 Appraise and analyse the characteristics of the theory of Coulomb Blockade and
the Single-Electron Transistor.
4 Perceive models of Semiconductor Quantum Wells, Quantum Wires and Quantum
Dots and evaluate their characteristics.
5 Apprehend Nanowires, Ballistic Transport and Spin Transport models and
develop/integrate them for their applications.
Course Outcomes
CO1 Describe and illustrate the theory of Classical Particles, Classical Waves, Quantum
Particles, Quantum Mechanics of Electrons, Free and Confined electrons.
CO2 Sketch and explain various aspects of Electrons Subject to a Periodic Potential – Band
Theory of Solids.
CO3 Illustrate with the sketch of theory of Coulomb Blockade and the Single-Electron
Transistor, diagram their characteristics and analyse them.
CO4 Appraise the models of Semiconductor Quantum Wells, Quantum Wires and Quantum
Dots, schematize their characteristics, assess and summarize their features.
CO5 Schematize the structure of Nanowires, and and design Field Effect Transistors that
have carrier with Ballistic Transport and Spin Transport. Schematize their
Page 241 of 465

SYLLABUS
(NO. OF
MODULE LECTURE
HOURS)
Module – I
Classical Particles, Classical Waves, Quantum Particles, Quantum Mechanics of 8
Electrons, Free and Confined electrons:
Introduction to nanoelectronics, Origins of Quantum Mechanics, Light as Wave,
Light as a Particle, Electrons as Particles, Electrons as Waves, Wave packets and
Uncertainty, General Postulates of Quantum Mechanics, Time-Independent
Schrodinger’s Equation, Free Electrons, Free Electron Gas theory of Metals,
Electrons Confined to a Bounded Region of Space and Quantum Numbers,
Quantum Dots, Wires and Wells.
Module – II
Electrons Subject to a Periodic Potential – Band Theory of Solids: 8
Crystalline Materials, Electrons in a Periodic Potential, Kronig-Penney Model of
Band Structure, Band theory of Solids, Graphene and Carbon Nanotubes,
Tunneling Through a potential Barrier, Potential Energy Profiles for Material
Interfaces, Applications of Tunnelling.
Module – III
Coulomb Blockade and the Single-Electron Transistor: 8
Coulomb Blockade, The Single-Electron Transistor, Single Electron Transistor
logic; Other SET and FET Structures: Carbon Nanotube Transistors (FETs and
SETs), Semiconductor Nanowire FETs and SETs, Molecular SETs and Molecular
Electronics; Density of States, Classical and Quantum Statistics.
Module – IV
Models of Semiconductor Quantum Wells, Quantum Wires and Quantum 8
Dots:
Semiconductor Heterostructures and Quantum Wells, Quantum Wires and
Nanowires; Quantum Dots and Nanoparticles, Fabrication Techniques for
Nanostructures: Lithography, Nanoimprint Lithography, Split-Gate Technology,
Self-Assembly.
Module – V
Nanowires, Ballistic Transport and Spin Transport: 8
Classical and Semiclassical Transport, Ballistic Transport, Carbon Nanotubes and
Nanowires, Transport of Spin, and Spintronics: The Transport of Spin, Spintronic
Devices and Applications.
Page 242 of 465

Textbooks:
1. George W. Hanson, Fundamentals of Nanoelectronics, Pearson, 2009.

2. W. Ranier, Nanoelectronics and Information Technology (Advanced Electronic Material
and Novel Devices), Wiley-VCH, 2003.
3. K.E. Drexler, Nanosystems, Wiley, 1992.
Reference books:
1. John H. Davies, The Physics of Low-Dimensional Semiconductors, Cambridge
University Press, 1998.
2. Charles P. Poole, F. J. Owens, Introduction to Nanotechnology, Wiley, 2003.


10

1. TFET
2. MTJ
3. Memristor
4. RTD.

10
Direct Assessment

First Quiz 10
Second Quiz 10
Indirect Assessment
Page 243 of 465

Program
Specific
Outcomes
Outcome
(PSOs)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
CO1 3 3 1 3 3 1 1 3 3 3 2 1
CO2 3 3 2 3 3 3 1 3 3 3 2 1
CO3 3 3 1 3 3 3 1 3 3 3 2 1
CO4 3 3 1 3 3 1 1 3 3 3 2 1
CO5 3 3 2 3 3 3 1 3 3 3 2 1

CD8
Internets
CD9 Simulation
Page 244 of 465

Course Code: EC365

Course Title: Radar and Navigation Systems
Pre-requisite(s): Microwave Theory and Techniques
Co- requisite(s):
Class: B. Tech.
Semester / Level: Sixth/Third
Name of Teacher:
Course Objectives
1 To appraise an overview of Radar Systems and Radar Equation.
2 To perceive the CW, FM, MTI and Pulse Doppler Radar
3 To grasp the detection of radar signals in noise
4 To understand the navigation, radio direction finding and radio ranges
5 To understand the different types of navigation systems and landing
Course Outcomes
CO1 Able to explain Radar Systems and Radar Equation.
CO2 Able to demonstrate CW, FM, MTI and Pulse Doppler Radar
CO3 Able to explain the detection of radar signals in noise
CO4 Able to demonstrate the concept of navigation, radio direction finding and radio
ranges
CO5 Able to demonstrate the concept of navigation systems and landing
Page 245 of 465

SYLLABUS
(NO. OF
MODULE LECTURE
HOURS)
Module – I
Introduction to Radar System and Radar Equation: Introduction, History and 10
Applications of Radar, Radar Block Diagram and Operation, Radar Frequencies,
Prediction of Range Performance, Minimum Detectable Signal, Receiver Noise,
Probability density Functions, Signal-to-noise Ratio, Integration of Radar Pulses,
Radar Cross Section of Targets, Cross-section Fluctuations, Transmitter Power,
Pulse Repetition Frequency and Range Ambiguities, Antenna parameters, System
Losses, Propagation Effects
Module – II
CW, FM, MTI and Pulse Doppler Radar: The Doppler Effect, CW Radar, 10
Frequency-Modulated CW Radar, Airborne Doppler Navigation, Multiple CW
radar, Delay line Cancellers, Multiple or Staggered Pulse Repetition Frequencies,
Range gated Doppler Filters, Block Diagram of Digital Signal Processor,
Example of MTI radar Processor, Pulse Doppler Radar, Non coherent MTI, MTI
from moving platform, Other types of MTI, Airborne Radar
Module – III
Detection of Radar Signals in Noise: Introduction, Matched-Filter Receiver, 7
Correlation Detector, Detection Criteria, Detector Characteristics, Performance
of the Radar Operator, Automatic Detection, Constant-False-Alarm-Rate (CFAR)
Receiver
Module – IV
Introduction to Navigation, RDF and Radio Ranges: Introduction to 7
Navigation, Methods of Navigation, Loop Antenna, Loop input circuits, aural null
direction finder, Goniometer, Errors in Direction Finding, Adcock Direction
Finder, Direction finding at very high frequency, Automatic Direction Finder,
Range and accuracy of direction finder, LF/MF Four course Radio Range, VHF
Omni Directional Range, and VOR receiving Equipment, Range and Accuracy of
VOR
Module – V
Convolutional Codes Navigation Systems and Landing: LORAN, DECCA 6
navigation system, Instrument Landing System, Ground controlled Approach System,
Microwave landing system , Distance Measuring Equipment, operation of DME,
TACAN Doppler navigation-Doppler Effect, Doppler frequency equations, Track
stabilization, Doppler Spectrum, GPS principle of operation, Position location
determination, principle of GPS receiver and applications, Differential GPS, Navstar
GPS.
Page 246 of 465

Text Books:
1. M.I. Skolnik, “Introduction to Radar System”,McGraw Hill 2nd Edition.
2. N. S. Nagaraja “Elements of Electronic Navigation, 2nd edition, Tata McGraw-Hill
Education
Reference Books:
1. Radar Systems and Radio Aids to Navigation, Sen & Bhattacharya, Khanna publishers
2. Radar Principles", Peyton Z. Peebles ,JohnWiley, 2004
3. J.C Toomay, " Principles of Radar", 2nd Edition –PHI, 2004
4. Radar Systems Analysis and Design Using MATLAB, Bassem R. Mahafza,. CHAPMAN &
HALL/CRC
5. Radar Engg. Hand Book M.I. Skolnik, Publisher: McGraw Hill
6. Roger J Suullivan, “Radar Foundations for Imaging and Advanced Topics”.
7. Global Navigation Satellite Systems Insights into GPS, GLONASS, Galileo, Compass, and
others B. Bhatta BSP Books
8. K. K. Sharma “ Fundamentals of Radar, Sonar and Navigation Engineering” 4th Edition
Katson Books
based assignment
Direct Assessment

First Quiz 10
Second Quiz 10
Page 247 of 465

Indirect Assessment
Program
Specific
Outcomes
Outcome
(PSOs)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
CO1 3 3 2 3 2 2 1 3 2 3 1 3 3 2 1
CO2 3 3 2 3 2 2 1 3 2 3 1 3 3 2 2
CO3 3 3 2 3 2 2 1 3 2 3 1 3 3 2 1
CO4 3 3 2 3 2 2 1 3 2 3 1 3 3 2 3
CO5 3 3 2 3 2 2 1 3 2 3 1 2 3 2 2

CD8
Internets
CD9 Simulation
Page 248 of 465

Course code: EC366

Course title: Advanced Microwave Engineering Lab
Pre-requisite(s): Electromagnetic Fields and Waves Microwave Theory and Techniques
Co- requisite(s):
Credits: L: 0 T: 0 P: 3 C: 1.5
Class: B. Tech.
Semester / Level: Sixth/Three
Course Objectives:
16. To develop an understanding about the propagation of modes in free space and
waveguides.
17. To develop an understanding about the RF behavior of passive components,
matching network and microstrip resonators.
18. To develop an ability to understand about the waveguide coupler, bandpass filter
and propagation characteristics in ferrite medium.
19. To develop an ability to understand about microwave transistor amplifier and
microstrip transmission line.
20. To develop an ability to understand a microstrip reconfigurable bandpass filter and
monopole microstrip antenna
Course Outcomes:
CO1 Demonstrate understanding of the propagation of modes in free space and
waveguides.
CO2 Demonstrate understanding of the RF behavior of passive components, matching
network and microstrip resonators.
CO3 Design a waveguide coupler, bandpass filter and understanding of propagation
characteristics in ferrite medium.
CO4 Design a microwave transistor amplifier and microstrip transmission line.
CO5 Design a reconfigurable bandpass filter and monopole microstrip antenna
Page 249 of 465

Syllabus
7. Name of the Experiment: Propagation mode in free space

AIM-1: Analysis of various propagation mode in free space.
8. Name of the Experiment: Propagation modes in waveguide

AIM-1: Analysis of propagation modes in waveguide.
9. Name of the Experiment: RF behavior of passive components

AIM-1: Using MATLAB, obtain the RF behavior of passive components (Resistor, Capacitor
and Inductor)
5. Name of the Experiment: Matching network

AIM-1: Using MATLAB, design an L-section matching network to match a series RC with
given load and line impedance at a frequency.
12. Name of the Experiment: Microstrip resonator

𝜆
AIM-1: Consider a microstrip resonator constructed from a length of 50 Ω open circuited
2
microstrip line. For a given substrate, using MATLAB, at a given resonance frequency,
compute the required length of line, propagation constant, attenuation due to conductor loss
and dielectric loss and unloaded “Q” of resonator
13. Name of the Experiment: Waveguide coupler

AIM 1: Using MATLAB, obtain coupling and directivity versus frequency plot for the four
hole Chebyshev waveguide coupler for X band
14. Name of the Experiment: Bandpass filter

AIM 1: Using MATLAB, Design a third order bandpass filter having a 0.5 dB equal-ripple
response for the required center frequency, bandwidth and the impedance.
15. Name of the Experiment:, Propagation in ferrite medium

AIM 1: Using MATLAB, plot and analyze the phase and attenuation constant verses
frequency curve for RHCP and LHCP plane propagation in ferrite medium
16. Name of the Experiment: RF transistor amplifier

Using MATLAB, Obtain and plot the stability regions of a given transistor amplifier
parameters on Smith Chart. If amplifier is unstable then suggest the method to stabilize it.
Page 250 of 465

17. Name of the Experiment:, Microstrip transmission line
AIM 1: Using IE3D/HFSS, design a 50 ohm microstrip transmission line for 90 degree phase
shift. Calculate the required dimensions of microstrip using MATLAB.
18. Name of the Experiment:, Reconfigurable bandpass filter

AIM 1: Using IE3D/HFSS, Design a reconfigurable bandpass filter for WIMAX and WLAN
applications
19. Name of the Experiment:, Monopole microstrip antenna

AIM 1: Using IE3D/HFSS, Design a CPW fed monopole microstrip antenna on a given
substrate
Text Book:
1.“David M. Pozar, "Microwave Engineering", Third Edition, Wiley India.

2.R. Ludwig and G. Bogdanov, “RF Circuit Design, Theory and Applications”, Pearson, 2nd
Edition.
Reference Books:
1.S. Y. Liao , “Microwave Devices & Circuits”, PHI 2nd Edition

2.B. R. Vishvakarma, R U Khan, M K. Meshram, “ Intoduction to Microwave Measurements”
3.R.E.Collin, "Foundations for Microwave Engineering", Second edition, IEEE Press.
Page 251 of 465

Direct Assessment

Attendance Marks 12
Lab Viva marks 20
Lab file Marks 12
Lab Quiz-I Marks 10
Program
Specific
Outcomes
Outcome
(PSOs)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
CO1 3 3 2 2 3 1 - - 1 3 1 2 2 2 1
CO2 3 2 2 3 1 - - 1 3 1 2 2 2 1
3
CO3 3 3 3 3 3 1 - - 1 3 1 3 2 2 1
CO4 3 3 3 3 3 1 - - 1 3 1 3 2 2 1
CO5 3 3 3 3 3 1 - - 1 3 1 3 2 2 1
Page 252 of 465

CD Course Delivery
Code Method Used
CD1 Lecture by use of Boards/LCD Projectors CO1 CD1, CD5 ,CD8
CD2 Tutorials/Assignments CO2 CD1, CD5,CD8, CD9

CD3 Seminars/ Quiz (s) CO3 CD1, CD5,CD8, CD9
CD4 Mini Projects/Projects CO4 CD1, CD5, CD8,

CD9
CD5 Laboratory Experiments/Teaching Aids CO5 CD1, CD5, CD8,
CD9

CD9 Simulation
Page 253 of 465

Course Code: EC 367

Course Title: Computer Networking
Pre-requisite(s): Fundamentals of Data Communication
Co- requisite(s):
Class: B. Tech.
Semester / Level: Sixth
Name of Teacher:
Course Objectives
1. Understand the different network topologies, transmission media and different

MAC sub-layers used in the design of a Local Area Network (LAN) and Wireless
LAN’s.
2. Familiarize the layer of operation and working of different intermediate devices,
network layer protocols and internet addressing mechanism.
3. Familiarize with the transport layer protocols to be used as an end-to-end service
provider.
4. Illustrate different encryption and message authentication schemes to provide
security at different layers.
5. To outline the functioning of the Application layer and different protocols of

application layers e.g. HTTP, SMTP, WWW, FTP, VOIP etc.
Course Outcomes
CO1 Recall the basic reference model of LAN, their topologies and different types of
intermediate systems in a network used.
CO2 Understand the basics of various internet protocols and their functioning.
CO3 Understand the basics of various internet and transport protocols and their
functioning.
CO4 Explain the significance of network security in a public network like internet.
CO5 Analyze the different application layer protocols and their functioning.
Page 254 of 465

SYLLABUS
(NO. OF
MODULE LECTURE
HOURS)
Module – I
Local Area Network: Local Area Networks: Background, Topologies and 11
Transmission Media, LAN standards IEEE 802 reference Model, Logical Link
Control.
Medium Access Control: Medium Access Control, IEEE 802.3 Medium Access
Control, Ethernet, Fast Ethernet, Gigabit Ethernet, Token Ring and FDDI, IEEE
802.5 Transmission Medium Options.
Connecting devices and Backbone Networks: Bridges, Functions of a Bridge,
Bridge Protocol Architecture, Fixed routing, Spanning tree approach, Connecting
devices like Repeaters, Hubs, Bridges ,Two-layer switches, Routers and Three
layer switches, Backbone Networks, Bus Backbone, Star Backbone, Connecting
remote LANs.
Module – II
Internetworking Operations: Principles of Internetworking, Requirements, 10
Architectural approaches, Connectionless Internetworking, Addressing, Routing
techniques, Static versus Dynamic Routing,
Internet Protocols: IPv4, Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP), IPV6
Structure, Header, CIDR Addressing, ICMPV6.
Internet work Operations: Unicast and Multicast routing, Autonomous
Systems, Unicast routing protocol OSPF, Internet Group Management Protocol
(IGMP), Border Gateway Protocol, Integrated Service Architecture, ISA
Approach, Components, Services, Queuing Discipline, Resource Reservation
Protocol (RSVP), Differentiated Services (DS).
Module – III
Transport layer operations: Connection Oriented Transport Protocol 7
Mechanisms, Reliable Sequencing networks services, Unreliable network
services, TCP Services, TCP Header Format, TCP Mechanisms, TCP
Implementation policy options, TCP Congestion Control, Retransmission Timer
Management, Window Management, Quality of Service, User datagram Protocol
(UDP).
Module – IV
Network Security : Passive and Active Attacks, Symmetric Encryption, 7
Encryption Algorithms, Key Distribution, Traffic Padding, Message
Authentication, Hash function, Secure Hash function, Public-key Encryption,
Digital Signature, RSA Public Key Encryption algorithm, Key Management,
Page 255 of 465

Secure Socket layer and Transport layer Security, SSL Architecture, SSL Record
Protocol, Change Cipher Spec Protocol, Alert Protocol, Handshake Protocol, IP
level security IPSEC, Application layer security PGP, Firewall, Virtual Private
Networks.
Module – V
Application Layer Protocols: Distributed Applications: Electronic Mail, Simple
Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP), Multipurpose Internal Mail Extension (MIME), 5
Client Server Model, Socket Interface, Simple Network Management Protocol
(SNMP) SNMP V2 and SNMP V3, Hypertext Transfer Protocol (HTTP)
Overview Message Entities, World Wide Web (WWW), HTML, Common
Gateway Interface (CGI), Voice over IP (VOIP).
Text Books:
1. Data and Computer Communication, 7/e. by William Stallings.

2. Data Communication and Networking, 3/e. by Behrouz. A. Forouzan.
Reference Books:
1. The Internet and its protocols: A comparative approach. by Adrian Farrel.
2. Computer Networks 4/e by Andrew S. Tanenbaum.
Gaps in the Syllabus (to meet Industry/Profession requirements):
1. Simulation of different types of networks and their performance comparison.

3, 4 and 12

1. Hardware implementation of MAC protocols.
2. Hardware implementation of Bridges and Routers.
3. Setting up of a practical internetwork.
2, 3, 4, 12
Page 256 of 465

Direct Assessment

First Quiz 10
Second Quiz 10
Indirect Assessment
Program
Specific
Outcomes
Outcome
(PSOs)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
CO1 3 1 1 2 1 - - - - - - 2 2 1 3
CO2 3 3 3 2 1 - - - - - - 1 3 1 3
CO3 3 3 2 2 2 - - - - - - 1 2 2 2
CO4 3 2 1 1 1 - - - - - - 1 2 2 2
CO5 3 1 1 2 1 - - - - - - 2 2 1 3

CD3 Seminars CO3 CD1 CD2
CD8
Internets
CD9 Simulation
Page 257 of 465

Course Code: EC369

Course Title: Wireless Networks
Pre-requisite(s): Basic Sciences
Co- requisite(s):
Class: B. Tech.
Name of Teacher:
Course Objectives
16. Explain basics of wireless networks system
17. Explain network protocols used for WPAN, WLAN and WWAN.
18. Explain Transmission control protocol
19. Explain IPv4 and IPV6 addressing system
20. An ability to explain the functioning, protocols, capabilities and application of

various wireless communication networks.
Course Outcomes
CO1 Demonstrate an understanding on basics of Wireless network system
CO2 Demonstrate an ability to identify the protocol for network environment based on
geographical condition, dimension and resource condition
CO3 Demonstrate an understanding on IP addressing protocol
CO4 Demonstrate an understanding on basics of Wireless network system
CO5 Explain the functioning, protocols, capabilities and application of various wireless
communication networks.
Page 258 of 465

SYLLABUS
(NO. OF
MODULE LECTURE
HOURS)
Module – I
9
Ad-hoc wireless networks : MANET and WSN, security in wireless networks,
energy constrained networks, adhoc versus Infrastructure based wireless
networks
Module – II 9
Wireless personal area networks (bluetooth, network connection establishment in

bluetooth, bluetooth protocol stack, bluetooth link type, bluetooth security.
ZigBee: components & network Topologies. ultra wideband communication
Module – III 8
Wireless local area and metropolitan area networks: WLAN Technology, network
architecture, protocol architecture, physical layer, data link layer, medium access
methods, security in 802.11 systems, WLAN standards. Wireless metropolitan
area networks (WiMAX).
Module – IV 8
Wireless wide area networks: GSM, GPRS, 3G wireless systems, evolution of

cdma2000, differences between cdma2000 & WCDMA. HSPA and LTE.
Module – V 7
Wireless network protocols: mobile network layer protocol (mobile IP, Ipv4 vs.
IPv6, IPv6, IPv6 transition mechanism, dynamic host configuration protocol),
mobile transport layer protocol (traditional TCP, classical TCP improvements),
agent discovery, agent advertisement, registration, authentication, route
optimisation, mobility support for IPV6.
Page 259 of 465

Text Books:
2. Vijay K Garg, “Wireless Communications and Networks”, Morgan Kaufmann
Publishers an Imprint of Elsevier, USA 2009 (Indian reprint)
Reference Books:
1. Behrouz A. Forouzan, “Data Communications and Networking”, McGraw-Hill, 2007
River Publishers, Denmark, 2015 (Indian reprint).
Gaps in the Syllabus (to meet Industry/Profession requirements) : Nil
POs met through Gaps in the Syllabus : NA
Direct Assessment

First Quiz 10
Second Quiz 10
Indirect Assessment
Page 260 of 465

Program
Specific
Outcomes
Outcome
(PSOs)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
CO1 3 2 2 1 - - - - - - - 2 3 2 1
CO2 3 3 3 3 2 - - - - - - 1 3 2 1
CO3 3 3 3 3 2 - - - - - - 1 3 2 1
CO4 3 3 3 3 3 - - - - - - 1 3 2 2
CO5 3 3 3 3 2 - - - - - - 2 3 2 2

CD1 Lecture by use of Boards/LCD Projectors CO1 CD1, CD 8
CD2 Tutorials/Assignments CO2 CD1, CD 8 and CD9
CD3 Seminars CO3 CD1, CD 8 and CD9
CD4 Mini Projects/Projects CO4 CD1 and CD 8
CD5 Laboratory Experiments/Teaching Aids CO5 CD1 and CD 8
CD8
Internets
CD9 Simulation
Page 261 of 465

Course code: EC370

Course title: Wireless Networking Lab
Pre-requisite(s): Fundamental Knowledge of Communication System, basic understanding of
communication process and communication media
Co- requisite(s):
Credits: L: 0 T: 0 P: 3 C: 1.5
Class: B. Tech.
Course Objectives:
1 To develop an ability to design various kind of wired/wireless networks using
network simulator.
2 To evaluate and compare the performance of several network protocols (AODV,
DYMO etc).
3 To design and interpret wireless sensor networks and standards
4 To design and examine the hardware setup for wireless Wide Area network
5 To design and examine the hardware setup for wireless sensor network
Course Outcomes:
CO1 Have an ability to design and evaluate various kind of wired/wireless networks.
CO2 Be able to analyze and compare the performance of various routing protocols (like
AODV, DYMO etc) for wireless adhoc network as well as for infrastructure based
wireless network.
CO3 Have an ability to design and interpret wireless networks and standards (WLAN,
Bluetooth etc) through simulation software as well as evaluate the impact of
various system parameters on wireless standards.
CO4 Have an ability to design and analyze the hardware setup for wireless Wide Area
network
CO5 Have an ability to design and analyze the hardware setup for
Page 262 of 465

Syllabus
1. Name of the Experiment: Set up link to analyze flow of operation (packets)

AIM-1:Study and demonstrate the flow of operation (packets) in QualNet Network Simulator
GUI.
2.Name of the Experiment: Set up link to analyze Ad hoc mode scenario
AIM-1: Design and evaluate an Ad hoc mode scenario using QualNet Network Simulator.
3.Name of the Experiment: Set up link to analyze infrastructure mode scenario
AIM-1: To configure and evaluate an infrastructure mode scenario using QualNet Simulator
GUI.
4.Name of the Experiment: Set up link to measure effect of mobility in an Ad hoc mode
scenario
AIM-1: Configure and estimate the effect of mobility to the data transferred in an Ad hoc
mode scenario.
5.Name of the Experiment: : Set up link to measure effect of mobility in an

infrastructure mode scenario
AIM-1: Configure and estimate the effect of mobility to the data transferred in an infrastructure
mode.
6.Name of the Experiment: Compare AODV and DYMO

AIM-1: Compare two routing protocols (AODV and DYMO) in ad hoc mode scenario.
7.Name of the Experiment: Configure VOIP Application Layer Protocol

AIM-1: Configure VOIP Application layer protocol based on H.323 in an infrastructure.
8.Name of the Experiment: Evaluate performance of Multicasting Application

AIM-1: Configure and evaluate a multicasting application in a wired/wireless scenario.
9.Name of the Experiment: GSM Setup

AIM-1: Assembly of GSM set up and real time study of GSM 07. 05 and 07.07 AT commands
(such as network registration call control call setting etc at least 10 command).
Page 263 of 465

10.Name of the Experiment: Wireless Sensor Network
AIM 1: To Interface analog sensor with Scientech 2311 Wireless sensor network.
11.Name of the Experiment: Temperature and Light Sensor
AIM 1:To develop a code to read temperature and light sensor data from sensor module
attached to the radio module using SENSnuts GUI platform
12.Name of the Experiment: Level Based Routing

AIM 1:To create a LBR (level based routing) based multi-hop network using SENSnuts GUI
platform.
Text Book:
1. Vijay K. Garg, “Wireless Communications and Networks”, Morgan Kaufmann

Publishers an Imprint of Elsevier, USA 2009 (Indian reprint).
Reference Books:
1. Theidore S Rappaport, “Wireless Communication: Principles and Practice” Prentice Hall

2. Lab. Manuals concerning each experiment.
Page 264 of 465

Direct Assessment

Attendance Marks 12
Lab Viva marks 20
Lab file Marks 12
Lab Quiz-I Marks 10
Program
Specific
Outcomes
Outcome
(PSOs)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
CO1 3 3 2 2 3 1 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 1
CO2 3 3 2 2 3 1 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 1
CO3 3 2 2 2 3 1 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 1
CO4 3 3 2 2 3 1 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 1
CO5 3 2 2 2 3 1 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 1
Page 265 of 465

CD Course Delivery
Code Method Used


CD9 Simulation
Page 266 of 465

Course Code: EC 371

Course Title: Introduction to Electromagnetic Compatibility
Pre-requisite(s): Electromagnetic Field and Waves
Co- requisite(s):
Class: B. Tech.
Semester / Level:
Name of Teacher:
Course Objectives
1 Explain requirement of EMI & EMC concept and impart knowledge on different
units and standards used for Electromagnetic compatibility in electronic/electric
system.
2 Develop an ability to analyze, measure and evaluate the radiated and conducted
emissions to examine the compatibility.
3 Develop an ability to analyze and evaluate the impact of EMI mitigation techniques
such as shielding and grounding.
4 Develop an ability to explain the impact of EMI on system design.
5 Review and present the literature ethically and also develop the skill to work
individually or in a team.
Course Outcomes
CO1 Explain the requirement of EMI & EMC concept and impart knowledge on different
units and standards used for Electromagnetic compatibility in electronic/electric
system.
CO2 Analyze, measure and evaluate radiated and conducted emissions to examine the
electromagnetic compatibility.
Page 267 of 465

CO3 Analyze and evaluate the impact of EMI mitigation techniques such as shielding and
grounding.
CO4 Explain the impact of EMI on system design.
CO5 Review and write the literature related to EMI & EMC to report it ethically.
Page 268 of 465

SYLLABUS
(NO. OF
MODULE LECTURE
HOURS)
Module – I
Introduction: A brief history of EMI/EMC, Analysis of EMI, Type of Noise and 8
Interference, Electromagnetic Compatibility, Radiated Emission and
susceptibility, Conducted Emission and Susceptibility, Benefits of good EMC
Design, Brief description of EMC regulations, Examples of EMC related
problems. EMC requirements for Electronic Systems: Government regulations,
Requirement for Commercial products and Military products, Radiated Emission
limits for Class A, Class B, FCC and CISPR, measurement of Emissions for
verification of compliance: Radiated Emission and Conducted Emissions, Typical
product emissions, Additional product requirements, design constraints for
products, Advantages of EMC Design.
Module – II
Conducted Emission and Susceptibility: Measurement of Conducted emission: 9
LISN, Common and Differential mode currents, Power supply filters: Basic
properties of filters, A generic power supply filter topology, Effect of filter
elements on common and differential mode currents, Separation of conducted
emissions into common and differential mode components for diagnostic purpose,
Power supplies: Linear and SMPS, Effect of Power Supply Components on
Conducted emissions, Power Supply and Filter placement, Conducted
Susceptibility.
Module – III
Radiated Emission and Susceptibility: Simple Emission models for wires and 9
PCB lands: Differential mode versus Common mode currents, Differential mode
current emission model, Common mode current emission model, Current probes,
Simple susceptibility models for wires and PCB lands: Shielded cables and
surface transfer impedance.
Page 269 of 465

Module – IV 8
Cross talk: Three conductor transmission lines and crosstalk, Transmission line
equations for lossless lines, The per unit length parameters: Homogeneous versus
Inhomogeneous media, Wide separation approximation for wires, Numerical
methods for other structures, The Inductive-Capacitive Coupling Approximation
model: Frequency domain Inductive-Capacitive coupling model, Time domain
Inductive-Capacitive coupling model, Lumped circuit approximate models.
Shielded Wires: Per unit length parameters, Inductive and Capacitive Coupling,
Effect of Shield grounding, Effect of pigtails, Effects of Multiple shields, MTL
model predictions, Twisted wires: Per unit length parameters, Inductive and
Capacitive Coupling, Effects of Twist, Effects of Balancing.
Module – V 6
Shielding: Shielding Effectiveness, Far field Sources: Exact solution,
Approximate solution, Near field sources: Near field versus far field, Electric
sources, Magnetic sources, Low frequency, magnetic field shielding, Effect of
Apertures. System Design for EMC: Shielding and Grounding, PCB Design,
System configuration and design, Electrostatic Discharge, Electromagnetic Pulse,
Diagnostic tools.
Text books:
1. Paul, C., Introduction to Electromagnetic Compatibility, John Wiley & Sons, 1992.
Reference books:
1. Ott, W. Henry, Electromagnetic Compatibility Engineering, John Wiley & Sons, 2009.
The gaps in the syllabus would be met by Assignment, Lectures and presentation.


1.EM Interference issues in automobiles and aircrafts.
2.EM interference issues in high speed circuit design.
Page 270 of 465

Direct Assessment

First Quiz 10
Second Quiz 10
Indirect Assessment
Program
Specific
Outcomes
Outcome
(PSOs)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
CO1 3 1 - 1 2 - - - 1 1 - 1 3 1 2
CO2 - 1 - 1 1 - - - 1 1 - 1 2 2 2
CO3 3 1 - 1 1 - - - 1 1 - 1 2 2 2
CO4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 - 1 3 3 3
CO5 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 2 1 1 2 2 2 2
Page 271 of 465


CD1, CD2, CD5,
CD1
CD1, CD2, CD5,
CD2
CD1, CD2, CD3,
CD3 CD4, CD5, CD8,
Seminars CO3 CD9.
CD1, CD2, CD3,
CD4 CD4, CD5, CD8,
CD4, CD5, CD7,
CD5
CD8
Internets
CD9 Simulation
Page 272 of 465

Course code: EC373

Course title: Introduction to Sensor and Transducer
Pre-requisite(s): EC101 Basis of Electronics and Communication Engineering
Co- requisite(s):
Credits: L: 3 T: 0 P: 0 C: 3
Class: B. Tech.
Name of Teacher:
Course Objectives:
1 To understand principle of transduction.

2 To Select a resistive/inductive sensor for specific application.
3 To design sensor based on capacitive/magnetic property.
4 To understand the operation of radiation sensor.
5 To compare the operation of radiation sensor.
Course Outcomes:
CO1 Explain the principle of transduction . Classify sensor based on different

parameters like measurand, principle of operation, energy etc.
CO2 Select a resistive/inductive sensor for specific application
CO3 Apply the capacitive/magnetic property for sensor design
CO4 Explain the operation of radiation sensor

CO5 Differentiate between conventional sensor and smart sensor.
Page 273 of 465

(NO. OF
MODULE LECTURE
HOURS)
Module-I
Definition, principle of sensing & transduction, classification and characteristics 6
of sensor. Mechanical and Electromechanical sensor;
Module-II
Resistive : potentiometric sensor, Strain gauge: Theory, type, materials, design 10
consideration, sensitivity, gauge factor, variation with temperature, adhesive,
rosettes.; Resistive Temperature sensor.
Inductive sensor: common types- Reluctance change type, Mutual inductance
change type, transformer action type, Magnetostrictive type, LVDT:
Construction, material, output input relationship.
Module-III
Capacitive sensors: variable distance-parallel plate type, variable area- parallel 10
plate, serrated plate/teeth type and cylindrical type, variable dielectric constant
type, calculation of sensitivity; Stretched diaphragm type: microphone, response
characteristics; Piezoelectric element: piezoelectric effect, charge and voltage co-
efficient, crystal model, materials, natural & synthetic type, their comparison,
force & stress sensing, ultrasonic sensors.
Magnetic sensors: Sensor based on Villari effect for assessment of force, torque,
proximity, Wiedemann effect for yoke coil sensors, Thomson effect, Hall effect,
and Hall drive, performance characteristics;
Module-IV
Radiation sensors: LDR, Photovoltaic cells, photodiodes, photo emissive cell 6
types, materials, construction,, response, Geiger counters, Scintillation detectors;
Module-V
Smart Sensor: characteristics of a smart sensor. components of smart sensor, 8
Construction and working of smart sensor using silicon. Information
Coding/Processing, Data Communication and Automation using smart sensor.
Text Books:
1.Electrical & Electronics Measurements and Instrumentation By A.K.Shawhney, Dhanpat
Rai & Sons.
2.Electronics instrumentation By H. S. Kalsi [TMH]
Page 274 of 465

Reference Book:
1. “Sensors and Transducers”, 2/E By D. Patranabis
CD # Course Delivery methods

CD2 Quizzes
CD3 Assignments/Seminars
CD4 Mini projects/Projects
CD5 Laboratory experiments/teaching aids
CD9 Simulation
Direct Assessment

Mid SEM Examination Marks 25
End SEM Examination Marks 50
Quizzes 10+10
Assessment by teacher 5
Page 275 of 465

Mapping between Objectives and Outcomes
Program
Specific
Outcomes
Outcome
(PSOs)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
CO1 3 3 1 2 3 1 1 3 3 1 2
CO2 3 2 2 2 3 1 1 3 2 2 2
CO3 3 3 1 2 3 1 2 1 1 3 2 2 2 2
CO4 3 2 1 2 3 1 2 2 1 3 2 3 3 3
CO5 3 2 1 2 3 1 2 2 1 3 2 2 2 2

CD2 Quizzes CO2 CD1, CD2, CD3, CD8
CD3 Assignments/Seminars CO3 CD1, CD2, CD3, CD8
CD4 Mini Projects/Projects CO4 CD1, CD2, CD3, CD8

CD8
Internets
CD9 Simulation
Page 276 of 465

Course code: EC375

Course title: High Speed Electronic
Pre-requisite(s): EC101 Basics of Electronics and Communication Engineering, EC201
Electronic Devices
Co- requisite(s):
Credits: L: 3 T: 0 P: 0 C: 3
Class: B. Tech.
Branch: ECE
Name of Teacher:
Course Objectives
1. Understand RF Behavior of Passive Components.

2. Interpret the Microwave Characteristics of Field Effect Transistors.and apply the
perceived knowledge.
3. Appraise and analyse the Distributed System and Transmission Line Theory.
4. Design and Evaluate the LNA and RF Power Amplifiers.
5. Design/create the Mixers, PLLs and Oscillators.
Course Outcomes
CO1 Describe and illustrate the RF Behavior of Passive Components.

CO2 Sketch and Explain Microwave Characteristics of Field Effect Transistors.
CO3 Diagram and explain the use of Distributed System and Transmission Line Theory.
Illustrate their characteristics and analyse them.
CO4 Design and schematize LNA and RF Power Amplifiers, assess their characteristics
CO5 Design and schematize Mixers, PLLs and Oscillators, assess their characteristics
Page 277 of 465

SYLLABUS
(NO. OF
MODULE LECTURE
HOURS)
Module – I
RF Behavior of Passive Components: Interconnect at Radio Frequencies - Skin 8
Effect, Resistors, Capacitors, Inductors, Transformers, Monolithic Transformer
Realizations, Interconnect Options at High Frequencies, MOSFET as Switches,
Electrostatic Discharge (ESD).
Module – II
Microwave Characteristics of Field Effect Transistors: Review of MOSFET: 8
Dynamic Elements, High-Frequency Figures of Merit, Technology scaling in
the long-channel limit, Operation in Week inversion; MOS device physics in
short-channel regime. Modulation-doped field-effect transistor (MODFET):
Basic Device Structure, I-V Characteristics, Equivalent Circuit and Microwave
Performance, Advanced Device Structures.
Module – III
Distributed System and Transmission Line Theory: Introduction, Maxwell’s 8
equation & Kirchhoff’s laws, Link between lump and distributed regimes,
Driving-point impedance of iterated structures; Transmission line in more detail:
Lumped model for lossy transmission line, Characteristic impedance of a lossy
transmission line, The propagation constant (γ), Relationship of propagation
constant (γ) to line parameters. Behavior of finite-length transmission lines.
Module – IV
LNA and RF Power Amplifiers: Low-noise amplifiers: LNA topologies; 8
Design Examples; RF Power Amplifiers: General Considerations, Class A, AB,
B and C Power Amplifiers, Class D Amplifiers, Class E Amplifiers; Performance
Metrics, Summary of PA Characteristics, RF PA Design Examples, Additional
Design Considerations.
Module – V
Mixers, PLLs and Oscillators: Mixers: Active Downconversion Mixers; 8
Upconversion Mixers. Phase-Locked Loops: General considerations:
Transceiver architectures, Basic Concepts. Oscillators: Performance parameters,
basic principles.
Textbooks:
1.Thomas H. Lee, “The Design of CMOS Radio-Frequency Integrated Circuits,” 2nd ed.,
Cambridge University Press, 2004.
Page 278 of 465

2.SM Sze, Kwok K. Ng, “Physics of Semiconductor Devices”, 3/e, Wiley-Interscience, 2006.
3.Behzad Razavi, RF Microelectronics, 1e, Prentice Hall, 1998.
4.Behzad Razavi, RF Microelectronics, 2e, Prentice Hall, 2012.
Reference books:
1. John W. M. Rogers, Calvin Plett, Radio Frequency Integrated Circuit Design, Artech
House, 2010.
2. Reinhold Ludwig and Pavel Bretchko, RF Circuit Design Theory and Application,
Pearson Education, 2000.

1. Hands-on-practical for IC (Integrated Circuit) fabrication.

10
N/A

10
Direct Assessment

First Quiz 10
Second Quiz 10
Indirect Assessment
Page 279 of 465

Program
Specific
Outcomes
Outcome
(PSOs)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
CO1 3 3 2 3 3 1 1 3 3 3 2 1
CO2 3 3 2 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 2 1
CO3 3 3 2 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 2 1
CO4 3 3 2 3 3 2 2 3 3 3 2 1
CO5 3 3 2 3 3 2 2 3 3 3 2 1

CD8
Internets
CD9 Simulation
Page 280 of 465

Course Code: EC 377

Course Title: Introduction to Communication System
Pre-requisite(s): Good understanding of mathematical tools like integration, differentiation etc.
Co- requisite(s):
Class: B. Tech.
Semester / Level: OE/Three
Name of Teacher:
Course Objectives
1 Explain basics of analog and digital communication system and modulation-

demodulation schemes
2 Explain the method to design analog and digial modulation-demodulation system
3 Explain the concept of sampling, quantization and coding required for various
Pulse modulation schemes.
4 Explain the concept of multiplexing schemes
5 Explain to evaluate the performance of communication system in the presence of

noise.
Course Outcomes
CO1 Demonstrate an understanding on communication system and representation of

signals.
CO2 Demonstrate an understanding on different methods of Analog and Digital
modulation and demodulation schemes.
CO3 Demonstrate an understanding on design, operation and applications of Analog and
Digital modulation and demodulation schemes
CO4 Demonstrate an understanding on Multiplexing Scheme and Heterodyne receiver
CO5 Evaluate the performance of communication system in the presence of noise.
Page 281 of 465

SYLLABUS
(NO. OF
MODULE LECTURE
HOURS)
Module – I
Overview of electronic communication systems, need for modulation, amplitude 10
modulation, generation and detection of AM waves, DSB-SC modulation,
generation and detection of DSB-SC waves, SSB modulation and demodulation,
comparison between AM, DSB-SC and SSB, frequency division multiplexing,
noise in communication system, signal to noise ratio, Shannon’s theorem, channel
capacity, bandwidth S/N trade-off.
Module – II 10
Angle modulation, frequency modulation and phase modulation, NBFM, WBFM,
generation of FM wave, demodulation of FM wave, superheterodyne receiver,
Frequency Division Multiplexing.
Module – III
Pulse modulation: sampling theorem, pulse amplitude modulation, time division 7
multiplexing, PAM modulator and demodulator, pulse duration modulation, PDM
modulator and demodulator, pulse position modulation, PPM modulator and
demodulator. Analog to digital conversion:, quantization process, pulse code
modulation, differential pulse code modulation, delta modulation
Module – IV 6
Digital modulation and transmission: BFSK, DPSK, QPSK, M-ary PSK, QASK,
BFSK, M-ary FSK, MSK, pulse shaping to reduce inter-channel and inter-symbol
interference. Spread spectrum modulation and its use, PN sequence generation
and its characteristics,
Module – V 7
Noise in communication system, various types of noise, équivalent noise band
width, noise température, signal to noise ratio, noise figure, shannon’s theorem,
channel capacity, bandwidth S/N trade-off, mutual information and channel
capacity
Page 282 of 465

Text Books:
1.Herbert Taub, Donald L Schilling and Gautam Saha “Communication Systems” McGraw Hill
Education (India), pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 4th edition, 2013.
Reference Books:
1. Simon Haykin, “Communication Systems” Wiley, 4th edition, 2001.
2. D. Roddy & J. Coolen, “Electronics Communication”, 4th Edition, PHI, 2005
Direct Assessment

First Quiz 10
Second Quiz 10
Indirect Assessment
Program
Specific
Outcomes
Outcome
(PSOs)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
CO1 3 2 2 1 - - - - - - - 2 3 2 1
CO2 3 3 3 3 2 - - - - - - 1 3 2 2
CO3 3 3 3 3 2 - - - - - - 1 3 2 1
CO4 3 3 3 3 3 - - - - - - 1 3 2 3
CO5 3 3 3 3 2 - - - - - - 1 3 2 2
Page 283 of 465


CD8
Internets
CD9 Simulation
Page 284 of 465

Course Code: EC379

Course title: Control Systems
Pre-requisite(s):EC205 Signals and Systems
Co- requisite(s):
Course type: Core
Class: B.E
Semester / Level: VII/IV
Branch: ECE
Name of Teacher:
Course Objectives
1 Basic understanding of control system and its types.
2 Represent any Linear system to using transfer function concept.
3 Explain the concept of system modelling.

4 Explain the time domain analysis to understand the behavior of linear
system/Nonlinear system.
5 Analyze the system using Frequency domain approach.
Course Outcomes
CO1 Basic understanding of control system and its types.
CO2 Represent any Linear system to using transfer function concept.
CO3 Explain the concept of system modelling.
CO4 Explain the time domain analysis to understand the behavior of linear
system/Nonlinear system.
CO5 Analyze the system using Frequency domain approach.
Page 285 of 465

SYLLABUS
(NO. OF
MODULE LECTURE
HOURS)
Module – I
MODULE – I Introduction:, Examples of control systems and applications, 6

Basic components of control systems, Open loop and closed loop control systems,
Effect of feedback on overall gain, Stability and external disturbances,
Classification of control system : Linear and nonlinear continuous and digital,
Time invariant and time varying, Minimum phase and non-minimum phase
systems etc. Linearization of nonlinear systems using Taylor’s series.
Module – II
Control System Components and Basic Control Actions: Sensors and encoders in 10
control system, Potentiometer, Tachometers, incremental encoders, Synchros,
Block Diagrams and Signal Flow Graph: Block diagrams of control systems,
Block diagram reduction, Signal Flow Graph (SFG) - Basic properties of SFG,
SFG algebra, Gain formula to SGP, Application of gain formula to block
diagrams.
Module – III
Time Response of Control Systems: Transient and steady state response, Time 8
response specifications, typical test signals, Steady state error, and error constant,
Stability- Absolute, relative and conditional stability, Dominant poles of transfer
function. Root Locus Methods: Root locus concept, Properties and construction
of root locus, Determination of relative stability from root locus, Root sensitivity
to parameter variation, Root contours, Systems with transportation lag and effect
of adding poles or zeros.
Module – IV
Concepts of State, State Variables: Development of state-space models. State and 10

state equations, State equations from transfer function Transfer function from
state equations, State transition matrix, Solution of State equation, Transfer
Matrix, State variables and linear discrete time systems, Controllable and
Page 286 of 465

observable State models, Asymptotic state observers. Control system design via
pole placement. Design of P, PI, PD and PID controllers.
Module – V
Bode Analysis and Introduction to Design: Frequency response specifications, 6

Correlation between time and frequency domain Bode plot, Determination of
stability using Bode plot, Introduction to compensation design using Bode plot.
Other Frequency Domain Tools: Nyquist stability criterion, Theory of Magnitude
phase plot, Constant M, constant N circle and Nichols chart.
Text Books:
1. I. J. Nagrath & Gopal, "Control Systems Engineering", 4th Edition New Age International
Publication.
2. K. Ogata, "Modern Control Engineering", 3rd Edition, Pearson Education.
Reference Books:
1. Norman Nise, "Control System Engineering, 4th Edition, Wiley.

2. Graham C. Goodwin, "Control System Design", PHI.
3. B. C. Kuo, "Automatic Control System", 7th Edition, PHI.
Direct Assessment

First Quiz 10
Second Quiz 10
Page 287 of 465

Indirect Assessment
Program
Specific
Outcomes
Outcome
(PSOs)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
CO1 2 2 3 3 2 3 1 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 2
CO2 2 2 3 3 2 3 1 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 2
CO3 2 2 3 3 2 3 1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2
CO4 2 2 3 3 2 3 1 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 2
CO5 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 3 3 2

CD8
Internets
CD9 Simulation
Page 288 of 465

Course Code: EC381

Course Title: Error Correcting Codes
Pre-requisite(s): ): Digital communication
Co- requisite(s):
Class: B. Tech.
Semester / Level: Six/Three
Name of Teacher:
Course Objectives
1. An understanding of Mathematical Preliminaries for error correcting codes and

fundamental knowledge of block codes.
2. An understanding of BCH and Reed-Solomon Codes with its applications.
3. Fundamental understanding on Convolutional codes & Viterbi decoding
4. Fundamental understanding on Trellis coded modulation.
5. Fundamental understanding on Modern iterative coding (Turbo codes and LDPC

codes).
Course Outcomes
CO1 Utilize the fundamental knowledge of block codes for concerned applications.
CO2 Demonstrate the BCH and Reed-Solomon Codes for practical applications.
CO3 Have an ability to demonstrate the Convolutional encoding with Vitebi decoding.
CO4 Have an ability to demonstrate Trellis coded modulation.
CO5 Have an ability to demonstrate the Modern iterative coding (Turbo codes and LDPC
codes).
Page 289 of 465

SYLLABUS
(NO. OF
MODULE LECTURE
HOURS)
Module – I 9
Mathematical Preliminaries and Block codes
Fields, groups, and subgroups; Binary Linear Block Codes; Singleton bound;
Hamming Bound; Sydrome decoding;
Module – II 9
BCH and Reed-Solomon Codes
BCH Codes; Reed-Solomon Codes; Decoding BCH and RS Codes; Finding the
Error Locator Polynomial: Berlekamp-Massey Algorithm; Non-Binary BCH and
RS Decoding: Forney’s Algorithm.
Module – III 8
Convolutional codes and Trellis coded modulation
Coding gain; ML and MAP decoders; Soft-versus hard-decision decoding;
Convolutional Codes: Encoders and Viterbi decoding; Trellis coded modulation.
Module – IV 8
Turbo codes
Encoders, Turbo decoder. Implementation aspects of turbo codes: MAP decoder
and MAXLOGMAP decoder for convolutional codes, design and architecture,
Turbo codes in the WiMax/3GPP standards.
Module – V 6
Low density parity check codes
Low-density Parity-check Codes: Ensembles of LDPC codes, Message-passing
decoders, Threshold phenomenon and density evolution. LDPC codes in the
WiMax standard.
Page 290 of 465

Text Books:
1. Error Correction Coding Mathematical Methods and Algorithms” by Todd K. Moon,
WileyIndia Edition.
2. “ErrorControl Coding, Second Edition”, by Shu Lin and D. J. Costello, Pearson Press,
2004.
Gaps in the Syllabus (to meet Industry/Profession requirements) :Nil
POs met through Gaps in the Syllabus: NA
Direct Assessment

First Quiz 10
Second Quiz 10
Indirect Assessment
Program
Specific
Outcomes
Outcome
(PSOs)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
CO1 3 1 3 2 1
CO2 3 3 1 3 2 2
CO3 3 3 1 3 2 1
CO4 3 3 1 3 2 3
CO5 3 3 1 3 1 1 2 3 2 2
Page 291 of 465


CD8
Internets
CD9 Simulation
Page 292 of 465

Course Code: EC 383

Course Title: DSP Architecture for VLSI
Pre-requisite(s): Electronic Devices, VLSI Systems, Digital Signal Processing
Co- requisite(s):
Class: B. Tech.
Name of Teacher:
Course Objectives
This course envisions imparting to students to:
1. Understand the concept of DSP, FIR filters and show the FPGA implementation
in DSP
2. Analyze transformation techniques and implement the FPGA.
3. Recognize the pipelining and parallel processing for IIR filters using FPGA.
4. Develop the algorithms for fast convolution and synchronous pipelining and implement
the FPGA.
5. Demonstrate the asynchronous pipelining using FPGA.
Course Outcomes
CO1 Recognize the concept of DSP, FIR filters and FPGA for DSP.
CO2 Demonstrate the transformation techniques and demonstrate the implementation
of FPGA.
CO3 Apply the knowledge of pipelining and parallel processing for IIR filters using
FPGA.
CO4 Develop the algorithms for fast convolution and synchronous pipelining using FPGA
CO5 Show the asynchronous pipelining using FPGA.
Page 293 of 465

SYLLABUS
(NO. OF
MODULE LECTURE
HOURS)
Module – I 8
An overview of DSP concepts: Pipelining of FIR filters. Parallel
processing of FIR filters, Pipelining and parallel processing for low
power, Combining Pipelining and Parallel Processing. FPGA
Architecture.
Module – II 8
Transformation Techniques: Iteration bound, Retiming, Folding and
Unfolding, Implementation of FGPA in DSP.
Module – III
8
Digital Filters: Pipeline interleaving in digital filters, Pipelining and
parallel processing for IIR filters, Low power IIR filter design using
pipelining and parallel processing, Pipelined adaptive digital filters.
Module – IV 8
Algorithms for fast convolution: Cook-Toom Algorithm, Cyclic

Convolution. Algorithmic strength reduction in filters and transforms:
Parallel FIR Filters, DCT and inverse DCT, Parallel Architectures for
Rank-Order Filters.
Module – V
Synchronous, Wave, and Asynchronous Pipelines: Synchronous
8
pipelining and clocking styles, clock skew and clock distribution in bit
level pipelined VLSI designs. Wave pipelining, constraint space diagram
and degree of wave pipelining, Implementation of wave-pipelined
systems, Asynchronous pipelining.
Page 294 of 465

Text Books:
1. K.K.Parhi, VLSI Digital Signal Processing Systems, John-Wiley, 2007
Reference Books:
1. U. Meyer -Baese, Digital Signal Processing with FPGAs, Springer, 2004
2. Wayne Burleson, Konstantinos Konstantinides, Teresa H. Meng, VLSI Signal
3. Processing,1996.
4. Richard J. Higgins, Digital signal processing in VLSI, 1990.
5. Sun Yuan Kung, Harper J. Whitehouse, VLSI and modern signal processing, 1985
6. Magdy A. Bayoumi, VLSI Design Methodologies for Digital Signal Processing, 2012
7. Earl E. Swartzlander, VLSI signal processing systems, 1986.
8. Recent literature in Optimizations of Digital Signal Processing Structures for VLSI.
POs met through Gaps in the Syllabus: PO8 will be met though report writing/presentation-
based assignment
Topics beyond syllabus/Advanced topics/Design: Teaching through latest research paper

Direct Assessment

First Quiz 10
Second Quiz 10
Indirect Assessment
Page 295 of 465

Program Specific
Course Program Outcomes (POs) Outcomes
Outcome (PSOs)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
CO1 3 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 2 3 2 3 3 1
CO2 3 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 2
CO3 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 2 2 2 2 3 3 2
CO4 3 3 3 2 3 3 2 2 2 3 2 2 3 3 1
CO5 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 3 2 2 3 2 3 3 1
Course Course Delivery

CDCode Course Delivery Methods
Outcome Method Used
CD8
Internets
CD9 Simulation
Page 296 of 465

Course Code: EC 385

Course Title: Physical Design Automation
Pre-requisite(s): Electronic devices, VLSI Systems
Co- requisite(s):
Class: B. Tech.
Semester / Level:
Name of Teacher:
Course Objectives
1. Recognize the requirement of VLSI design automation tools.

2. Analyze the layout compaction, placement and routing in Chip design
3. Understand the role of floor planning & routing in complex ICs design.
4. Utilize the capability of EDA tools for analysis, simulations and logic synthesis of
complex circuits.
5. Show the high level synthesis for development of hardware model
Course Outcomes
CO1 Recognize the importance of EDA tools for VLSI Circuit design.
CO2 Apply the knowledge of layout compaction, placement and routing for complex
chip design.
CO3 Develop a floor planning & routing skills for complex ICs design.
CO4 Utilize the capability of EDA tools for analysis, simulations and logic synthesis of
complex circuits.
CO5 Demonstrate the high level synthesis for development of hardware model
Page 297 of 465

SYLLABUS
(NO. OF
MODULE LECTURE
HOURS)
Module – I 7
VLSI Design Automation: Introduction of EDA Tools, algorithms and
system design, Structural and logic design, Transistor level design, Layout
design, Verification methods, Design management tools.
Module – II 9
Layout Design Techniques: Layout compaction, placement and routing,
Design rules, symbolic layout, Applications of compaction, Formulation
methods, Algorithms for constrained graph compaction, Circuit
representation, Wire length estimation, Placement algorithms, Partitioning
algorithms.
Module – III
Floor Planning and Routing: Floor planning concepts, Shape functions
and floor planning sizing, local routing. Area routing, Channel routing,
8
global routing and its algorithms.
Module – IV 8
Simulation and Logic Synthesis: Gate level and switch level modeling and
simulation, Introduction to combinational logic synthesis, ROBDD
principles, implementation, construction and manipulation, twolevel logic
synthesis.
Module – V 8
High-level Synthesis: Hardware model for high level synthesis, Internal
representation of input algorithms, Allocation, assignment and scheduling,
Scheduling algorithms, Aspects of assignment, High Level transformations.
Text Books:
1. S.H. Gerez, “Algorithms for VLSI Design Automation”, John Wiley, 1998.
2. N.A.Sherwani, “Algorithms for VLSI Physical Design Automation”, (3/e), Kluwer, 199.
Page 298 of 465

Reference Books:
1. S.M. Sait, H. Youssef, “VLSI Physical Design Automation”, World scientific, 1999.
2. M.Sarrafzadeh, “Introduction to VLSI Physical Design”, McGraw Hill (IE), 1996.
3. Recent literature in Physical Design Automation.
based assignment

Direct Assessment

First Quiz 10
Second Quiz 10
Indirect Assessment
Program Specific
Outcome (PSOs)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
CO1 3 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 2 3 2 2 3 2
CO2 3 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 2
CO3 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 2 2 2 2 2 3 1
CO4 3 3 3 2 3 3 2 3 2 3 2 2 2 3 1
CO5 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 3 2 2 3 2 2 3 1
Page 299 of 465


Outcome Method Used
CD8
Internets
CD9 Simulation
Page 300 of 465

Course Code: EC387

Course Title: Wireless Communication
Pre-requisite(s): ): Knowledge of analog and digital communication
Co- requisite(s):
Class: B. Tech.
Semester / Level: Six/Three
Name of Teacher:
Course Objectives
1. An understanding on functioning of wireless communication system and evolution of

different wireless communication systems and standards and various multiple access
techniques.
2. An understanding on cellular concept, cellular architecture and evolution of different
generations and standards for mobile cellular communication.
3. An ability to analyze different channel parameters, causes of impairments in signal
propagation and impairment removal techniques.
4. An ability to explain the architecture, functioning and protocols of various wireless
5. An ability to explain the capabilities and application of various wireless
communication networks
Course Outcomes
CO1 Demonstrate an understanding on functioning of wireless communication system and

evolution of different wireless communication systems and standards and various
multiple access techniques.
CO2 Demonstrate an understanding on cellular concept, cellular architecture and
evolution of different generations and standards for mobile cellular communication.
CO3 Analyze different channel parameters, causes of impairments in signal propagation

and impairment removal techniques.
CO4 Explain the architecture, functioning and protocols of various wireless
CO5 Explain the capabilities and application of various wireless communication networks.
Page 301 of 465

SYLLABUS
(NO. OF
MODULE LECTURE
HOURS)
Module – I
9
Overview of wireless communication
An overview of wireless communication, future vision, history of wireless
communication, EM spectrum, basic elements in wireless communication systems,
wireless communication system and standards: satellite communication system,
GPS, paging system, cordless phone, wireless local loop, RFID.
Module – II
9
Cellular communication and frequency reuse
General architecture of a cellular system, hand-off in a cellular system, co-channel
interference and adjacent channel interference, power control, evolution of mobile
cellular communication (1G, 2G. 2.5G, 3G and beyond), typical cellular standards
(AMPS, GSM, GPRS, WCDMA, LTE, concept of LTE-advanced.
Module – III
8
Mobile cellular environment
Multipath propagation and fading, free space propagation model, propagation path
loss, outdoor and indoor propagation models, channel parameters (delay spread,
doppler spread, coherence bandwidth, coherence time, LCR and ADF).
Module – IV
8
Wireless communication networks
Wireless personal area networks (Bluetooth, UWB and ZigBee), wireless local
area networks (IEEE 802.11, network architecture, medium access methods,
WLAN standards), wireless metropolitan area networks (WiMAX), Ad-hoc
wireless networks.
Module – V
6
Multiple access schemes
Duplexing schemes, FDMA, TDMA, SDMA, spread spectrum technique and
CDMA, OFDMA, ALOHA and CSMA.
Page 302 of 465

Text Books:
1.Vijay K Garg, “Wireless Communications and Networks”, Morgan Kaufmann Publishers an
Imprint of Elsevier, USA 2009 (Indian reprint)
Reference Books:
1. Simon Haykin and Michael Moher, “Modern Wireless Communications”, Parson

Education, Delhi, 2005
2. Sanjay Kumar, “Wireless Communication the Fundamental and Advanced Concepts” River
Publishers, Denmark, 2015 (Indian reprint).
Gaps in the Syllabus (to meet Industry/Profession requirements) :Nil
POs met through Gaps in the Syllabus: NA
Direct Assessment

First Quiz 10
Second Quiz 10
Indirect Assessment
Page 303 of 465

Program
Specific
Outcomes
Outcome
(PSOs)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
CO1 3 2 1 1 - - - - - - - 2 3 2 1
CO2 3 2 1 1 1 - - - - - - 2 3 2 2
CO3 3 2 2 2 2 - - - - - - 2 3 2 1
CO4 3 3 3 4 2 - - - - - - 2 3 2 3
CO5 3 3 3 4 2 - - - - - - 2 3 2 2

CD8
Internets
CD9 Simulation
Page 304 of 465

Course Code: EC389

Course Title: Radar Signal Analysis
Pre-requisite(s): Microwave Theory and Techniques
Co- requisite(s):
Class: B. Tech.
Semester / Level: Sixth/ third
Name of Teacher:
Course Objectives
1. To appraise an overview of Radar Systems.
2. To perceive the Target Detection, Pulse Integration and Pulse Compression
3. To grasp Matched Filter and Ambiguity Function-Analog and Discrete Coded

Waveforms.
4. To understand the concept of Radar Clutter.
5. To grasp the Doppler and Adaptive Array Processing
Course Outcomes
CO1 Able to explain the Radar Systems.
CO2 Able to demonstrate Target Detection, Pulse Integration and Pulse Compression
CO3 Able to explain Matched filter and Ambiguity Function-Analog and Discrete Coded
Waveforms
CO4 Able to demonstrate the Radar Clutter
CO5 Able to demonstrate the Doppler and Adaptive Array Processing
Page 305 of 465

SYLLABUS
(NO. OF
MODULE LECTURE
HOURS)
Module – I
Radar Systems (an overview): Range Measurements, Range Resolution, 10
Doppler Frequency, Coherence, The Radar Equation, Surveillance Radar
Equation, Radar Cross Section, Radar Equation with Jamming, Noise Figure
Effects of the Earth’s Surface on the Radar Equation, Atmospheric Attenuation,
Module – II
Target Detection, Pulse Integration and Pulse Compression: Target Detection 10
in the Presence of Noise, Probability of False Alarm, Probability of Detection,
Pulse Integration, Target Fluctuating, Probability of False Alarm Formulation for
a Square Law Detector, Probability of Detection Calculation, Computation of the
Fluctuation Loss, Cumulative Probability of Detection, Constant False Alarm
Rate (CFAR), Time-Bandwidth Product, Radar Equation with Pulse
Compression, Basic Principal of Pulse Compression, Correlation Processor,
Stretch Processor
Module – III
Matched Filter and Ambiguity Function: The Matched Filter SNR, Mean and 7
Variance of the Matched Filter Output, General Formula for the Output of the
Matched Filter, Waveform Resolution and Ambiguity, Range and Doppler
Uncertainty, Target Parameter Estimation, Examples of the Ambiguity
Function, Stepped Frequency Waveforms, Nonlinear FM Ambiguity Diagram
Contours, Interpretation of Range-Doppler Coupling in LFM Signals, Discrete
Code Signal Representation, Pulse-Train Codes, Phase Coding, Frequency
Codes, Ambiguity Plots for Discrete Coded Waveforms
Module – IV
Radar Clutter: Clutter Cross Section Density, Surface Clutter, Volume Clutter, 7
Clutter RCS, Clutter Spectrum, Moving Target Indicator (MTI), PRF Staggering,
MTI Improvement Factor, Subclutter Visibility, Delay Line Cancelers with
Optimal Weights
Module – V
Doppler and Adaptive Array Processing:CW Radar Functional Block 6
Diagram, Pulsed Radars, Introduction to Adaptive Array Processing, General
Arrays, Linear Arrays, Nonadaptive Beamforming, Adaptive Array Processing
Page 306 of 465

Text Books:
1. Bassem R. Mahafza, Radar Signal Analysis and Processing Using MATLAB, Chapman
and Hall/CRC, 2008.
Reference Books:
1. M.I. Skolnik, “Introduction to Radar Systems” 3/e, TMH, New Delhi, 2001
2. Nathanson, F. E., Radar Design Principles, New York, McGraw-Hill, 2nd Edition, 1991
3. Toomay, J. C., Radar Principles for the Non-Specialist, New York, Van Nostrand,
Reinhold, 1989
4. Buderi R., The Invention That Changed the World, New York, Simon and Schuster, 1996
5. R.J Sullivan, Radar foundation for imaging & advanced concepts, PHI, 2004.
6. Mark A Richards, Fundamentals of Radar Signal Processing,McGrah -Hill Company,
2005.
based assignment
Topics beyond syllabus/Advanced topics/Design : Teaching through paper
Direct Assessment

First Quiz 10
Second Quiz 10
Indirect Assessment
Page 307 of 465

Program
Specific
Outcomes
Outcome
(PSOs)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
CO1 3 3 3 2 2 1 1 3 2 3 3 3 3 2 1
CO2 3 3 3 2 2 1 1 3 2 3 3 3 3 2 2
CO3 3 3 3 2 2 1 1 3 2 3 3 3 3 2 1
CO4 3 3 3 2 2 1 1 3 2 3 3 3 3 2 3
CO5 3 3 3 2 2 1 1 3 2 3 3 2 3 2 2

CD8
Internets
CD9 Simulation
Page 308 of 465

Course Code: EC401

Course title: Industrial Electronics
Pre-requisite(s): EC253 Analog Electronics
Co- requisite(s):
Course type: Core
Class: B.E
Semester / Level: VII/IV
Branch: ECE
Name of Teacher:
Course Objectives
1 Understand the concepts of power semiconductor devices and their triggering

schemes.
2 Apply the concepts of control rectifiers for AC to DC power conversion.
3 Explain the commutation process in power semiconductor devices

4 Understand the operations of Inverter and Choppers
5 Design the DC and AC motor drives for speed control.
Course Outcomes
CO1 Describe the functionality of power semiconductor devices and their triggering
schemes.
CO2 Explain the concept of controlled rectifiers for AC to DC power conversion.
CO3 Explain the commutation process in power semiconductor devices
CO4 Demonstrate the operations of Inverter and Choppers
CO5 Design the DC and AC motor drives for speed control.
Page 309 of 465

SYLLABUS
(NO. OF
MODULE LECTURE
HOURS)
Module – I
Introduction 6
Silicon Controlled Rectifier (SCR), SCR construction, Two transistor analogy,
Characteristics, Gate characteristics, Different types of SCR. Construction and
characteristics of DIAC and TRIAC.
Triggering Schemes:
dv/dt, Thermal, Light and Gate Triggering, Gate triggering using R and RC firing
circuits, Firing circuit using UJT and 555 Timer, SCR protection.
Module – II
Controlled Rectifiers: 10
Analysis of single-phase Half Wave and Full Wave controlled rectifiers with
resistive load and RL load, Flywheel diode, Circuit operation of Half controlled
and fully controlled Bridge Rectifiers with Resistive and RL load. Three phase-
controlled Rectifiers; Circuit operation of three phase Half Wave and Full Wave
controlled Rectifier circuits. DC and AC Voltage Regulators, SMPS.
Module – III
Commutation: 8
Natural and Forced Commutation, Self-Commutation, Impulse Commutation,
Resonant Pulse Commutation, Complementary Commutation, Load Side
Commutation, Line Side Commutation.
Module – IV
Inverters: 10
Principle and operation, Inverter classification, Voltage and Current driven
Inverters, Single phase Inverters, Inverter circuits with Mc-Murray Commutation
and Mc-Murray Bedford Commutation.
Choppers:
Basic Chopper Circuit, Types of Choppers, Step up and step-down choppers,
Type A Chopper, Type B Chopper, Type C Chopper.
Module – V
DC and AC Motor Control: 6
DC Motor, One Quadrant and Two Quadrant Single Phase SCR Drive for DC
Motor, AC Motor, Speed Control Methods for Induction Motor, Cycloconverters.
Non-Motor Industrial Applications; Resistance Welding, Induction Heating,
Dielectric Heating.
Page 310 of 465

Text Books:
1. Power Electronics by P.C. Sen., Tata McGraw Hill
2. Power Electronics Circuits, Devices and Application, by Muhammad H.
Rashid
Reference Books:
Direct Assessment

First Quiz 10
Second Quiz 10
Indirect Assessment
Program
Specific
Outcomes
Outcome
(PSOs)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
CO1
CO2
CO3
CO4
CO5
Page 311 of 465



CD8
Internets
CD9 Simulation
Page 312 of 465

Course code: EC402

Course title: Communication Lab.
Pre-requisite(s): Analog Communication
Co- requisite(s): Digital Communication
Credits: L: 0 T: 0 P: 3 C: 1.5
Class: B. Tech.
Semester / Level: Seventh/Fourth
Branch: Electronics & Communication Lab
Name of Teacher:
Course Objectives:
21. To develop an understanding about the Analog Modulation Techniques, V-F
22. To develop an understanding about the signal sampling, quantization and its
reconstruction
23. To develop an ability to understand and design the various waveform coding
techniques
24. To develop an ability to evaluate and design various digital modulation Techniques
25. To develop an ability to evaluate and design Time Division Multiplexing
Technique
Course Outcomes:
CO1 Demonstrate understanding of the various Analog Modulation Techniques, V-F
CO2 Analyse the signal sampling, quantization and its reconstruction.
CO3 Design the generation and detection of various waveform coding techniques such
as PCM, DM and ADM
CO4 Design the modulators and demodulators for various digital modulation
techniques such as ASK, PSK, FSK, QPSK, and QAM
CO5 Design system for Time Division multiplexing Technique
Page 313 of 465

Syllabus

1.Name of the Experiment: Generation and detection of Amplitude Modulated
AIM-1: Generation and detection of Amplitude Modulated wave and calculation of percentage
modulation using ACL 01 and ACL 02 Kits
2. Name of the Experiment: : Generation and detection of Frequency Modulated wave

AIM-1: Generation and detection of Frequency Modulated wave using ACL 03 and ACL 04
FM trainer Kits
3.Name of the Experiment: Investigation of Signal Sampling and Reconstruction

AIM-1: Investigation of Signal Sampling and Reconstruction using DCL 01 Falcon kit
4.Name of the Experiment: Investigation of TDM system

AIM-1: Investigation of TDM system using DCL02 Falcon kit
5.Name of the Experiment: Investigation of practical PCM system

AIM-1: Investigation of practical PCM system using DCL03 and DCL04 Falcon kit
6.Name of the Experiment: Investigation of ASK, FSK, PSK modulation/demodulation

AIM-1: Design of ASK, PSK, FSK modulator/demodulator using trainer Kit
7. Name of the Experiment: Generation and detection of DSBSC

AIM-1: Generation and detection of DSBSC using ALTAIR Solid Thinking Embed/Comm
8. Name of the Experiment: Generation and detection of PAM, PWM, PPM

AIM-1: Design of PAM, PWM, PPM Modulation and Demodulation Systems using ALTAIR
Solid Thinking Embed/Comm
9. Name of the Experiment: Investigation of Delta Modulation system

ALTAIR Solid Thinking Embed/Comm
10. Name of the Experiment: Investigation of Delta Modulation and Adeptive Delta
Modulation system
ALTAIR Solid Thinking Embed/Comm
11. Name of the Experiment: Investigation of QAM modulation and demodulation

AIM-1: Design of QAM modulator/demodulator using ALTAIR Solid Thinking
Embed/Comm
12. Name of the Experiment: Investigation of QPSK modulation and demodulation

AIM-1: Design of QPSK modulator/demodulator using ALTAIR Solid Thinking
Embed/Comm
Page 314 of 465

Text Book:
1.“Principles of Communication Systems”, 2/e, by H. Taub and DL Schilling, Tata McGraw

Hills, ND.
2.“Communication Systems”, 4/e by Simon Haykin, John Wiley and Sons, Delhi.
Reference Books:
1.Simon Haykin, “Communication Systems”, Wiley Eastern Limited, New Delhi, 2016, 4/e.
2.J. Schiller, “Mobile Communication” 2/e, Pearson Education, 2012.
Direct Assessment

Attendance Marks 12
Lab Viva marks 20
Lab file Marks 12
Lab Quiz-I Marks 10
Page 315 of 465

Program
Specific
Outcomes
Outcome
(PSOs)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
CO1 3 3 3 3 3 1 1 1 1 2 1 3 2 2 1
CO2 3 3 3 3 3 1 1 1 1 2 1 3 2 2 1
CO3 3 3 3 3 3 1 1 1 1 2 1 3 2 2 1
CO4 3 3 3 3 3 1 1 1 1 2 1 3 2 2 1
CO5 3 3 3 3 3 1 1 1 1 2 1 3 2 2 1
CD Course
Code Delivery
Method Used
CD2 Tutorials/Assignments CO2 CD1, CD5

CD3 Seminars/ Quiz (s) CO3 CD1, CD5

CD9 Simulation
Page 316 of 465

Course code: EC403
Course title: Professional Practice Law & Ethics
Pre-requisite(s): The assumed knowledge for this course is fundamental knowledge in the branch
of Electronics and Communication engineering.
Co- requisite(s):
Credits: L:3 T:0 P:0
Class: B. Tech.
Semester / Level: VII/04
Branch: ECE
Name of Teacher:
Course Objectives
This course aims to develop
21. Vision for holistic technologies, production systems and management models towards
sustainable development in the field of electronics and communication engineering.
22. Understanding of human being and basic human aspirations.
23. Understanding of universal human values and professional ethics in the light of right
understanding.
24. An environmental awareness and acceptance of the responsibility in making

engineering decisions consistent with the safely, health and welfare of the society at
large
Page 317 of 465

25. Understanding of legal requirements related to working in the field electronics and
communication engineering.
Course Outcomes
CO1 Reflect vision of holistic technologies, production systems and management models
towards sustainable development in the field of electronics and communication
engineering.
CO2 Reflect understanding of human being and basic human aspirations
CO3 Understand universal human values and professional ethics in the light of right
understanding.
CO4 Reflect and understanding of environmental awareness and acceptance of the

responsibility in making engineering decisions consistent with the safely, health and
welfare of the society at large.
CO5 Understand the legal requirements related to working in the field electronics and
communication engineering.
Page 318 of 465

SYLLABUS
(NO. OF
MODULE LECTURE
HOURS)
Module – I 8
Human Values : Morals, values and ethics, integrity, work ethics, service
learning, civic virtue, respect for others, living peacefully, caring sharing honesty,
courage, valuing time, cooperation commitment, empathy, self confidence,
character, spirituality, introduction to Yoga and meditation for professional
excellence and stress management.
Module – II 8
Profession and Human Values: Values Crisis in contemporary society Nature of

values: Value Spectrum of a good life Psychological values: Integrated
personality; mental health Societal values: The modern search for a good society,
justice, democracy, secularism, rule of law, values in Indian Constitution.
Aesthetic values: Perception and enjoyment of beauty, simplicity, clarity Moral
and ethical values: Nature of moral judgments; canons of ethics; ethics of virtue;
ethics of duty; ethics of responsibility
Module – III 8
Engineering ethics : Sense of engineering ethics, variant of moral issues, types

of enquiry, moral dilemmas, moral autonomy, consensus and controversy, models
of professional roles, theories about right action, self interest, customs and
religions, use of ethical theories.
Page 319 of 465

Module – IV 8
Ethics of Profession: Engineering profession: Ethical issues in Engineering

practice, Conflicts between business demands and professional ideals. Social and
ethical responsibilities of Technologists, Codes of professional ethics. Whistle
blowing and beyond, Case studies.
Module – V 8
Basic understanding of the objectives and the expected contributions of the field
electronics and communication engineering for sustainable development.
Understanding of possible hazards in the field of electronics and communication
engineering. Company law and understanding of legal requirements related to
work, research and innovation in the field electronics and communication
engineering.
Text books:
1. Mike W Martin and Roland Schinzinger, Ethcs in enginberring< Tata McGraw Hill New
delhi, 2003
2. “Deborah Johnson, Ethical Issues in Engineering, Prentice Hall, Englewood Cliffs, New
Jersey 1991.
3. A N Tripathi, Human values in the Engineering Profession, Monograph published by IIM,
Calcutta.
4. Sanjay Kumar, “Healthy body and positive Mind (in Hindi),” National book trust, New,
2018.
3. Understanding of different judicial law of state and central governments.

3, 4, 12

Contemporary laws of the land
Page 320 of 465

2, 3, 4, 12
Direct Assessment

First Quiz 10
Second Quiz 10
Indirect Assessment
Program
Specific
Outcomes
Outcome
(PSOs)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
CO1 3 1 1 1 2 1 1 2 3 1 2
CO2 2 1 1 2 1 1 2 2 2 2
CO3 3 1 1 2 1 1 2 2 2 2
CO4 1 2 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 3 3 3
CO5 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 2 1 1 2 2 2 2
Page 321 of 465

CD Course Course Delivery Method

Code Outcome Used

CD3

CD4

CD8
CD9 Simulation
Page 322 of 465

Course Code: EC405
Course Title: Digital Image and Video Processing
Pre-requisite(s): Digital Signal processing.
Co-requisite(s):
Class: B. Tech.
Name of Teacher:
Course Objectives
1. To gain understanding on digital image formation, characteristics and its processing

steps.
2. To demonstrate the use of different spatial and frequency domain processing

techniques to improve the image quality.
3. To apply various segmentation and compression techniques of an image.
4. To introduce various image description and representation methods for computer

vision applications.
5. To understand the basic video processing and coding methods.
Course Outcomes
CO1 Develop an understanding on the image formation, pixel characteristics and video
processing step.
CO2 Have an ability to analyze the image quality using transformed and spatial domain
filters.
Page 323 of 465

CO3 Have an ability to segment and represent the image for computer vision tasks. Have
an ability to analyze the different image and video compression techniques and to
evaluate its performance.
CO4 Develop an ability to apply video segmentation, motion detection and coding
procedures.
CO5 Design the basic building blocks of image/video compression techniques
SYLLABUS
(NO. OF
MODULE LECTURE
HOURS)
Module – I 8
Fundamental steps in Digital Image Processing, Components of an Image

processing system, DigitalImage Representation, Basic relationship between
pixels, Basic Arithmetic/Logic operations on image: Image subtraction, Image
averaging, Color image processing fundamentals: Color Modules, RGB, HIS, Lab
colormodules, Convolution and Correlation theorem.
Module – II 8
Gray Level Transformations, Histogram Processing, Smoothing and Sharpening

with Spatial Domain Filters, Fourier Transform,Fast Fourier Transform, Discrete
Cosine Transform, Wavelet Transforms, Smoothing and Sharpening with
Frequency Domain filters, Homomorphic filtering, Pseudo Color Image
Enhancement, Introduction to Image Restoration.
Page 324 of 465

Module – III 8
Detection of Discontinuities, Point Detection, Line detection, Edge Detection,

Thresholding , Optimal Global and Adaptive thresholding, Region-based
Segmentation, Textural Images, Textural Feature extraction from Co-occurrence
matrices, Chain codes, Signatures, Boundary Segments, Skeletons, Boundary
Descriptors, Regional Descriptors.
Module – IV 8
Fundamentals of image compression, Redundancy, Image Compression Models,

Coding Theorems, Error-free Compression techniques like Variable- length
Coding and Lossless Predictive Coding, Lossy Compression techniques like
Lossy Predictive Coding and Wavelet Coding, Image Compression Standards.
Module – V 8
Fundamentals of Video Coding- Inter-frame redundancy, motion

estimationtechniques – full-search, fast search strategies, forward and backward
motion prediction, frame classification – I, P and B; Video sequence hierarchy –
Group of pictures, frames, slices, macro-blocks and blocks; Elements of a video
encoder and decoder; Video coding standards – MPEG and H.26X, Introduction
to Video Segmentation.
Text Books:
1. Digital Image Processing. 2/E by Rafael C. Gonzalez and Richard E. Woods. Pearson
Education.
2. Digital Image Processing and Analysis. by B. Chanda and D. Dutta Mujumdar PHI
Page 325 of 465

3. Ed. Al Bovik ,”Handbook of Image and Video Processing”, 2nd Edition, Academic Press,
2000.
Reference Books:
1. Fundamentals of Digital Image Processing. By Anil K. Jain, PHI Publication

2. Image Processing, Analysis and Machine Vision. Milan Sonka and Vaclav Hlavac.
3. A. M. Tekalp, “Digital Video Processing”, 2nd Edition, Prentice Hall, 2015.
NA
NA

2
Direct Assessment

First Quiz 10
Second Quiz 10
Indirect Assessment
Page 326 of 465

Program
Specific
Outcomes
Outcome
(PSOs)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
CO1 2 3 3 1 1 2 2 1 2 2
CO2 2 3 3 1 1 2 1 2 1 2 3
CO3 2 3 2 3 1 1 2 1 2 2 3 3
CO4 2 2 2 2 1 1 2 1 2 2 2 3
CO5 3 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 3 3 3


CD8
Internets
CD9 Simulation
Page 327 of 465

Course Code: EC406

Course Title: Image Processing Lab.
Pre-requisite(s): Digital Signal Processing Laboratory
Co- requisite(s):
Credits: L: 0 T: 0 P: 4 C: 2
Class: B. Tech.
Semester / Level: VII
Name of Teacher: Dr. P. P. Dash
Course Objectives
26. Learn MATLAB tools and DSP board (TMS320C6748) for image processing and
analysis.
27. Write MATLAB codes for image enhancement and image restoration.
28. Illustrate different digital filters for removing various kind of noise in image.
29. Evaluate the image processing techniques in DSP board (TMS320C6748).
30. Develop programming skill to implement classifier, object detector, etc. for
computer vision applications.
Course Outcomes
CO1 Write the programs in MATLAB and DSP board for image processing techniques.
CO2 Implement different techniques for image enhancement.
CO3 Design various digital filters for various image processing applications.
CO4 Apply the concept to do project work on various domains of computer vision, pattern
classification, pattern recognition etc.
CO5 Utilize their knowledge solve problems in industry and research where, they will be
in future.
Page 328 of 465

Page 329 of 465
SYLLABUS
Syllabus
Therefore, DIGITAL IMAGE AND VIDEO PROCESSING is the syllabus for the DIGITAL
IMAGE PROCESSING LAB. Following experiments are the guidelines for the students.
1. Familiarization with MATLAB toolboxes for Digital Image Processing.

2. Write and execute a program for geometric transformation of image using MATLAB
(a) Translation
(b) Scaling
(c) Rotation
(d) Shrinking
(e) Zooming
3. Write MATLAB codes for Pixel-wise transformation of a given image using the
operations:
a. Image Negative
b. Logarithmic transformation
c. Gray level Slicing
4. Write MATLAB codes for contrast enhancement of a given image using histogram
equalization.
5. Write programs for Image enhancement using spatial filters.
6. Finding the spectrum of a degraded image, identify image and noise spectrums and
measure the Signal-to-Noise Ratio (SNR) using MATLAB.
7. Write a MATLAB code for image compression using Huffman coding.
8. Write a program for Edge detection of the image using Sobel algorithm in DSP board
(TMS320C6748).
9. Write a program for Image Smoothing and Image Sharping using convolution functions in
DSP board (TMS320C6748).
10. Write a program in MATLAB for motion estimation in a video.
11. Mini project.
12. Mini project.
Page 330 of 465

Text Books:
2. Digital Image Processing using MATLAB. 2/E by Rafael C. Gonzalez and Richard E.
Woods. Pearson Education.
2. Digital Image Processing and Analysis. by B. Chanda and D. Dutta Mujumdar PHI
Reference Books:
4. Fundamentals of Digital Image Processing. By Anil K. Jain, PHI Publication

5. Image Processing, Analysis and Machine Vision. Milan Sonka and Vaclav Hlavac.
6. A. M. Tekalp, “Digital Video Processing”, 2nd Edition, Prentice Hall, 2015.
There is provision of doing mini projects based on industrial requirements and

applications.

NA


Direct Assessment

Day to day performance and Lab file Marks 30
Viva Marks 20
Lab quiz Marks 10
Lab quiz Marks 10
Indirect Assessment
Page 331 of 465

Program
Specific
Outcomes
Outcome
(PSOs)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
CO1 3 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 1 3 3 2 1 1
CO2 3 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 1 3 3 2 1 1
CO3 3 3 3 1 3 2 2 3 3 1 3 2 3 2 2
CO4 3 3 3 2 3 2 2 3 3 2 3 2 3 3 2
CO5 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 2 3 2 3 2 3

CD1, CD2, CD5,

CD1
CD1, CD2, CD5,

CD2
Page 332 of 465

CD1, CD2, CD3,
CD3 CD4, CD5, CD8,
Seminars CO3 CD9.
CD1, CD2, CD3,

CD4 CD4, CD5, CD8,
CD4, CD5, CD7,

CD5

CD8
Internets
CD9 Simulation
Page 333 of 465

Course Code: EC407

Course Title: Multi-Channel Signal Processing
Pre-requisite(s): Signal Processing Techniques, Time Frequency and Wavelet Transform,
Probability and Random Processes
Co- requisite(s):
Class: B. Tech.
Name of Teacher:
Course Objectives
1 To explain the concept of Source separation problem and impart knowledge on the
mathematical concept of Blind Source Separation.
2 To develop an ability to understand the concept of Blind Source Separation tool like
independent component analysis.
3 To develop an ability to evaluate the impact of mixing and de-mixing over BSS
algorithm.
4 To develop an ability to analyse the impact of higher orders statistics over BSS
algorithm.
5 To develop and ability to evaluate the performance of BSS algorithm in diverse

areas of application with the help of practical examples.
Course Outcomes
CO1 Demonstrate understanding on the Source separation problem and impart knowledge
on the mathematical concept of Blind Source Separation.
CO2 Describe and apply the concept of Blind Source Separation tool like independent
component analysis.
Page 334 of 465

CO3 Demonstrate understanding on the impact of mixing and de-mixing system over BSS
algorithm.
CO4 Analyse the impact of higher orders statistics over BSS algorithm.
CO5 Apply the BSS algorithm as preprocessing method before feature extraction over real
time signals
Page 335 of 465

SYLLABUS
(NO. OF
MODULE LECTURE
HOURS)
Module – I 8
Introduction to Multi-channel Signal Processing, Cocktail Party Problem, The

Geometry of Mixtures, Un-mixing Using the Inner Product, Principal Component
Analysis, Uncorrelatedness and whitening, Whitening transform, Robust
Prewhitening
Module – II 9
Blind Source Separation, Blind Source Separation via Generalized Eigenvalue

Decomposition, Methods using time structure, Separation by Autocovariances,
The AMUSE algorithm, The SOBI algorithms, Separation by non-stationarity of
variances, The SEONS algorithms, A fixed-point algorithm, Convolutive
Mixtures and Blind Deconvolution, Bussgang Methods, Cumulant-based
methods, The convolutive BSS problem, Natural gradient methods, Spatio-
temporal de-correlation methods
Module – III 12
Overview of Independent Component Analysis, ICA and Kolmogoroff

complexity, ICA by maximization of non-gaussianity, Non-gaussian is
independent, measuring non-gaussianity by kurtosis, Measuring non-gaussianity
by Negentropy, Gradient algorithm using Negentropy, ICA by maximum
Page 336 of 465

likelihood Estimation, The likelihood of the ICA model, Algorithms for
maximum likelihood Estimation, The Bell-Sejnowski Algorithm, The
INFOMAX Principle,
Module – IV
Sparse Representation, Sparse Signal Processing, Canonical Correlation

Analysis, Empirical Mode Decomposition, and Vibrational Mode Decomposition
Module – V 6
Spatial filters, Common Spatial Pattern, Application of CSP, BSS for practical
Application and its Ambiguity
Page 337 of 465

Text Books:
1. Independent Component Analysis by Aapo Hyvarinen, Juha Karhunen, Erkki Oja
A Wiley-Interscience Publication, JOHN WILEY & SONS, INC. New York.
2. Adaptive Blind Signal and Image Processing Learning Algorithms and Applications,
Andrzej Cichocki and Shun-ichi Amari, JOHN WILEY & SONS Ltd.
Reference Book:
1. EEG Signal Processing by Saied Sanei and J.A. Chambers. [John Wiley and Sons Ltd.
2. Toward Brain-Computer Interfacing by, Guido Dornhege, José del R. Millán Thilo
Hinterberger, Dennis J. McFarland, Klaus-Robert Müller. The MIT Press Cambridge,
Massachusetts London, England
Multi-Channel Signal Processing is an advance course; hence it only lays down the
foundation of multichannel biomedical signal processing, pattern recognition and classification
problem.

5. Application of Multi-Channel Signal Processing helps to analyze the multi-channel

biomedical signal.
6. Extraction of Pattern vector from independent components for the development of
decision support system for various applications.

Page 338 of 465

Direct Assessment

First Quiz 10
Second Quiz 10
Indirect Assessment
Program
Specific
Outcomes
Outcome
(PSOs)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
CO1 2 2 3 3 2 3 1 2 3 3 3 3
CO2 2 2 3 3 2 3 1 2 3 3 3 3
CO3 2 2 3 3 2 3 1 3 3 3 3 3
CO4 2 2 3 3 2 3 1 2 3 3 3 3
CO5 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

CD1, CD2, CD5,

CD1
Page 339 of 465

CD1, CD2, CD5,
CD2
CD1, CD2, CD3,

CD3 CD4, CD5, CD8,
Seminars CO3 CD9.
CD1, CD2, CD3,

CD4 CD4, CD5, CD8,
CD4, CD5, CD7,

CD5

CD8
Internets
CD9 Simulation
Page 340 of 465

.
Course code: EC 409

Course title: Fiber Optic Sensors
Pre-requisite(s): Knowledge of Semiconductor Devices, Basics of optical fibers
Class: B. Tech
Semester / Level: VII/ 4
Branch: ECE
Name of Teacher:
Course Objectives
1. To understand the sensing principle of fiber optic sensors
2. To understand the key characteristics of interferometric fiber optic sensors.
3. To understand the key properties of quasi distributed grating based and fully
distributed scattering based fiber optic sensors.
4. To understand practical applications of the optical fiber sensing technology.
Course Outcomes
CO1. Explain the key properties of fiber optic sensors.

CO2. Explain the operational characteristics of interferometric fiber optic sensors.
CO3. Design and develop the quasi distributed fiber optic sensors.
CO4. Design and develop the fully distributed fiber optic sensors
CO5. Apply the fiber optic sensors for particular applications.
Page 341 of 465

Syllabus
Module No. of
lecture
hours
Module - 1:
Basic Concept of fiber sensors, Classification of fiber sensors, Intensity modulated fiber
sensors, Extrinsic and Intrinsic sensors, Phase modulated fiber sensors, Wavelength 8
modulated fiber sensors, Polarization based sensors, Biophotonic sensors.
Module - 2:
Interferometric Fiber sensors, Mach-Zehnder Fiber sensor, Michelson interferometric
fiber sensor, Febry-Perot interferometric sensors (IFFPI, EFFPI), Sagnac interferometer,
Low coherence interferometric sensor, Signal Recovering and noise source in fiber
interferometry. 7
Module – 3:
Fiber Bragg Grating(FBG) theory and Fabrication, FBG sensing principles, Distributed
FBG sensor, FBG Interrogation systems, Edge filter techniques, Active tunable filter
techniques, Interrogation Using Mach–Zehnder Interferometer, FBG sensor multiplexing
techniques. 9
Module – 4:
Scattering based distributed fiber sensors, OTDR, Rayleigh scattering based OTDR
sensor, Raman scattering based OTDR sensor, Brillouin scattering based OTDR sensor,
Magnetic and electric field sensors, Intrinsic biophotonic sensors, Extrinsic biophotonic
sensors. 9
Module - 5:
Applications of fiber optic sensors in large concrete and smart structures, Load
Monitoring of Power Transmission Lines, Medicine, Chemical sensing, Fiber sensors in
Oil and Gas Industry, Applications in nuclear power industry.
7
Text books:
Page 342 of 465

T1. “Optical Fiber Sensors; Advanced Techniques and Applications” Ginu Rajan and
Krzysztof
Iniewski, CRC Press.
T2. “Fiber Optic Sensors; fundamentals and Applications”, David A Krohn, SPIE Press.
T3. “HANDBOOK OF OPTICAL FIBRE SENSING TECHNOLOGY” Jose Miguel Lopez-

Higuera, JOHN WILEY &
SONS, LTD
Ref. Books:
R1. “FIBER OPTIC SENSORS; An Introduction for Engineers and Scientists”, ERIC UDD
WILLIAM B. SPILLMAN,
JR., John Wiley & Sons
R2. “Fiber Optic Sensors, ”, S Yin, P Rufin, F T S Yu, CRC Press.
Gaps in the syllabus (to meet Industry/Profession requirements)

CD2 Assignments
Page 343 of 465

CD7 Simulation
Direct Assessment

First Quiz 10
Second Quiz 10
Course Program Outcomes Program

Specific
Page 344 of 465

Outcome Outcomes
s (PSOs)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
CO1 3 3 2 2 2 1 2 1 2 1 1 3 2 2
CO2 3 3 2 2 3 3 3 2 1 2 2 2 3 2 2
CO3 3 3 2 3 3 3 3 2 1 2 2 2 2 3 2
CO4 3 3 2 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 2 3 2 3 2
CO5 3 3 2 3 3 2 3 2 2 2 3 2 3 2 3
1: Low 2: Medium 3: High
Page 345 of 465

Course code: EC411

Course title: Mixed Signal Design
Electronic Devices
Co- requisite(s):
Credits: L: 3 T: 0 P: 0 C: 3
Class: B. Tech.
Branch: ECE
Name of Teacher:
Course Objectives
1. Understand the basics of sampling theory.
2. Interpret the Mixed-Signal Design Trends and Challenges and apply the perceived
knowledge.
3. Appraise and analyse the analog filters.
4. Design and Evaluate the characteristics of discrete time filters.
5. Create/develop the data converters.
Course Outcomes
CO1 Describe and illustrate the basics of Analog and Discrete Time Signals
CO2 Sketch and explain the mixed-signal design trends and challenges.
CO3 Diagram and explain the analog.
CO4 Design, diagram and explain discrete time filters.
CO5 Design and schematize different types of data converters, schematize their
Page 346 of 465

SYLLABUS
(NO. OF
MODULE LECTURE
HOURS)
Module – I 8
Basics Sampling and Aliasing:

Sampling: Impulse Sampling, Decimation, The Sample-and-Hold (S/H), The
Track-and-Hold (T/H), Switched-Capacitor Circuits, Non-Overlapping Clock
Generation, Circuits: Implementing the S/H. Performance of sample-and-hold
circuits, MOS sample-and-hold basics, examples of CMOS S/H circuit.
Module – II 8
Mixed-Signal Design Trends and Challenges:

Design flow: Top-down design, Bottom-up Design, Constraint Management,
Mixed-Signal Verification, Behavioral Modeling, Mixed-Signal Hardware
Description Languages, Low Power Verification, Design for Test, Mixed-Signal
layout & Chip Planning, Interconnects and data transmission, Substrate Noise,
AMS IP Reuse, Full-chip Signoff, IC/Package Co-Design.
Module – III 8
Page 347 of 465

Analog Filters:
Integrator Building Blocks: Low pass Filters, Active-RC Integrators, MOSFET-
C Integrators, gm-C (Transconductor-C) Integrators, A High-Frequency
Transconductor, Filtering Topologies.
Module – IV 8
Digital Filters:
Sinc-Shaped Digital Filters: The Counter, Low pass Sinc Filters, Bandpass and
Highpass Sinc Filters, Interpolation using Sinc Filters, Decimation using Sinc
Filters, Filtering Topologies: FIR Filters, Stability and Overflow, The Bilinear
Transfer Function, The Canonic Form (or Standard Form) of a Digital Filter.
Module – V 8
Data Converters:
Basics of Analog to digital converters (ADC), Basics of Digital to analog
converters (DAC), ADCs: Successive approximation ADCs, Dual slope ADCs,
Flash ADC, Delta-sigma ADC, DACs: Resistor string, R-2R Ladder networks,
Current steering, Charge scaling DACs, Cyclic DAC, Pipelined DACs.
Textbooks:
5. CMOS mixed-signal circuit design by R. Jacob Baker, Wiley India, IEEE press, reprint
2008.
6. CMOS circuit design, layout and simulation by R. Jacob Baker, Revised second edition,
IEEE press, 2008.
7. Design of analog CMOS integrated circuits by Behzad Razavi, McGraw-Hill, 2003.
8. Mixed-Signal Methodology Guide, by Jess Chen et al., First Edition, September 11, 2014.
9. Tony Chan Carusone, David A. Johns and Kenneth W. Martin, Analogue Integrated Circuit
Design, 2/e, John Wiley & Sons, 2012.
Page 348 of 465

Reference books:
1. CMOS Integrated ADCs and DACs by Rudy V. dePlassche, Springer, Indian edition, 2005.
2. Electronic Filter Design Handbook by Arthur B. Williams, McGraw-Hill, 1981.
3. Design of analog filters by R. Schauman, Prentice-Hall 1990 (or newer additions).
4. An introduction to mixed-signal IC test and measurement by M. Burns et al., Oxford
university press, first Indian edition, 2008.

10

1. RF circuits.

10
Direct Assessment

First Quiz 10
Second Quiz 10
Indirect Assessment
Page 349 of 465

Program
Specific
Outcomes
Outcome
(PSOs)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
CO1 2 2 2 1 1 1 2 1 2 2 2 1
CO2 3 3 3 3 1 2 1 3 2 2 3 3 3 1
CO3 3 3 3 3 1 2 1 3 2 2 3 3 3 1
CO4 2 3 2 1 1 1 3 1 2 2 3 2 1
CO5 3 3 2 3 3 3 1 1 2 3 2 1


CD8
Internets
CD9 Simulation
Page 350 of 465

Course Code: EC413

Course Title: Real Time Embedded System
Pre-requisite(s): Fundamental knowledge of VLSI Design, Digital Electronics, Signal
Processing, Communication Systems
Co- requisite(s):
Class: B. Tech.
Name of Teacher:
Course Objectives
1. Define the fundamental of embedded systems

2. Show the correlation between hardware & software in embedded system
3. Develop the suitable software for embedded system as per demand of present
market.
4. Design the highly secure optimized embedded systems
5. Develop the tool and techniques for the development of real time system
Course Outcomes
CO1 Recognize the interfacing and integration of component in SoC.

CO2 Design the highly secure ATM.
CO3 Develop the programmable kit to check the entire components in a board.
CO4 Develop the embedded systems & corresponding software as per demand of
current market.
CO5 Demonstrate the tool and techniques for the development of real time system
Page 351 of 465

SYLLABUS
(NO. OF
MODULE LECTURE
HOURS)
Module – I
Custom Input/Output Interfacing with VHDL and FPGA kit::
Optical Display Interfacing, Buzzer Control, Liquid Crystal Display

Interfacing, General-Purpose Switch Interfacing, Optical Sensor 9
Interfacing,
Module – II
Interfacing Digital Logic to the Real World with VHDL and FPGA
kit: 7
Basics of Signal Conditioning for Sensor Interfacing, Principles of Sensor

Interfacing and Measurement Techniques, Multichannel Data Logging.
Module – III
Real-World Control Device Interfacing with VHDL and FPGA kit:
Relay, Solenoid Valve, Opto-Isolator, and Direct Current Motor 8

Interfacing and Control, Servo and BLDC Motor Interfacing and Control,
Stepper Motor Control.
Module – IV
Introduction to IoT: 8
What is the Internet of Things (IoT)? Potential IoT Applications, IoT

Enabling Technologies: Sensors and Actuators, RFID and NFC (Near‐
Field Communication), LiFi, ZigBee.
Module – V
Application of IoT:
Digital Inputs and Outputs, Analog Inputs and Outputs, Accelerometer and
Magnetometer, Digital Interfaces, Networking and Communications.
8
Page 352 of 465

Textbooks:
1. A. Arockia Bazil Raj, “FPGA based embedded system developer's guide”, Taylor &
Francis, CRC Press, 2018.
2. Perry Xiao, “Designing Embedded Systems and the Internet of Things (IoT) with the
ARM Mbed”, John Wiley & Sons Ltd., 2018.
Reference Books:
1. Ronald Sass, Andrew G. Schmidt, “Embedded Systems Design with Platform FPGAs -
Principles and Practices, Morgan Kaufmann Publishers, 2010.
2. Peter Marwedel, “Embedded System Design: Embedded System, Foundations of Cyber-
Physical Systems, and the internet of Things", 3rd edition, Springer International, 2018.
based assignment

Direct Assessment

First Quiz 10
Second Quiz 10
Indirect Assessment
Page 353 of 465

Program Specific
Outcome (PSOs)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
CO1 3 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 2 3 2 2 2 3
CO2 3 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 3
CO3 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 2 2 2 2 3 3 3
CO4 3 3 3 2 3 3 2 3 2 3 2 2 3 3 3
CO5 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 3 2 2 3 2 3 3 3

CD3 Seminars CO3 CD1, CD2 ,CD3

CD8
CD9 Simulation
Page 354 of 465

Course Code: EC414

Course Title: Real Time Embedded System Design Lab
Pre-requisite(s): Fundamental knowledge of VLSI Design, Digital Electronics
Co- requisite(s):
Class: B. Tech.
Name of Teacher:
Course Objectives
1. Recognize the programmable hardware and its programming.

2. Develop an ability to write 8051based assembly language/ C programs.
3. Write the program for different-2 on-chip peripherals to work with
Microcontroller.
4. Develop industrial potentials to develop product in prototype as per demand of
market.
5. Develop the tools and techniques for complex chip design & debugging
Course Outcomes
CO1 Recognize the concept of programmable hardware and its programming.

CO2 Recognize to write 8051based assembly language/ C programs.
CO3 Write the efficient program for various on-chip peripherals to work with
Microcontroller.
CO4 Develop industrial competency to develop product in prototype as per demand
of market and capability to debug the complex chip problems.
CO5 Demonstrate the tool and techniques for the design & debugging the complex
chip
Page 355 of 465

List of Experiments
1. Design a 2-bit adder using System Generator on Xilinx ISE 10.1i. Synthesize the circuit,
download the configuration file to the prototyping board (use use Spartan-3E Starter kit) and
verify its operation with Chip Scope Pro.
2. Design a 4-bit Johnson counter using Verilog on Xilinx ISE 10.1i. Synthesize the circuit,
download the configuration file to the prototyping board (use Xilinx XC9572 CPLD in
Milman VLSI Trainer kit) and verify its operation.
3. Design a circuit to implement GCD (greatest common divisor) algorithm using Verilog on
Xilinx ISE 8.1i. Synthesize the circuit, download the configuration file to the prototyping
board (use Spartan-3E Starter kit) and verify its operation.
4. Develop a digital system to display “DIAT” on a multi-segment LED display panel. The
scrolling of the word has to be in the right-to-left direction. Assume each segment of the
LED display panel has eight rows and eight columns.
5. Develop a digital system to display digital pulses on pages 1 and 6 of a GLCD. Use both
segments and display two cycles in each page. Use the onboard DIP switch for resetting the
GLCD.
6. Outline and write a VHDL/Verilog code for designing a 2-bit adder using System Generator.
Test your VHDL/Verilog code by simulating it, find error, if any; synthesize the error free
RTL code; experiment your design downloading the configuration file into the Xilinx
XC9572 CPLD in Milman VLSI Trainer kit /Spartan-3E Starter kit and verify its operation
without Chip Scope Pro.
7. Sixteen LEDs are connected to the FPGA in common cathode configuration. Develop
VHDL/Verilog code to make the first eight LEDS glow in a downward direction while the
other eight LEDs glow in an upward direction. This has to happen five times; then all the
LEDs have to blink two times. Simulate your VHDL/Verilog code, find error, if any;
synthesize the error free RTL code; experiment your design downloading the configuration
file into the Xilinx XC9572 CPLD in Milman VLSI Trainer kit and show the results.
8. Develop a digital system in FPGA to drive a buzzer at different duty cycles 0%, 40%, 80%,
and 100% whenever the input (data_in) is (0 ≤ data_in ≤ 10), (10 < data_in ≤ 100), (100 <
data_in ≤ 200) and (200< data_in), respectively. Assume that the inputs are given via a port
of eight bits. Simulate your VHDL/Verilog code, find error, if any; synthesize the error free
RTL code; experiment your design downloading the configuration file into the Xilinx
XC9572 CPLD in Milman VLSI Trainer kit and show the results.
9. Develop a digital system in the FPGA to control appliances from a remote station using
DTMF (Dual-Tone Multifrequency Decoder) tones as per the following requirements.
a) There are nine electrical appliances that have to be controlled.
b) DTMF tone “0” has to be used to switch off all the appliances.
Page 356 of 465

c) DTMF tone data (1–9) have to be used to select a particular appliance.
d) “*” and “#”, that is, A (“1010”) and C (“1100”), have to be used to switch
the appliances “on” and “off”, respectively.
10. Develop a FPGA-based digital system to continuously monitor and automatically fill the
chemical fluid in a tank. A proximity sensor is placed inside the tank so as to get IR radiation
reflected back to the phototransistor from the chemical fluid surface. The output of the
phototransistor is given to an 8-bit A/D convertor. Hence, the fluid level is measured by A/D
and given to the FPGA via 8-bit data. The system has to indicate the fluid level in the first
row of an LCD and switch on the fluid inlet motor if the level goes below “00001111”.
11. Write a program to read two digital inputs from pins D6 and D7, performs the logical AND,
and sets it to D9 pin for output.
12. Write a program to read the analog input from pin A0, multiply it by 10, and set it to the
analog output pin DAC0_OUT for output.
Optional Experiments
13. Write a program, so that it can create a sine wave on the analog output pin DAC0_OUT pin.
14. Write a program to read both the accelerometer and the magnetometer values.
15. Write program to read lowercase characters from a computer serial port, convert them to
uppercase, and echo them back.
16. Write a program read three integer numbers from computer serial port; numbers are separated
by “ , ”.
17. Write a program to read characters from a computer serial port, send them to the device serial
interface (D4, D5), and vice versa.
18. Write a program so that one FRDM‐K64F board can communicate with another FRDM‐
K64F board (or LPC1768 board) through a serial interface (D4, D5).
19. Write two programs so that the SPI server can read the digital input pin D0 and send a value
to SPI clients.
20. Write two programs so that the I2C server can send 10 data to I2C clients.
21. Write a program to read the analog pin A0, and sends the value to CAN1 (Controller Area
Network).
22. Write a program to read the analog inputs A0, A1, A2 and display the values as a table in
HTTP body message.
23. Write TCP client/server programs so that the server receives the message from the client,
changes it to uppercase, then echoes it back to the client.
24. Write UDP client/server programs so that the server reads the digital pin D0 and sends the
value to the client.
25. Write a program to continuously read the temperature sensor values and send it to the
WebSocket server.
Page 357 of 465

Textbooks:
3. A. Arockia Bazil Raj, “FPGA based embedded system developer's guide”, Taylor &
Francis, CRC Press, 2018.
4. Perry Xiao, “Designing Embedded Systems and the Internet of Things (IoT) with the
ARM Mbed”, John Wiley & Sons Ltd., 2018.
Reference Books:
3. Ronald Sass, Andrew G. Schmidt, “Embedded Systems Design with Platform FPGAs -
Principles and Practices, Morgan Kaufmann Publishers, 2010.
4. Peter Marwedel, “Embedded System Design: Embedded System, Foundations of Cyber-
Physical Systems, and the internet of Things", 3rd edition, Springer International, 2018.
based assignment

1. Teaching through latest research paper
1. Teaching through paper
Direct Assessment

Progressive Evaluation 60
End Sem Evaluation 40
Indirect Assessment
Page 358 of 465

Program Specific
Outcome (PSOs)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 122 13 14 15
CO1 3 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 2 3 2 3 3 3
CO2 3 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 2
CO3 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 2 2 2 2 3 3 3
CO4 3 3 3 2 3 3 2 3 2 3 2 2 3 3 1
CO5 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 3 2 2 3 2 3 3 3

Outcome Method Used
CD3 Seminars CO3 CD1,CD2,CD3
Page 359 of 465

Self- learning such as use of NPTEL Materials
CD8
and Internets
CD9 Simulation
Course Code: EC415

Course Title: Semicustom IC Design
Pre-requisite(s): Fundamental knowledge of VLSI Design, Digital Electronics, Fabrication
Process & IC Technology, Embedded System Design, Coding of VHDL, Verilog, C/C++
Co- requisite(s): VHDL / Verilog
Class: B. Tech.
Name of Teacher:
Course Objectives
1. Demonstrate the structure of semicustom integrated circuit, semicustom selection

techniques, supplier & design route
2. Elaborate the circuit design techniques &logics design using ASM method
Page 360 of 465

3. Show the programmable logic array implementation and methodology, and
demonstrate the PLA and ROM based design
4. Explore the CAD and design automation and simulation techniques
5. Demonstrate the partitioning, placement, automated layout & design for

testability
Course Outcomes
CO1 Show the structure of semicustom integrated circuit, semicustom selection

techniques, supplier & design route
CO2 Illustrate the circuit design techniques &logics design using ASM method
CO3 Demonstrate the programmable logic array implementation and methodology,

and explain the PLA and ROM based design
CO4 Elaborate the CAD and design automation and simulation techniques
CO5 Demonstrate the partitioning, placement, automated layout & design for
testability
Page 361 of 465

SYLLABUS
(NO. OF
MODULE LECTURE
HOURS)
Module – I
Structure of semicustom integrated circuit, semicustom selection

techniques, supplier & design route:
Introduction to semicustom integrated circuit, gate arrays, cell based

systems, programmable logic devices, analogue component arrays, 9
semicustom techniques, choice of semicustom techniques, choice of
semicustom suppliers, choice of entry point and design route.
Module – II
Circuit design techniques &logics design using ASM method:
7
Custom design, design techniques-BJT, design technique-MOS, design
time scales, semicustom gate arrays & cell based, ASM design approach,
algorithm of solution, timing, external signals, controller description, state
assignment.
Module – III
Programmable logic array implementation and methodology, PLA

and ROM based design:
8
Implementation of NMOS & CMOS layout, the PLA as structure, cost
performance improvement (multi level PLA’s folding, performance) ,
finite state machine; state table, gate based design(random logic,
multiplexers), programmable logic array(PLAs, FPLAs, logic PAL),
extending and component capability.
Module – IV
CAD and design automation and simulation techniques: 8
Use of computer in design, benefits of CADs, CAD for semicustom ICs,

placement, tracking or routing, test generation, input and CAE
Page 362 of 465

workstations, verification and simulations, timing verifications, cells and
verifications, levels of simulations, a review of techniques employed in
logic simulation.
Module – V
Partitioning, placement, automated layout & design for testability :
Partitioning( regularity & number of interconnects), auto layout(

placement, routing, hierarchical routing, design of testability, test strategy
requirements in VLSI design, partitioning for testability, self-test, built-in 8
test, scan path, signature analysis, built-in logic block
observation(BILBO), testability in semicustom circuits.
Text Books:
1.P.J. Hicks, “Semicustom IC Design & VLSI”, Peter Peregrinus, Ltd, 1983.
2.Jack Ganssle, "The Art of Designing Embedded Systems", Newnes, 1999.
Reference Books:
1. M. Sarrafzadeh, “Introduction to VLSI Physical Design”, McGraw Hill (IE), 1996.

2. Recent literature in Physical Design Automation.
based assignment

Page 363 of 465

Direct Assessment

First Quiz 10
Second Quiz 10
Indirect Assessment
Program Specific
Outcome (PSOs)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
CO1 3 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 2 3 2 3 3 32
CO2 3 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 2
CO3 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 2 2 2 2 3 3 2
CO4 3 3 3 2 3 3 2 3 2 3 2 2 3 3 1
CO5 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 3 2 2 3 2 3 3 3
Page 364 of 465


Outcome Method Used

CD8
Internets
CD9 Simulation
Page 365 of 465

Course Code: EC419

Course Title: Satellite Communication
Pre-requisite(s): ): Knowledge of Communication process, basic understanding of interference
and noise in communication process, basic understanding of communication media.
Co- requisite(s):
Class: B. Tech.
Semester / Level: Sixth/Third
Name of Teacher:
Course Objectives
31. An understanding on Satellite communication system
32. An ability to evaluate the impact of interference on the satellite communication and
complete link design.
33. An ability to analyze different system parameters, causes of impairments in

satellite communication system
34. An understanding of Multiple access techniques to support satellite communication

and special satellite systems
35. An understanding on Satellite system, satellite sub system and earth station.
Course Outcomes
CO1 Demonstrate an understanding on orbital and functional principles of satellite

Communication
CO2 Architect, Interpret and select appropriate technologies for implementation of

specified satellite communication sytems.
Page 366 of 465

CO3 Analyze and evaluate a satellite link and suggest enhancements to improve the link
performance
CO4 Demonstrate an understanding of advancement and multiple access techniques to

support satellite communication. And various satellite systems
CO5 Demonstrate an understanding on Satellite system, Satellite sub system and Earth
station system.
Page 367 of 465

SYLLABUS
MODULE (NO. OF
LECTURE
HOURS)
Module – I 10
An overview of satellite communication:

Satellite orbits, kepler’s law, Orbital Elements, Look Angles, Orbital
perturbation, Coverage angle, slant range, Eclipse effect, Sun transit outage,
Placement of a satellite in a geostationary orbit, Multistage rocket launchers and
their Performance (trichy), Station keeping and Stabilization
Module – II 7
Basic transmission theory:

Friss transmission equation, EIRP, Completion Link design, System noise
temperature G/T ratio, Noise figure and Noise temperature.
Module – III 7
Communication Satellite Sub-systems:
Space Platform (Bus) and Communication Subsystem (Payload), Satellite

Antennas, Frequency reuse Antennas, Earth station antennas, Tracking,
Equipment for earth stations, Equipment Reliability and Space qualification
Module – IV 10
Multiple Access Techniques:

Analog Satellite Communication Vs Digital Satellite Communication, Multiple
Access Techniques, FDMA Concept, MCPC & SCPC, TDMA frame efficiency
and super frame structure, Frame Acquisition and Synchronisation, CDMA
Page 368 of 465

concept, PN system, Spread spectrum, DSSS, DS CDMA, FHSS, FH CDMA.
Demand Assignment Multiple Access, Digital Speech Interpolation and SPADE.
Module – V 6
Special Purpose Satellite:
INTELSAT, INMARSAT, Direct Broadcast Satellite, Very Small Aperture

Terminal Networks, Mobile Satellite Networks and Global Positioning Satellite
system
Text Books:
1. T. Pratt & C. W. Bostian, Satellite Communication.

2. Tri T. Ha, Digital Satellite communication, McGraw Hill.
Reference Books:
1. Dennis Roddy, Satellite Communication, McGraw Hill

Topics beyond syllabus/Advanced topics/Design :
Direct Assessment

First Quiz 10
Page 369 of 465

Second Quiz 10
Indirect Assessment
Program
Specific
Outcomes
Outcome
(PSOs)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
CO1 3 1 1 2 1 - - - - - - 2 3 2 1
CO2 3 3 3 2 1 - - - - - - 1 3 2 2
CO3 3 3 2 2 2 - - - - - - 1 3 2 1
CO4 3 2 1 1 1 - - - - - - 1 3 2 3
CO5 3 1 1 2 1 - - - - - - 2 3 2 2

Page 370 of 465


CD8
Internets
CD9 Simulation
Page 371 of 465

Course code: EC420

Course title: Advanced Communication Lab
Pre-requisite(s): Knowledge of analog and digital communication
Co- requisite(s):
Credits: L: 0 T: 0 P: 3 C: 1.5
Class: B. Tech.
Course Objectives:
26. Find geographical position using survey plotting with the help of GPS system
27. Configure different wireless communication systems and evaluate their
functioning
28. Design micro strip patch antenna
29. Evaluate the impact of path loss and shadowing in estimation of received signal
power
30. Configure ZigBee Module
Course Outcomes:
CO1 Find geographical position using survey plotting with the help of GPS system
CO2 Configure different wireless communication systems and evaluate their
functioning
CO3 Design micro strip patch antenna
CO4 Evaluate the impact of path loss and shadowing in estimation of received signal
power
CO5 Have an ability to Configure ZigBee Module
Page 372 of 465

Syllabus
1. Name of the Experiment: PN sequence

AIM-1: Study the PN sequence and examine Gold code with variable sequence length and
analyse its correlation. Also set up voice communication using DSSS scheme using CDMA
trainer kit (ST-2131-A).
2. Name of the Experiment: GPS satellite

AIM-1: Set up a link between GPS satellite and GPS trainer kit (ST-2276), and measure the
present position.
3. Name of the Experiment: GPS Survey plotting.

AIM-1: Using GPS system, study the graphical representation of geographical position using
Survey plotting.
.
4. Name of the Experiment: RFID system
AIM-1: Study of RFID system and its applications.
5. Name of the Experiment: ALOHA protocols

AIM-1: Study of pure ALOHA and slotted ALOHA protocols for WLAN System.
6. Name of the Experiment: ZigBee module

AIM-1: Configure ZigBee module as an end device and, set up a communication link with
two ZigBee modules.
7. Name of the Experiment: GPRS system

AIM-1: Study the GPRS system and use it for sending an e-mail through WI-GPRS trainer.
8. Name of the Experiment: GSM AT commands

AIM 1: Study the GSM modem and its different module for phone book, setting up a call,
sending SMS and identifying call history using AT commands.
Page 373 of 465

9. Name of the Experiment: Interfacing of GSM modem
AIM 1: Interfacing of GSM modem with control unit.
10. Name of the Experiment: LTE 2x2 MIMO system

AIM 1: Setting up of LTE 2x2 MIMO system for establishing two way communication.
11. Name of the Experiment:, Design of rectangular micro strip patch antenna using
IE3D
AIM 1: Using IE3D, design a rectangular micro strip patch antenna for inset feed for operating
frequency of 1.88 GHz, relative permittivity of 4.4 and length of 31 mils.
12. Name of the Experiment: Estimation of path loss and shadowing

AIM 1: Evaluate the impact of path loss and shadowing in estimation of received signal power
in mobile cellular communication using Virtual Lab for Fading Channels.
Text Book:
2. Vijay K. Garg, “Wireless Communications and Networks”, Morgan Kaufmann

Publishers an Imprint of Elsevier, USA 2009 (Indian reprint).
Reference Books:
3. Simon Haykin, “Communication Systems”, Wiley Eastern Limited, New Delhi,

2016, 4/e.
Page 374 of 465

Direct Assessment

Attendance Marks 12
Lab Viva marks 20
Lab file Marks 12
Lab Quiz-I Marks 10
Program
Specific
Outcomes
Outcome
(PSOs)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
CO1 3 3 - - 3 - - - - 3 - 1 2 2 1
CO2 3 - - 3 - - - - 3 - 1 2 2 1
3
CO3 3 3 3 - 3 - - - - 3 - 1 2 2 1
CO4 3 3 1 - 3 - - - - 3 - 1 2 2 1
Page 375 of 465

CO5 3 3 3 - 3 - - - - 3 - 1 2 2 1
CD Course Delivery
Code Method Used



CD9 Simulation
Page 376 of 465

Course Code: EC421

Course Title: Bio-Medical Electronics & Signal Processing
Pre-requisite(s): Signal Processing Techniques, Time Frequency and Wavelet Transform,
Probability and Random Processes, Multichannel Signal Processing
Co- requisite(s):
Class: B. Tech.
Name of Teacher:
Course Objectives
36. Understand the fundamentals of Digital Signal Processing and Biomedical Signal
Processing.
37. Grasp the concept of stochastic processes to develop advanced Biomedical signal
processing concept.
38. Comprehend Digital Signal Processing and Biomedical Signal Processing.
39. Grasp how to integrate the concept of matrix algebra, probability models, random
processes and linear algebra to Separate information Source using Spatial filters.
40. To develop and ability to evaluate the performance of BSS algorithm in diverse
areas of application with the help of practical examples.
Course Outcomes
CO1 Distinguish Digital Signal Processing and Biomedical Signal Processing.
CO2 Use the concept of stochastic processes to develop advanced Biomedical signal
processing concept.
Page 377 of 465

CO3 Analyse Biomedical signals using PCA, BSS and ICA to separate or decorrelate the
Multichannel Biomedical Signal.
CO4 Integrate the concept of matrix algebra, probability models, random processes and
linear algebra to develop Spatial filters for pattern classification.
CO5 Apply the BSS algorithm as preprocessing method before feature extraction over real
time signals
Page 378 of 465

SYLLABUS
(NO. OF
MODULE LECTURE
HOURS)
Module – I 12
Acquisition, Generation of Bio-signals, Origin of bio-signals, Types of bio-

signals, Study of diagnostically significant bio-signal parameters, Electrodes for
bio-physiological sensing and conditioning, Electrode-electrolyte interface,
polarization, electrode skin interface and motion artefact, biomaterial used for
electrode, Types of electrodes (body surface, internal, array of electrodes,
microelectrodes), Practical aspects of using electrodes, Acquisition of bio-signals
(signal conditioning) and Signal conversion (ADC’s DAC’s) Processing, Digital
filtering
Module – II 9
Biomedical signal processing by Fourier analysis, Bio-Medical signal processing

by wavelet (time frequency) analysis, Analysis (Computation of signal
parameters that are diagnostically significant)
Module – III 8
Classification of signals and noise, Spectral analysis of deterministic, stationary

random signals and non-stationary signals, Coherent treatment of various
biomedical signal processing methods and applications.
Page 379 of 465

Module – IV
Principal component analysis, Correlation and regression, Analysis of chaotic 6

signals Application areas of Bio–Signals analysis Multiresolution analysis
(MRA) and wavelets, Principal component analysis (PCA), Independent
component analysis (ICA)
Module – V 6
Pattern classification–supervised and unsupervised classification, Neural

networks, Support vector Machines, Hidden Markov models. Examples of
biomedical signal classification examples
Page 380 of 465

References:
1. W. J. Tompkins, “Biomedical Digital Signal Processing”, Prentice Hall, 1993.
2. Eugene N Bruce, “Biomedical Signal Processing and Signal Modeling”, John Wiley &
Son’s _publication, 2001.
Reference Book:
1. Myer Kutz, “Biomedical Engineering and Design Handbook, Volume I”, McGraw Hill,
2009._
2. D C Reddy, “Biomedical Signal Processing”, McGraw Hill, 2005.
3. Katarzyn J. Blinowska, JaroslawZygierewicz, “Practical Biomedical Signal Analysis Using
MATLAB”, 1st Edition, CRC Press, 2011.
Multi-Channel Signal Processing is an advance course; hence it only lays down the
foundation of multichannel biomedical signal processing, pattern recognition and classification
problem.

7. Application of Multi-Channel Signal Processing helps to analyze the multi-channel

biomedical signal.
8. Extraction of Pattern vector from independent components for the development of
decision support system for various applications.

Page 381 of 465

Direct Assessment

First Quiz 10
Second Quiz 10
Indirect Assessment
Program
Specific
Outcomes
Outcome
(PSOs)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
CO1 2 2 3 3 2 3 1 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 2
CO2 2 2 3 3 2 3 1 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 2
CO3 2 2 3 3 2 3 1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2
CO4 2 2 3 3 2 3 1 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 2
CO5 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Page 382 of 465

CD1, CD2, CD3, CD4,
CD3
Seminars CO3 CD5, CD8, CD9.
CD1, CD2, CD3, CD4,

CD4
Mini Projects/Projects CO4 CD5, CD8, CD9.

CD8
Internets
CD9 Simulation
Page 383 of 465

Course code: EC422
Course title: Bio-Medical Signal Processing Lab

Pre-requisite(s): EC305 Signal Processing Techniques
Co- requisite(s):
Class: B. Tech.
Semester / Level: 7
Branch: ECE
Name of Teacher:
Course Objectives:
1. Understand the fundamentals of Signal Processing and Multi-channel Signal Processing.
2. Grasp the concept of stochastic processes to develop advanced signal processing concept.
3. Comprehend Signal Processing and Multichannel Signal Processing.
4. Grasp how to integrate the concept of matrix algebra, probability models, random
processes and linear algebra to Advance develop Source Separation algorithm
5. Perceive challenges in development of source separation algorithm keeping different

issues in real life data.
Course Outcomes:
Page 384 of 465

CO1 distinguish Single channel Signal Processing and Multi-channel Signal Processing.
CO2 use the concept of stochastic processes to develop advanced signal processing
concept.
CO3 develop Source separation algorithm using instantaneous mixing model as well as
convoluted mixing model.
CO4 integrate the concept of matrix algebra, probability models, random processes and
linear algebra to develop advance Source Separation algorithm
CO5 development of source separation algorithm keeping different issues in real life data.
Syllabus
Therefore, EC421 Bio-Medical Electronics & Signal Processing is the syllabus for the Bio-
Medical Signal Processing Lab. Following experiments are the guidelines for the students.
1. Record Multi-Channel Data (EEG, ECG, Speech) in MATLAB using g.tec Amplifier and
National Instruments Microphone array system.
2. Implement the concept of Principal component Analysis to get the principal components from
mixture signal and evaluate its significance.
3. To measure the non-gaussianity using higher order moments Kurtosis and Negentrophy.
Page 385 of 465

4. To separate the individual speaker voice/ artefacts from recorded Multi-channel Biomedical
/speech signal using independent component Analysis using instantaneous mixing model.
5. To separate the individual speaker voice from recorded Multi-channel signal using independent
component Analysis using convolutive mixture model.
6. To estimate the direction of arrivals (DOA) from recorded two channels Speech Signal.
9. To separate independent component using fixed point ICA.
10. To represent the signal using sparse concept.
11. To decompose and analyse the signal using Empirical Mode decomposition.
12. To classify the biomedical signals/speech signal using spatial filters.
Text Books:
1. W. J. Tompkins, “Biomedical Digital Signal Processing”, Prentice Hall, 1993.
2. Eugene N Bruce, “Biomedical Signal Processing and Signal Modeling”, John Wiley &
Son’s _publication, 2001.
Reference Book:
1. Myer Kutz, “Biomedical Engineering and Design Handbook, Volume I”, McGraw Hill,
2009._
2. D C Reddy, “Biomedical Signal Processing”, McGraw Hill, 2005.
3. Katarzyn J. Blinowska, JaroslawZygierewicz, “Practical Biomedical Signal Analysis Using
MATLAB”, 1st Edition, CRC Press, 2011.
NA
NA
Page 386 of 465

Direct Assessment
Attendance Marks 12
Lab file Marks 12
Viva Marks 24
Lab quiz Marks 20
Indirect Assessment
Page 387 of 465

Program
Specific
Outcomes
Outcome (PSOs)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
CO1 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 1 2 3 2 3
CO2 2 3 3 2 1 1 1 1 2 3 2 3
CO3 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 2 3 3 3
CO4 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 2 3 3 3
CO5 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2
Page 388 of 465


CD1, CD2, CD5,

CD1
CD1, CD2, CD5,

CD2
CD1, CD2, CD3,

CD3 CD4, CD5, CD8,
Seminars CO3 CD9.
CD1, CD2, CD3,

CD4 CD4, CD5, CD8,
CD4, CD5, CD7,

CD5

CD8
Internets
CD9 Simulation
Page 389 of 465

Course Code: EC423

Course Title: Radar Engineering
Pre-requisite(s): Knowledge of Electromagnetic fields and waves.
Co- requisite(s):
Class: B. Tech.
Semester / Level: Seventh/Four
Name of Teacher:
Course Objectives
41. An understanding on Radar Engineering and its applications
42. An understanding of MTI and pulse Doppler Radar
43. An ability to analyze different RADAR clutters
44. An understanding of object Tracking by RADAR
45. An understanding on working of RADAR Receiver and various Antennas used for
RADAR.
Course Outcomes
CO1 Demonstrate an understanding on RADAR and its functional principles
CO2 Demonstrate an understanding on MTI and pulse Doppler Radar
CO3 Analyze and evaluate performance in the presence of different RADAR clutters
CO4 Demonstrate an understanding of object tracking by RADAR
Page 390 of 465

CO5 Demonstrate an understanding on RADAR Receiver and various Antennas used for
RADAR.
Page 391 of 465

SYLLABUS
(NO. OF
MODULE LECTURE
HOURS)
Module – I 10
INTRODUCTION TO RADAR
Introduction, Basic Radar, Simple form of Radar equation, Radar Block diagram,
Radar frequencies, Applications of Radar, Origin of Radar. Radar Range
Equation, Detection of signals in noise, Receiver noise and signal to noise ratio,
Integration of Radar pulses, Radar Cross Section of Targets, Pulse repetition
frequency.
Module – II 7
MTI AND PULSE DOPPLER RADAR
Introduction to Doppler and MTI Radar, Delay line Cancellers, Digital MTI
processing, Moving target Detector, Pulse Doppler Radar, Non Coherent MTI.
Module – III 7
TRACKING RADAR
Tracking with Radar, Mono-pulse tracking, Conical Scan and sequential lobbing,
tracking in Range.
Page 392 of 465

Module – IV 10
RADAR CLUTTER
Introduction to Radar Clutter, Surface Clutter radar equation, Land Clutter, Sea
Clutter.
Module – V 6
RADAR RECEIVER
Functions of Radar Antennas, Antenna parameters, Antenna radiation pattern and

Aperture illumination, Reflector antennas, Electronically steered phase array
Antennas. The Radar receiver, Receiver Noise Figure, Super heterodyne receiver,
Duplexers and Receiver protectors, Radar Displays
Text Books:
1. Introduction to Radar Systems”, M I Skolnik, 3/e, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2001
Page 393 of 465

Direct Assessment

First Quiz 10
Second Quiz 10
Indirect Assessment
Program
Specific
Outcomes
Outcome
(PSOs)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
CO1 3 1 1 2 1 - - - - - - 2 3 2 1
CO2 3 3 3 2 1 - - - - - - 1 3 2 2
CO3 3 3 2 2 2 - - - - - - 1 3 2 1
CO4 3 2 1 1 1 - - - - - - 1 3 2 3
CO5 3 1 1 2 1 - - - - - - 2 3 2 2

Page 394 of 465


CD8
Internets
CD9 Simulation
Page 395 of 465

Course code: EC 425

Course title: Optoelectronic Devices
Pre-requisite(s): Knowledge of Semiconductor Devices, Digital Electronics
Class: B. Tech
Semester / Level: VII/ 4
Branch: ECE
Name of Teacher:
Course Objectives
1. To understand the optical processes in semiconductors.
2. To understand the design aspects of semiconductor optical sources and

photodetectors for different applications.
3. To understand the methods of modulating a beam of light.
4. To understand optoelectronic switching devices and optoelectronic integrated

circuits in high speed communication and computing applications.
Course Outcomes
CO1. Explain the optical properties and processes in semiconductors.

CO2. Explain operational characteristics of semiconductor optical sources and
photodetectors.
CO3. Explain operational characteristics of photodetectors.
CO4. Apply the optoelectronic modulators in communication and integrated circuits.
CO5. Develop high speed communication and optical computing system.
Page 396 of 465

Syllabus
Module (NO. OF
LECTURE
HOURS)
Module –1:
Optical processes in semiconductors, Electron-hole pair formation and recombination,
Absorption in semiconductors, Exciton absorption, Impurity band absorption and 8
transitions, Absorption in Quantum wells, Radiation in semiconductors, Exciton
recombination, Auger recombination, Time-Resolved Photoluminescence.
Module - 2:
Semiconductor Heterojunction, Application of Heterojunctions to bipolar transistors,
Heterojunction LEDs, Surface emitting LED and edge emitting LEDs, Heterojunction 10
LASERs, Operating principles, Threshold current, Materials, Distributed Feedback
LASERs, cleaved-coupled-cavity (C3) LASER, Quantum well LASERs, Surface emitting
LASERs, Quantum Dot LASERs, Quantum wires LASERs, LASER rate equations. Q-
switching, Mode locking.
Module – 3:
Photon detectors, Photoconductors, Heterojunction PIN and APD photodiodes, 7
Superlattice APD, Phototransistor, Metal Semiconductor photodiode, MSM photodiode,
Microcavity photodiodes, Solar cells, I-V characteristics, Spectral response,
Heterojunction solar cell, Photomultipliers, Thermal detectors.
Module – 4:
Modulation of Light, Electro-optic effect, Pockels modulator, Kerr modulator, Magneto-
optic modulator, Acousto-optic effect, Raman-Nath modulator, Bragg modulator, 7
Quantum well modulators.
Module - 5:
Optical switching and logic devices, Self-Electro-Optic Effect Device (SEED), Bipolar
Controller-Modulator, Optoelectronic Amplifier, MQW-HBT based Programmable 8
Memory Device, Tunable MQW-HBT Logic gate, Optoelectronic integrated circuits
(OEIC), Materials and processing, OEIC Transmitters and Receivers.
Text books:
T1. “Semiconductor Optoelectronic Devices” Pallab bhattacharya, PHI.
T2. “Optoelectronics An Introduction”,J.Wilson, J.F.B.Hawks, PHI..
Page 397 of 465

Ref. Books:
R1. “Semiconductor Nanostructure for Optoelectronic Applications”, Todd Steiner.
R2. “Optical Electronics”, Ajoy Ghatak & K.Thyagarajan..

R3. “Physics of Semiconductor Devices”, S.M.Sze.
Gaps in the syllabus (to meet Industry/Profession requirements)

CD2 Assignments
CD7 Simulation
Direct Assessment

First Quiz 10
Second Quiz 10
Page 398 of 465

Mapping between Objectives and Outcomes
Course Program Outcomes Program

Specific
Outcom Outcomes
es (PSOs)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 14 15
3
CO1 3 3 2 2 2 1 2 1 2 1 1 3 2 2
CO2 3 3 2 2 3 1 2 1 2 3 2 3 2 2
CO3 3 3 2 3 3 1 2 1 2 3 2 3 2 2
CO4 3 3 2 3 3 2 3 2 2 2 2 3 2 3 2
CO5 3 3 2 3 2 2 2 1 2 2 2 3 3 2 3
1: Low 2: Medium 3: High
Page 399 of 465

Page 400 of 465

Course Code: EC427
Course Title: Neural Networks and Fuzzy System
Pre-requisite(s): Probability and Random Processes
Co-requisite(s):
Class: B. Tech.
Name of Teacher:
Course Objectives
6. Understand the Atrificial neural work and different learning strategies.
7. Develop and design various machine learning techniques such as MLP, RBFNN,
FLANN, deep Learning
8. Understand the concept of fuzzy logic and its scope.
9. Develop and design fuzzy logic techniques for control, clustering and classification
tasks.
10. Develop and analyze real time applications using machine learning and fuzzy logic
techniques.
Course Outcomes
CO1 Design and analyze neural network structures and its learning algorithms.
Page 401 of 465

CO2 Develop and apply the neural network techniques to solve the complex pattern
recognition, classification, clustering and prediction problems.
CO3 Apply and anlyse the advanced machine learning techniques such as FLANN, Deep
Learning, CNN
CO4 Create and analyze fuzzy logic theory, techniques and systems.
CO5 Develop fuzzy logic techniques for control, prediction and clustering applications.
SYLLABUS
(NO. OF
MODULE LECTURE
HOURS)
Module – I
Fundamental concepts, Introduction to artificial neural networks (ANN), 8

Learning strategies: supervised & unsupervised learning, error correction
learning, Hebbian learning, competitive learning, Kohonen self-organizing
networks, vector quantization learning, reinforcement learning.
Module – II
Perceptron architecture: Single and multi neuron perceptron, Perceptron learning 8

rule, ADALINE network, LMS algorithm, Linear separable problem, multilayer
perceptron networks, back propagation algorithm, virtues and limitations of back
propagation, methods of speeding: momentum, variable learning rate, Levenberg-
Marquardt Algorithm
Module – III
Page 402 of 465

Radial basis function networks, interpolation problems, covers theorem,
regularization networks, functional expansion networks: functional link artificial
neural network (FLANN), Cascaded FLANN, Convolutional neural network,
Deep learning, applications to classification and prediction
Module – IV
Fuzzy set theory & rules: Introduction to fuzzy systems, membership function, 8
fuzzy set theory: fuzzy union, intersection and complement, fuzzy relational
operations, Fuzzy rules: Linguistics variables, fuzzy IF-Then rules, Fuzzy
reasoning
Module – V
Fuzzy inference systems: Introduction, Mamdani fuzzy model, Sugeno fuzzy 8

model, Tekamoto fuzzy model, Neuro-fuzzy systems, applications to fuzzy
control, clustering and classification.
Text Books:
5. “Neural network Design”- M.T. Hagan, B. Demuth & M. Beale, Thomson Learning, 2002
6. “Neuro-Fuzzy and Soft Computing”- J.S.R. Jang, C. T. Sun and E. Mizutani, PHI,
NewDelhi
Reference Books:
1. “Neural Networks: A comprehensive Foundation” – Simon Haykin, Pearson education

NA
Page 403 of 465

PO8 will cover through paper writing/ technical report writing/ assignments/mini projects


Direct Assessment

First Quiz 10
Second Quiz 10
Indirect Assessment
Program
Specific
Outcomes
Outcome
(PSOs)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
CO1 2 2 1 3 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 2
CO2 3 2 3 3 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 2 3
CO3 2 2 1 3 1 1 1 1 2 2 3 3
CO4 3 2 3 3 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 3
CO5 3 2 3 3 2 1 1 1 2 3 3 3
Page 404 of 465



CD8
Internets
CD9 Simulation
Page 405 of 465

Course code: EC429

Course title: Device Modeling & Simulation
Electronic Devices
Co- requisite(s):
Credits: L: 3 T: 0 P: 0 C: 3
Class: B. Tech.
Branch: ECE
Name of Teacher:
Course Objectives
1. Understand Basic Semiconductor Physics and Modeling.

2. Interpret the Basics of MOS Device for Technology Computer Aided Design
(TCAD) and apply the perceived knowledge.
3. Appraise TCAD and Numerical Methods; simulate/evaluate semiconductor device
using TCAD and analyze the results.
4. Design and Evaluate the characteristics of Deep Sub-Micron Devices through TCAD
simulation tool.
5. Create the NMOS/PMOS through device and process simulation of using TCAD.
Course Outcomes
CO1 Describe and illustrate the Basic Semiconductor Physics and Modeling.
CO2 Sketch characteristics of MOS Device for Technology Computer Aided Design
(TCAD) tools and explain them.
CO3 Make use of Numerical Methods and TCAD tool for Device Simulation and and
illustrate their characteristics and analyse them.
CO4 Schematize the Deep Sub-Micron Device, experiment and simulate through TCAD,
assess their characteristics and summarize their features.
CO5 Design the NMOS/PMOS through device and process simulation features of TCAD
tool. Schematize their transient responses and analyze them.
Page 406 of 465

SYLLABUS
(NO. OF
MODULE LECTURE
HOURS)
Module – I 8
Basic Semiconductor Physics and Modeling:
Band Formation Theory of Semiconductor; Concept of Effective Mass. Basic

Semiconductor Equations; Carrier transport; Carrier Recombination and
Generation; Continuity Equation and Solution, Mobility and Scattering, Different
Distribution Laws; Semiconductor Device Modeling: Shockley-Read-Hall (SRH)
Generation/Recombination Model, Simple Recombination-Generation Model,
Impact Ionization Model, Mobility Model.
Module – II 8
Basics of MOS Device for Technology Computer Aided Design (TCAD):

Operation of MOSFET with Zero Gate Voltage, Operation of MOSFET with
a Positive Gate Voltage, Effect of a Small VDS, Operation of MOSFET as
VDS is Increased. Expression of Threshold Voltage, I–V Characteristics of
MOSFET, Depletion MOSFET, Transconductance (gm), MOS Transistor as
a Switch. MOSFET Capacitances, Interconnect Capacitances. Moore’s Law,
MOSFET Scaling; ITRS, SCEs.
Module – III 8
Introduction to TCAD, Numerical Methods and Device Simulation

Through TCAD:
TCAD: Process CAD, Device CAD. A Brief History of TCAD; Motivation for
TCAD; TCAD Flow for IC Process and Device Simulation; TCAD Application.
Numerical Solution Methods, Non-Linear Iteration; Convergence Criteria for
Non-Linear Iterations, Initial Guess Requirement, Numerical Method
Page 407 of 465

Implementation, Drift Diffusion Calculations; Energy Balance Calculations;
Setting the Number of Carriers.
Module – IV 8
Deep Sub-Micron Device Simulation through TCAD:

Introduction, How the Device Simulator ATLAS Works, ATLAS Inputs and
Outputs, Simulation Setup, Brief Review of Electro-Physical Models
Employed in ATLAS, Choice of METHOD in ATLAS, Mobility Models in
ATLAS, Benchmarking of MOSFET Simulations, Importance of Mesh
Optimization; Synopsys Technology Computer Aided Design (TCAD) Tool
Suite. Device Architecture and Simulation Setup, Advanced Device
Structures.
Module – V 8
Process Simulation of a MOSFET Using TCAD:

Material Initialization, Initial Mesh, N-Buried Layer, Oxidation and Growth of
the Initial Oxide, Wafer Masking for Buried Layer Implantation, Screen
Oxidation, Buried Layer Implantation, Buried Layer Drive-In, P-Type Epitaxial
Growth, Pad Oxide and Gate Oxide Formation, Gate-Poly Deposition and
Doping, Gate-Poly Mask, Creation of n+ Source and Drain Regions, Creation of
p+ Region, BPSG Deposition and Annealing, Contact Mask Formation and
metallization.
Textbooks:
3. Chandan Kumar Sarkar, “Technology Computer Aided design – Simulation for VLSI
MOSFET,” CRC Press, Taylor & Francis Group, 2013.
4. Chenming C. Hu, “Modern Semiconductor Devices for Integrated Circuits,” 1st ed.,
Prentice Hall, 2009.
5. Y. Cheng and C. Hu, “MOSFET Modeling & BSIM3 User’s Guide,” Kluwer Academic
Publisher, 2002.
Page 408 of 465

Reference books:
1. Silvaco Atlas User Manual, available at www.silvaco.com.

2. Sentaurus TCAD Manuals, Synopsys Inc., Mountain View, CA.
3. Taurus Medici Manuals, Synopsys Inc., Mountain View, CA.

10

1. Memory circuits.

10
Direct Assessment

First Quiz 10
Second Quiz 10
Indirect Assessment
Page 409 of 465

Program
Specific
Outcomes
Outcome
(PSOs)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
CO1 3 3 2 3 3 1 1 3 3 3 2 1
CO2 3 3 2 3 3 2 2 3 3 3 2 1
CO3 3 3 1 3 3 2 1 3 3 3 1 1
CO4 3 3 2 3 3 3 1 3 3 3 2 1
CO5 3 3 2 3 3 2 2 3 3 3 2 1

Page 410 of 465


CD8
Internets
CD9 Simulation
Page 411 of 465

Course Code: EC431

Course Title: Multimedia Communication
Pre-requisite(s): ): Knowledge of digital image processing and basic understanding of digital
communication.
Co- requisite(s):
Class: B. Tech.
Name of Teacher:
Course Objectives
1 An understanding of the concept of technologies for multimedia processing, coding,

and communications.
2 An understanding of state-of-the-art multimedia coding standards, including MPEG-

x, H.26x, and scalable video coding (SVC).
3 An understanding, how to efficiently represent multimedia data
4 An understanding, how to deliver multimedia data over a variety of networks?
5 An ability to design and provide solutions for practical robust, energy efficient,
reliable and secure multimedia communication system..
Course Outcomes
CO1 Have an ability to setup a multimedia communication system
CO2 Have an ability to demonstrate several multimedia standards and provide a new design
solutions according to the target applications.
Page 412 of 465

CO3 To design a video codec system for sending multimedia over the Internet and wireless
networks, where video adaptation, error resilience, error concealment, and quality of
service are also considered.
welfare of the society.
CO5 Have an ability to minimize the design challenges.
Page 413 of 465

SYLLABUS
(NO. OF
MODULE LECTURE
HOURS)
Module – I 10
Multimedia communications
Introduction to multimedia communication, multimedia sources, applications of

multimedia networks, Audio-Visual Integration: Media interaction, Audio-to-
Visual mapping, Joint audio-video coding
Module – II 7
Multimedia Processing in Communications
Challenges of multimedia information processing, Image & video coding, Signal

processing for networked multimedia, NNs for multimedia processing,
Multimedia processors.
Module – III 7
Distributed multimedia system and Multimedia conferencing standards
Main features of a distributed multimedia system, Resource management of

distributed multimedia system and networking, Multimedia operating systems,
Multimedia conferencing standards: H.320, H.323.
Page 414 of 465

Module – IV 10
Multimedia communication standards
MPEG approach to standardization, MPEG-1, MPEG-2, MPEG-4, H.261

standard, H.264 standard, Scalable video coding, Multimedia multiplex and
Synchronization
Module – V 6
Multimedia communications across networks
Packet audio/video in the network environment, Video transport across generic

networks, Multimedia transport across IP network, Multimedia across wireless
Text Books:
1. 1. Multimedia Communication Systems: Techniques, Standards, and Networks by

K.R.Rao, Zoran S. Bojkovic, and D.A. Milovanovic. Pearson Education Asia, 2002.
2. Compressed Video over Networks, edited by Ming-Ting Sun and Amy R. Reibman, Marcel
Dekker Inc., Switzerland, 2000.
Reference Books:
1. Multimedia over IP and Wireless Networks: Compression, networking, and Systems, by

Mihaela van der Schaar. And Philip Chou, Academic Press, 2007.
Page 415 of 465

Direct Assessment

First Quiz 10
Second Quiz 10
Indirect Assessment
Program
Specific
Outcomes
Outcome
(PSOs)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
CO1 3 1 3 2 1
CO2 3 3 1 3 2 2
CO3 3 3 1 3 2 1
CO4 3 3 1 3 1 1 2 3 2 3
CO5 3 3 1 3 2 2

Page 416 of 465


CD8
Internets
CD9 Simulation
Page 417 of 465

Course code: EC433

Course title: Low Power VLSI Circuits
Electronic Devices
Co- requisite(s):
Credits: L: 3 T: 0 P: 0 C: 3
Class: B. Tech.
Branch: ECE
Name of Teacher:
Course Objectives
A. Understand nanometre transistor models, power and energy basics.
B. Interpret the power optimization techniques during design time at circuit,

architecture and system level and apply the perceived knowledge.
C. Appraise and analyse the power optimization techniques @ design time for memory,
interconnect and clock.
D. Appraise and evaluate power optimization techniques @ Standby for memory,

circuits and systems.
E. Create/design low-power/low-voltage analog circuits in weak inversion.
Course Outcomes
CO1 Describe and illustrate the nanometre transistor models, power and energy basics.
CO2 Make use of power optimization techniques @ design time at circuit, architecture
and system level; sketch and explain with examples.
CO3 Experiment with power optimization techniques @ design time for memory,
interconnect and clock. Illustrate the benefits of those techniques with design
examples and analyse them.
Page 418 of 465

CO4 Apply power optimization techniques @ standby for memory, circuits and
systems; Schematize design examples, assess power optimization techniques and
summarize their benefits.
CO5 Design and schematize low-power/low-voltage analog circuits in weak inversion

region.
Syllabus
(NO. OF
MODULE LECTURE
HOURS)
Module – I
Nanometer Transistor Models, Power and Energy Basics:
Nanometer transistor behavior and models, velocity saturation model, alpha 8

power model, leakage currents in a nanometer MOSFET, variability, sources of
variability, device and technology innovations; Digital design metrics – power,
delay and energy metrics, power-delay and energy– delay trade-offs, dynamic
power, short-circuit power, static power, sources of static power dissipation,
optimizing power at design time.
Module – II
Optimizing Power @ Design Time: Circuit Level Techniques, Architecture, 8

Algorithms, and Systems:
Optimization framework for energy–delay trade-off, dynamic-power

optimization, multiple supply voltages, transistor sizing, technology mapping,
static-power optimization, multiple thresholds, Transistor stacking; The
Page 419 of 465

architecture/system trade-off space, concurrency improves energy-efficiency,
exploring alternative topologies, removing inefficiency, and the cost of flexibility.
Module – III
Optimizing Power @ Design Time: Memory, Interconnect and Clocks: 8
Role of memory in ICs, Cache Memory Architectures, SRAM Metrics, Power

breakdowns of SRAM, Power-saving techniques for SRAM, Non-traditional
cells, 6T SRAM Cell with Feedback; Interconnect basics, ITRS projection on
interconnect and clock, Increasing Impact of Interconnect, Novel interconnect
media, Lower Bounds on Interconnect Energy, Reducing Interconnect
Power/Energy, Wire Energy–Delay Trade-off.
Module – IV
Optimizing Power @ Standby: Memory, Circuits and Systems: 8
Standard SRAM cells and SRAM metrics, optimizing power @ standby, data
retention voltage (DRV) and transistor sizes, RBB and VSS raising. Sleep Mode
Management, Trade-Off between Sleep Modes and Sleep Time, Dynamic power
in standby – Clock gating to reduce power, Sleep Transistor sizing and Placement,
Power gating, Dynamic Body Biasing, Supply voltage ramping, Boosted-Gate
MOS (BGMOS), Boosted-Sleep MOS, Virtual Supplies.
Module – V
Design of Low-Power/Low-Voltage Analog Circuits in Weak Inversion
Minimum Saturation Voltage, Cascode mirror in weak or moderate inversion, 8

low-voltage amplifiers: CMOS inverter-amplifier, Maximum Transconductance-
to-Current Ratio: Differential Pair, Linearized differential pair; Single-Stage
Page 420 of 465

Operational Transconductance Amplifiers (OTA): Voltage follower for a
resistive load; Exponential Characteristics: Voltage and Current Reference,
Minimum Energy Point Analysis.
Textbooks:
6. Jan M. Rabaey, “Low power essentials”, First Edition, Springer, 2009, ISBN 978-0-387-
71712-8.
7. Alice Wang, Benton H. Calhoun, A. P. Chandrakasan “Sub-threshold Design for Ultra
Low-Power Systems”, Springer, 2006, ISBN-13: 978-0387335155.
Reference Book:
1. Kaushik Roy, Sharat Prasad, “Low power CMOS VLSI circuit design”, John Wiley sons
Inc., 2000.
2. Jan M. Rabaey, “Digital Integrated Circuits - A Design Perspective”, 2nd Edition, Prentice
Hall, 2003.
3. P. Rashinkar, Paterson and L. Singh, “Low Power Design Methodologies”, Kluwer
Academic, 2002.

10
1. RF circuits.

10
Page 421 of 465

Direct Assessment

First Quiz 10
Second Quiz 10
Indirect Assessment
Program
Specific
Outcomes
Outcome
(PSOs)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
CO1 3 3 2 3 3 1 1 3 3 3 2 1
CO2 3 3 1 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 1 1
CO3 3 3 2 3 3 3 1 3 3 3 2 1
CO4 3 3 1 3 3 2 2 3 3 3 1 1
CO5 3 3 2 3 3 2 2 3 3 3 2 1
Page 422 of 465


CD8
Internets
CD9 Simulation
Page 423 of 465

Course Code: EC 435

Course Title: ASIC Design
Pre-requisite(s): VLSI Systems, Digital System Design
Co- requisite(s):
Class: B. Tech.
Semester / Level:
Name of Teacher:
Course Objectives
1. Recognize the fundamental of Semicustom IC Design

2. Show the importance of VHDL in Semicustom IC Design
3. Analyze the Sequential processing in System Design
4. Design the highly secure optimized systems
5. Develop a processor using VHDL.
Course Outcomes
CO1 Recognize the importance of Semicustom ICs Design.

CO2 Design the optimize architecture using VHDL.
CO3 Develop the sequential processing unit for customized system.
CO4 Develop the highly secure system for various applications.
CO5 Design a processor using VHDL.
Page 424 of 465

SYLLABUS
(NO. OF
MODULE LECTURE
HOURS)
Module – I 8
Introduction to VHDL: System design with uses, History of VHDL,

Simulation fundamentals, Modeling hardware, and Language basics, Building
blocks in VHDL, Design units and library.
Module – II 8
Sequential Processing: Process statement, Signal vs variable assignment,
Sequential statements, For loop, While loop, Condition statements, Examples
of half adder and full adder, Test bench.
Module – III
Data Types and Subprograms: Data types, Scalar, Composite, Access type,
File type; Arrays; Objects, Signal variables, Constants and files, Association
lists, Interface lists, Structural description, Examples, Subprogram, Functions, 8
Conversion function, Resolution functions, Procedures.
Module – IV
Packages and VHDL Synthesis: Packages, Package declaration, deferred

constants, Subprogram declaration. Simple gate - concurrent assignment, IF
control flow statement, Case control flow statement, Simple sequential 8
Page 425 of 465

statements, Asynchronous reset, Asynchronous preset and clear, Complex
sequential statements.
Module – V
Combinational & Sequential Circuit Design using VHDL: Multiplexers,

Decoders, Encoder, Code Converter, Flip-flops, Counters, Registers, Memory
design, processor design. 8
Text Books:
1. “VHDL” by Douglas Perry, TMH, 1999.
2. VHDL SYNTHESIS by J. Bhasker, BS Publication 2004.

Reference Books:
1. Fundamental of Digital Logic with VHDL DESIGN, by Stephen Brown I ZvonkoVranesic,

The McGraw-Hill Companies.
based assignment
Topics beyond syllabus/Advanced topics/Design: Teaching through paper

POs met through Topics beyond syllabus/Advanced topics/Design: Teaching through latest
research paper
Direct Assessment

First Quiz 10
Second Quiz 10
Page 426 of 465

Indirect Assessment
Program Specific
Outcome (PSOs)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
CO1 3 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 2 3 2 2 3 2
CO2 3 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 2
CO3 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 1
CO4 3 3 3 2 3 3 2 3 2 3 2 2 2 3 1
CO5 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 2 3 2 2 3 1

CD Code Course Delivery Methods
Outcome Method Used

CD8
Page 427 of 465

CD9 Simulation
Page 428 of 465

Course Code: EC 437

Course Title: VLSI System Testing
Pre-requisite(s): Electronic Devices, VLSI Systems, IC Technology
Co- requisite(s):
Class: B. Tech.
Name of Teacher:
Course Objectives
1. Recognize the need of Testing of ICs

2. Check the universal test sets for complex circuits
3. Analyze the CMOS testing
4. Design for testability
5. Recognize the advantage of Built-in self-test in complex circuits
Course Outcomes
CO1 Recognize the importance of Testing of ICs

CO2 Perform the universal test sets for complex circuits
CO3 Develop a algorithm for CMOS testing
CO4 Design for testability
CO5 Recognize the advantages of Built-in self-test in complex circuits
Page 429 of 465

SYLLABUS
(NO. OF
MODULE LECTURE
HOURS)
Module – I 8
Basics of Testing: Fault models, Combinational logic and fault simulation,

Test generation for Combinational Circuits. Current sensing based testing,
Classification of sequential ATPG methods, Fault collapsing and simulation.
Module – II 8
Universal test sets: Pseudo exhaustive and iterative logic array testing,
Clocking schemes for delay fault testing, Testability classifications for path
delay faults, Test generation and fault simulation for path and gate delay
faults.
Module – III
CMOS testing: Testing of static and dynamic circuits, Fault diagnosis, Fault
models for diagnosis, Cause effect diagnosis, and Effect cause diagnosis.
Module – IV 8
Page 430 of 465

Design for testability: Scan design, Partial scan, use of scan chains, boundary
scan, DFT for other test objectives, Memory Testing.
Module – V 8
Built-in self-test: Pattern Generators, Estimation of test length, Test points to

improve testability, Analysis of aliasing in linear compression, BIST
methodologies, BIST for delay fault testing.
Text Books:
1. N. Jha & S.D. Gupta, “Testing of Digital Systems”, Cambridge, 2003.

2. W. W. Wen, “VLSI Test Principles and Architectures Design for Testability”, Morgan
Kaufmann Publishers.2006
Reference Books:
1. Michael L. Bushnell &Vishwani D. Agrawal,” Essentials of Electronic Testing for Digital,

memory & Mixed signal VLSI Circuits”, Kluwar Academic Publishers.2000.
2. P. K. Lala,” Digital circuit Testing and Testability”, Academic Press.1997.
3. M. Abramovici, M. A. Breuer, and A.D. Friedman, “Digital System Testing and Testable
Design”, Computer Science Press, 1990.
4. Recent literature in VLSI System Testing.
based assignment
POs met through Topics beyond syllabus/Advanced topics/Design: Teaching through latest
research paper
Page 431 of 465

Direct Assessment

First Quiz 10
Second Quiz 10
Indirect Assessment
Program Specific
Outcome (PSOs)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
CO1 3 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 2 3 2 2 3 1
CO2 3 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 1
CO3 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 2 2 2 2 2 3 2
CO4 3 3 3 2 3 3 2 3 2 3 2 2 2 3 1
CO5 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 3 2 2 3 2 3 3 1

Outcome Method Used
Page 432 of 465


CD8
Internets
CD9 Simulation
Page 433 of 465

Course code: EC439

Course title: Integrated Circuit Technology
Electronic Devices
Co- requisite(s):
Credits: L: 3 T: 0 P: 0 C: 3
Class: B. Tech.
Branch: ECE
Name of Teacher:
Course Objectives
1. Understand Clean Room and Wafer Cleaning Technology.
2. Appraise the Crystal Growth Techniques and Epitaxy and apply the obtained
knowledge.
3. Appraise and analyse the Film Formation Methods.
4. Perceive Impurity Incorporation Techniques and evaluate them.
5. Apprehend Lithography and Etching Methods and create layers on devices applying
them.
Course Outcomes
CO1 Describe importance of Clean Room and Wafer Cleaning Technology. Illustrate
with example.
CO2 Sketch and explain the Crystal Growth Techniques and Epitaxy.
CO3 Illustrate with the sketch the Film Formation Methods. Diagram their
CO4 Appraise the Impurity Incorporation Techniques, schematize their characteristics,

assess and summarize their features.
Page 434 of 465

CO5 Schematize the Lithography and Etching Methods. Schematize their characteristics
and prepare an inference.
SYLLABUS
(NO. OF
MODULE LECTURE
HOURS)
Module – I
Clean Room and Wafer Cleaning Technology:
Environment for VLSI Technology: Clean room classification, Clean room

design concept, clean Room Performance Criteria, Clean room installation, Clean
room operations, automation, related facility systems, safety requirements. Basic 8
concepts of Wafer cleaning.
Module – II
Crystal Growth Techniques and Epitaxy:
Process Flow, Silicon Crystal Growth from the Melt: Starting Material, The
Czochralski Technique, Distribution of Dopant, Effective Segregation
Coefficient; Silicon Float-Zone Process; GaAs Crystal-Growth Techniques: 8
Starting Materials, Crystal-Growth Techniques; Material Characterization:
Crystal Defects; Epitaxial-Growth Techniques: Chemical-Vapor Deposition,
CVD for Silicon, CVD for GaAs, Metalorganic CVD, Molecular-Beam Epitaxy.
Module – III
Film Formation Methods:
Thermal Oxidation; Dielectric Deposition: Silicon Dioxide, Silicon Nitride, Low-

Dielectric-Constant Materials, High-Dielectric-Constant Materials; Polysilicon
Deposition; Metallization: Physical-Vapor Deposition, Chemical-Vapor 8
Deposition, CVD-W, CVD TiN; Aluminum Metallization: Junction Spiking,
Electromigration; Copper Metallization: Damascene technology; Chemical-
Mechanical Polishing, Silicide.
Page 435 of 465

Module – IV
Impurity incorporation Techniques:
Basic Diffusion Process; Extrinsic Diffusion: Concentration-Dependent

Diffusivity, Diffusion in Silicon, Zinc Diffusion in Gallium Arsenide, Diffusion-
related processes: Lateral Diffusion, Impurity Redistribution during Oxidation; 8
Ion Implantation: Range of implanted ions, Ion Distribution, Ion Stopping, Ion
Channeling; Implant damage and annealing; Implantation-Related Processes.
Module – V
Lithography and Etching Methods: 8
Optical Lithography: Masks, Photoresist, Pattern Transfer, Resolution

Enhancement Techniques; Next-Generation Lithographic Methods: Electron-
Beam Lithography, The Proximity Effect, Extreme-Ultraviolet Lithography, X-
Ray Lithography, Ion-Beam Lithography; Wet Chemical Etching, Dry Etching,
Plasma Fundamentals, Reactive Plasma-Etching Applications.
Textbooks:
1. S. M. Zee, Semiconductor Devices: Physics and Technology, 2e, Wiley, 2002

2. C. Y. Chang and S. M. Sze (Ed), ULSI Technology, McGraw Hill Companies Inc, 1996.
3. James D. Plummer, Michael D. Deal, Peter B. Griffin, Silicon VLSI Technology -
Fundamentals, Practice and Modeling, Prentice Hall, 2000.
Reference books:
1. S. K. Ghandhi, VLSI Fabrication Principles, John Wiley Inc., New York, 1983.
2. S. M. Sze, VLSI Technology, 2e, McGraw-Hill, 1988.

10
1. Fabrication Techniques of CNFET
2. Fabrication Techniques of TFET
3. Fabrication Techniques of MTJ
4. Fabrication Techniques of Memristor
Page 436 of 465

5. Fabrication Techniques of SET
6. Fabrication Techniques of RTD.

10
Direct Assessment

First Quiz 10
Second Quiz 10
Indirect Assessment
Program
Specific
Outcomes
Outcome
(PSOs)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
CO1 3 3 1 3 3 1 1 3 3 3 1 1
CO2 3 3 1 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 1 1
CO3 3 3 2 3 3 3 1 3 3 3 2 1
CO4 3 3 2 3 3 2 2 3 3 3 2 1
CO5 3 3 2 3 3 2 2 3 3 3 2 1
Page 437 of 465



CD8
Internets
CD9 Simulation
Page 438 of 465

Course code: EC441
Course title: Introduction to MEMS (open elective)
Pre-requisite(s): Fundamental concept of Mechanical Engg, Electrical Engg, Instrumentation,
Physics & Material Science
Co- requisite(s): Basics of transducer and sensor
Credits: L:3 T :0 P :0 C:3
Class: B. Tech
Semester / Level: Seventh
Branch: ECE
Name of Teacher:
Course Objectives
1. To understand the Fundamental concepts of MEMS technology

2. To classify different micro sensors and micro actuators
3. To acquire basic knowledge about application of MEMS in different areas and
physical modeling used in MEMS Design.
4. To understand different Microfabrication techniques,MEMS materials and design

issues
5. To understand the integration and packaging of MEMS devices.
Course Outcomes
After the completion of this course, students will be able to :
CO1. Demonstrate knowledge on fundamental principles and concepts of MEMS

Technology
CO2. Analyze various techniques for building micro-devices in silicon, polymer, metal
and other MEMS materials
CO3. Apply different fabrication methodology used in MEMS devices.
CO4. Analyze micro-systems technology for technical feasibility as well as practicality
using modern tools and relevant simulation software to perform design and
analysis.
Page 439 of 465

CO5. Design and analyze Different MEMS Devices using physical, chemical,
mechanical and electrical properties of MEMS material. and principles involved
in the design and operation of micro-devices
SYLLABUS
(NO. OF
MODULE LECTURE
HOURS)
Module – I
Introduction : The History of MEMS Development ,Intrinsic 10

characteristics of MEMS .
Introduction to microfabrication.: Essential overview of frequently
used micro fabrication processes. Thin film deposition techniques ,wafer
bonding Silicon Based MEMS processes ,MEMS Materials
Module – II
Essential Electrical and Mechanical Concepts: General Scalar relation 9

between Tensile stress and strain, Mechanical properties of silicon and
related thin films, Flexural Beam bending Analysis ,Dynamic System
,Resonant Frequency and quality factor ,Electromechanical and Direct
Analogy in Electrical and Mechanical domain.
Module – III
Sensing and Actuation schemes: Electrostatic Sensors and Actuators, 8

Thermal sensors and actuators, Piezoresistive Sensors, Piezoelectric
Sensors and Actuators, Magnetic Actuators
Module – IV
Page 440 of 465

Introduction of MEMS switches .MEMS Inductor and MEMS capacitor –
classification and design issues.MEMS Packaging and Integration. . Role of
MEMS packages.
Module – V
Case studies for selected MEMS Products: Blood Pressure Sensor, 6

Microphone, Accelerometer, Performance and Accuracy
Text Books:
1. Foundations of MEMS by Chang Liu, Second Edition ,Pearson, ISBN 978-81-

317-6475-6
2. RF MEMS and Their Applications, Vijay K.Varadan, K.J.Vinoy and K.A.Jose,

Wiley India Pvt Ltd.,Wiley India Edition, ISBN 978-81-265-2991-9
Reference Book:
1. MarcMadou, Fundamentals of Microfabrication by, CRC Press, 1997.Gregory

Kovacs, Micromachined Transducers Sourcebook WCB McGraw-Hill, Boston,
1998.
2. M.-H. Bao, Micromechanical Transducers: Pressure sensors, accelerometers, and

gyroscopes by Elsevier, New York, 2000.
4. By attending workshop and hands on training in Industry or Institute -IISC

Bangalore, IITs Through INUP The Indian Nanoelectronics Users Program
Page 441 of 465

3,5,9

Simulation and Modelling and analysis , MEMS device characterization-
2,3,4,12
Direct Assessment

Mid SEM Examination Marks 25
End SEM Examination Marks 50
Quizzes 10+10
Assessment by teacher 5
Indirect Assessment
Program
Specific
Outcomes
Outcome
(PSOs)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
CO1 3 3 3 1 2 2 3 1 1
CO2 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 3 1 3 1 1
CO3 3 3 1 3 3 2 3 3 2 1
CO4 3 3 3 1 1 2 3 2 1
Page 442 of 465

CO5 3 1 1 1 1 3 2 1
CD Course Delivery Course Delivery

Course Outcome
Code Methods Method Used
Lecture by use of CO1 CD1, CD2, CD7,CD 8

CD1 Boards/LCD Projectors
CD2 Tutorials/Assignments CO2 CD2,CD5, CD4
CD3 Seminars CO3 CD2, CD6,CD 8,CD9
CD4 Mini Projects/Projects CO4 CD4,CD5,CD6 ,CD7
Laboratory
Experiments/Teaching
CD5 Aids CO5 CD1,CD6 ,CD8,
Industrial Visits/In-plant
CD7 Training
Self- learning such as use

of NPTEL Materials and
CD8 Internets
Page 443 of 465

Course code: EC443
Course title: Introduction to Human- Machine Interface
Pre-requisite(s): None
Co- requisite(s):
Class: B. Tech.
Branch: ECE
Name of Teacher:
Course Objectives
1. To understand the concept of human commuter interaction.
2. To interpret different kinds of brain signal.
3. To understand the human-machine interaction using Brain signal.
4. To Learn about Brain Computer interface
5. To develop the BCI system.
Course Outcomes
Page 444 of 465

CO1. Explain the concept of human commuter interaction.
CO2. Identify and Interpret different kinds of brain signal.
CO3. Develop human-machine interaction using Brain signal.
CO4. Integrate BCI system using different kind of Biomedical Signals
CO5 To develop the real time BCI inference and decision system.
SYLLABUS
(NO. OF
MODULE LECTURE
HOURS)
Module – I 8
Brain Structures and Scalp Potentials, Neural Activities, Measuring Electric

Activity in the brain EEG, MEG and SSVEP, Wearable and Wireless EEG
Monitoring, Brain Rhythms. Event-Related Potentials, Detection, Separation,
Localization, and Classification of P300 Signals.
Module – II 9
10-20 Electrode Placement System, EEG Recording and Measurement, Wireless

multi-channel EEG Recording System, Artifact identification from EEG and
MEG, ERD and ERS, Lapalacian Referencing, Common Average Referencing.
Page 445 of 465

Module – III 9
Cognitive State Estimation Problem, Spatial filters, Common Spatial Pattern,

CSP based Cognitive State Estimation. EEG source localization, General
Approaches to Source Localization, ICA Method, MUSIC Algorithm, RAP
MUSIC, FOCUSS Algorithm, Determination of the Number of Sources.
Module – IV 8
Instantaneous BSS, BSS based EEG Signal Analysis, Validity of the basic ICA
model, Artifact removal from EEG and MEG, Topography Mapping of
Independent Components.
Module – V 6
Wearable and Wireless EEG based Brain-Computer Interface, Wireless

Electroencephalogram, Information System using WLAN, BCI performance
Evaluation parameters, Feature Extraction, Thought Recognition, Linear
classification.
Text Books:
Page 446 of 465

1. Saied Sanei and J.A. Chambers, EEG Signal Processing, John Wiley & Sons Ltd., 2007.
2. Guido Dornhege, José del R. Millán Thilo Hinterberger, Dennis J. McFarland, Klaus-
Robert Muller, Toward Brain-Computer Interfacing ,MIT Press Cambridge, 2007.
3. Rangaraj M. Rangayyan, Biomedical Signal Analysis- A case-study approach, IEEE Press,
2005.
4. D.C. Reddy, Biomedical Signal Processing – principles and techniques, Tata McGraw-
Hill, New Delhi, 2009.
Introduction to Human- Machine Interface is an open course; hence it only lays down
the foundation of pattern recognition and classification problem.
9. Application of Introduction to Human- Machine Interface in the development of

BCI system.
Page 447 of 465

Direct Assessment
First Quiz 10
Second Quiz 10
Indirect Assessment
Program
Specific
Outcomes
Outcome (PSOs)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
CO1 2 2 3 3 2 3 1 2 3 3 3 3
CO2 2 2 3 3 2 3 1 2 3 3 3 3
CO3 2 2 3 3 2 3 1 3 3 3 3 3
CO4 2 2 3 3 2 3 1 2 3 3 3 3
Page 448 of 465

CO5 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

CD1, CD2, CD5,

CD1
CD1, CD2, CD5,

CD2
CD1, CD2, CD3,

CD3 CD4, CD5, CD8,
Seminars CO3 CD9.
CD1, CD2, CD3,

CD4 CD4, CD5, CD8,
CD4, CD5, CD7,

CD5

CD8
Internets
CD9 Simulation
Page 449 of 465

Course Code: EC 445

Course Title: Introduction to Signal Processing
Pre-requisite(s): NIL
Co- requisite(s):
Class: B. Tech.
Semester / Level: 7
Name of Teacher:
Course Objectives
46. Understand the fundamentals of signal and system.
47. Interpret the different transform techniques of signal processing.
48. Understand time domain and frequency domain signal analysis
49. Demonstrate the analog and digital filtering process.
50. Explain the concept of random variables and parameter estimation in signal
processing.
Course Outcomes
CO1 Explain the fundamentals of signal and system
CO2 Interpret the different transform techniques of signal processing.
CO3 Implement the time domain and frequency domain signal analysis for particular
applications.
CO4 Design and apply the analog and digital filters.
CO5 Apply digital filtering and signal estimation to retrieve information from noisy data.
Page 450 of 465

SYLLABUS
(NO. OF
MODULE LECTURE
HOURS)
Module – I 6
Introduction and Basics: Signals and Systems; Classification of Signals, System

Properties; Linear Algebra Basics-Vectors, Orthogonality, Eigenvalues and
Eigenvectors.
Module – II 8
Continuous Signals and Systems: Laplace Transform, Fourier Transform,

Transfer Functions, Causality and Stability, Poles/Zeros; Differential Equations,
Steady State and Transient Responses, and Convolution Integral.
Module – III 10
Discrete-Time Signals and Systems: LTI Systems; Z-transform; Digital filters;

Difference Equations; Causality and stability; Convolution and Correlation;
Discrete Fourier Transform (DFT), FFT and Window Function; Frequency
Analysis of Signals and Systems; Data Acquisition: Sampling theorem; Sampling
of Bandpass Signals; Quantization; A/D conversion; D/A conversion; Sampling
and Reconstruction; Interpolation and Decimation.
Module – IV 8
Digital Filter Design: Butterworth, Elliptic, Chebyshev low-pass filters. Filter

Realizations; Conversion to high-pass, band-pass, band-stop filters. Discrete-time
filters: IIR and FIR. Linear phase filters. Frequency sampling filters.
Page 451 of 465

Module – V 8
Probability and Random Signals: Random variables; probability density functions

(PDFs); Moments and Cumulants; Multivariate distributions; Time averages,
Ensemble averages, Autocorrelation functions, Crosscorrelation function;
Estimation of parameters of random signals; Linear prediction; Auto-regressive
model; Nonlinear models of signals; Analysis of Nonstationary signals
Page 452 of 465

Text Books:
2. Oppenheim, A. S. Willsky and H. Nawab, “Signals and Systems,” 2nd Ed., Prentice-Hall,
1996.
3. Papoulis and S. U. Pillai, “Probability, Random Variables, and Stochastic Processes,”
McGraw Hill, 2001.
Reference Books:
1. 1. A. V. Oppenheim, Ronald W. Schafer and John R. Buck, “Discrete-Time Signal

Processing,” 2nd Ed., Prentice Hall, 1999.
2. J. G. Proakis, and D. K. Manolakis, “Digital Signal Processing,” 4th Ed., Prentice Hall,
2006.
NA

Teaching through research paper
Direct Assessment

First Quiz 10
Second Quiz 10
Indirect Assessment
Page 453 of 465

Program
Specific
Outcomes
Outcome
(PSOs)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
CO1 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 2
CO2 3 3 2 2 1 2 1 2
CO3 2 3 1 1 3 1 1 1 2
CO4 3 3 2 3 1 1 1 2
CO5 3 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 2

Page 454 of 465

CD8
Internets
CD9 Simulation
Page 455 of 465

Course Code: EC 447

Course Title: Electronic Packaging
Pre-requisite(s): Material physics, Electronics components/devices, Fundamental of IC
Technology
Co- requisite(s):
Class: B. Tech.
Name of Teacher:
Course Objectives
1. Realize the need of Electronic Packaging.

2. Recognize the Chip Scale Packaging.
3. Understand the procedure to develop compact system using electronic packaging
4. Recognize the role of materials in electronic packaging
5. Analyze the different types of packaging techniques.
Course Outcomes
CO1 Recognize the importance of electronic packaging

CO2 Analyze the Chip Scale Packaging in robust system.
CO3 Develop a compact system using electronic packaging.
CO4 Study the role of materials in electronic packaging
CO5 Demonstrate the different types of packaging techniques.
Page 456 of 465

SYLLABUS
(NO. OF
MODULE LECTURE
HOURS)
Module – I
Introduction to Electronic Packaging: Fundamental of Electronic 8

packaging, issue in electronic packaging, hierarchy of interconnection levels,
blue gene, breakthrough in chip packaging technology, SMD benefits and
drawback.
Module – II
Chip Scale Packaging: Step packaging, silicon wafer, low density SMD
process from silicon wafer to package, wafer preparation and dicing, die attach 8
and wire bonding, molding& solder plating, marking and lead trim, chip
attachment to the package substrate, chip package connection: tape automated
bonding, flip-chip.
Module – III
Materials used in electronic packaging: Metals, metal alloys, lead

poisoning, RoHS directive, ceramics, properties of ceramics and glasses,
plastics(polymers), glass transition and melting point, characteristics of 8
package, thermal behavior of package, thermal resistance, thermal aspect in
package density.
Module – IV 8
Electrical model of the package: SPICE Simulation for strong and weak
driver, parasitic capacitance as function of the interconnect, crosstalk, power
Page 457 of 465

integrity and distribution, ground bounce, power/ground count, evolution in
power/ground layout, manufacturability, testability, evolution technology,
reliability.
Module – V 8
IC package types: Dual inline package(DIP), pin grid array(PGA), ceramic

lead less chip(CLLC), small outline package(SOP), plastic lead less chip
connection(PLCC), quad flat package(QFP), ball grid array(BGA), reduced
pin count devices, passive components, advanced packaging: multi-chip
modules(MCM), chip stacked packaged by Intel, chip on board
mounting(COB).
Text Books:
1. Ammakaia, Fundamentals of Electronic Packaging, John Hopkins Engineering for

Professionals
2. T. Di Stefano, Issues Driving Wafer-Level Technologies, Stanford U.
3. Renesas Semiconductor Assembly Service
4. Frear, Materials Issues in Area-Array Microelectronic Packaging
5. Harris & Bushnell, Packages and Power, Rutgers University
6. http://nptel.ac.in/courses/108108031/module1/Lecture01.pdf
Reference Books:
1. The Nordic Electronics Packaging Guideline

2. Brown, Advanced Electronic Packaging: With Emphasis on MCMs
3. Additional sources for Images/devices: Xilinx, IBM, Bill Bertram (Wikipedia), Farnell,
John Fader (Wikipedia), Philips, Maxim, Intel, Fraunhofer Institute, SMART Group,
Hochschule Heilbronn, DRS Test & Energy Management, cpu-world.com,
hardwarezone.com, Amkor, TI, coolingzone.com, NASA Office of Logic Design, Altera,
Fairchild, Emulation Technology, National Semiconductor, OKI, Semiconductor, ASE
Malaysia, Pro Systems China, Toshiba
Page 458 of 465

based assignment

Direct Assessment

First Quiz 10
Second Quiz 10
Indirect Assessment
Program Specific
Outcome (PSOs)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
CO1 3 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 2 3 2 1 3 2
CO2 3 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 2
CO3 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 2 2 2 2 1 3 1
CO4 3 3 3 2 3 3 2 3 2 3 2 2 1 3 1
CO5 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 3 2 2 3 2 1 3 1
Page 459 of 465


Outcome Method Used

CD1
Projectors CO1 CD1, CD7, CD8
CD5
Aids CO5 CD1 and CD2

CD8
CD9 Simulation
Page 460 of 465

Course Code: EC449

Course Title: Wireless Sensor Networks
Pre-requisite(s): ): Knowledge of digital electronics, probability theory, basic understanding of
communication system.
Co- requisite(s):
Class: B. Tech.
Name of Teacher:
Course Objectives
51. An understanding of the concept of wireless sensor network and its major challenges.
52. An understanding of WSN architecture and its design principles.
53. Fundamental understanding on MAC protocols.
54. Fundamental understanding on routing protocols.
55. An ability to design and provide solutions for practical low cost, energy efficient,
reliable and secure wireless sensor network.
Course Outcomes
CO1 Have an ability to evaluate wireless sensor network based on its performance and
minimize the design challenges.
CO2 Have an ability to demonstrate several architectures of WSN and provide a new design
solutions according to the required applications.
CO3 Have an ability to design several MAC protocols for WSNs.
CO4 Have an ability to design several Routing and transport protocols for WSNs.
Page 461 of 465

wellfare of society.
Page 462 of 465

SYLLABUS
(NO. OF
MODULE LECTURE
HOURS)
Module – I
INTRODUCTION TO WIRELESS SENSOR NETWORKS 10
Fundamentals of Wireless Communication Technology, The Electromagnetic

Spectrum, Radio propagation Mechanisms, Characteristics of the Wireless
Channel, mobile ad hoc networks (MANETs) and wireless sensor networks
(WSNs) :concepts and architectures, Applications of Ad Hoc and Sensor
networks, Design Challenges in Ad hoc and Sensor Networks.
Module – II
SINGLE NODE AND NETWORK ARCHITECTURE 7
single node architecture: hardware and software components of a sensor node ,

WSN Network Architecture: typical network architectures-data relaying and
aggregation strategies, Energy consumption of sensor nodes, Operating system
and execution environments, sensor network scenarios, Optimization goals and
figures of merit, Design principles of WSNs
Module – III
MAC PROTOCOLS FOR WIRELESS SENSOR NETWORKS 7
Fundamental of MAC protocols, MAC protocols for WSNs, Low duty cycle
protocols and wakeup concepts, contention based and scheduled based protocols
(LEACH, SMACS, and TRAMA), IEEE 802.15.4 MAC protocols, Topology
control and clustering.
Module – IV
ROUTING AND TRANSPORT CONTROLS PROTOCOL 10
Routing challenges and design issues in WSNs, Wireless network routing

protocols, Energy efficient unicast routing, energy efficient broadcast /multicast
routing, Geographical routing, traditional transport control protocols, Design
issues of transport control protocols, CODA, ESRT, RMST, PSFQ, GRAUDA
and Ad hoc Transport protocols (ATP)
Page 463 of 465

Module – V
LOCALIZATION AND POSITIONING: 6
Properties of localization and positioning procedures, possible approaches:

Proximity, Trilateration and Triangulation, Mathematical basics for the lateration
problem, single hop localization, positioning in multihop environment.
Text Books:
1. Kazem Sohraby, Daniel Minoli, Taieb Znati, “Wireless Sensor Networks’, John Wiley & Sons
Inc. Publication, 2007
2. Holger Karl, and Andreas Willig, “Protocols and Architectures for Wireless Sensor Networks”
John Wiley & Sons Inc. Publication.
Direct Assessment

First Quiz 10
Second Quiz 10
Indirect Assessment
Page 464 of 465

Program
Specific
Outcomes
Outcome
(PSOs)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
CO1 3 1 3 2 1
CO2 3 3 1 3 2 2
CO3 3 3 1 3 2 1
CO4 3 3 1 3 2 3
CO5 3 3 1 3 1 1 2 3 2 2


CD8
Internets
CD9 Simulation
Page 465 of 465

S Course Syllabus BTECH CBCS 24082020

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

S Course Syllabus BTECH CBCS 24082020

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

S Course Syllabus BTECH CBCS 24082020

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

BIRLA INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY

CHOICE BASED CREDIT SYSTEM (CBCS) CURRICULUM

NAME OF THE PROGRAMME

B.TECH. Electronics and Communication Engineering

NAME OF THE DEPARTMENT

Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering

• To prepare the students to think independently, take initiative, lead a team in an

• To pursue high quality contemporary research through continued interaction with

1. Engineering Knowledge: Apply knowledge of mathematics, science, engineering

2. Problem Analysis: Identify, formulate, research literature and analyze complex

3. Design/ Development of Solutions: Design solutions for complex engineering problems

4. Conduct investigations of complex problems using research-based knowledge and

6. The Engineer and Society: Apply reasoning informed by contextual knowledge to

7. Environment and Sustainability: Understand the impact of professional engineering

9. Individual and Team Work: Function effectively as an individual, and as a member or

10. Communication: Communicate effectively on complex engineering activities with the

11. Project Management and Finance: Demonstrate knowledge and understanding of

Engineering Graduates will be able to:

3. Design/development of solutions: Design solutions for complex engineering problems

4. Conduct investigations of complex problems: Use research-based knowledge and

7. Environment and sustainability: Understand the impact of the professional engineering

9. Individual and team work: Function effectively as an individual, and as a member or

10. Communication: Communicate effectively on complex engineering activities with the

BIRLA INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY- MESRA, RANCHI

Mode of delivery & credits Total

MC MC101/10 Choice of : NCC/NSS/

FS PH114 Physics Lab 0 0 3 1.5

MC MC105/10 Choice of : NCC/NSS/

GRAND TOTAL FOR FIRST YEAR 43.5

FIRST FS BE101 Biological Science for Engineers 2 0 0 2

GE IT 201 Basics of Intelligent Computing 3 0 0 3

EE205 Circuit Theory 3 1 0 4

MC MC201/202/2 Choice of : NCC/NSS/

SECOND EC202 Electronic Devices Lab 0 0 3 1.5

EC251 Probability and Random Processes 3 0 0 3

EC253 Analog Circuits 3 0 0 3

EC257 Electromagnetic Fields and Waves 3 0 0 3

SECOND MC205/206/2 Choice of : NCC/NSS/

EC254 Analog Circuits Lab 0 0 3 1.5

EC351 Fiber Optic Communication 3 0 0 3

FIRST HSS MT123 Business Communications 3 0 0 3

PC EC352 Fiber Optic Communication Lab 0 0 3 1.5

EC327 Mobile & Cellular Communication EC255 Analog Communication,

EC331 Issues in Nanoscale CMOS Design EC101 Basics of Electronics and

* PROGRAMME ELECTIVES TO BE OPTED ONLY BY THE DEPARTMENT STUDENTS

EC357 Speech and Audio Processing

EC359 Microcontrollers and Interfacing

EC367 Computer Networking

EC373 Introduction to Sensors and Transducers EC208 Electronic Measurement Lab

EC375 High Speed Electronics EC101 Basics of Electronics and

EC381 Error correcting Codes EC329 Information Theory and Coding 3 0 0 3

EC383 DSP Architecture for VLSI EC331 VLSI Systems 3 0 0 3

EC387 Wireless Communication EC255 Analog Communication, 3 0 0 3

* PROGRAMME ELECTIVES TO BE OPTED ONLY BY THE DEPARTMENT STUDENTS

EC351 Fiber Optic Communication

EC101 Basics of Electronics and

EC205 Signals and Systems,

* PROGRAMME ELECTIVES TO BE OPTED ONLY BY THE DEPARTMENT STUDENTS

EC423 Radar Engineering EC257 Electromagnetic Fields and Waves